001-055 Alfa 156 GB - AD FS 2.0 Authentication Web site

001-055 Alfa 156 GB - AD FS 2.0 Authentication Web site
Dear Client,
Thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo.
Your Alfa 156 has been designed to guarantee the safety, comfort and driving pleasure typical of Alfa Romeo.
This booklet will help you to get to know the characteristics and operation of your car.
The following pages contain all the indications necessary for you to be able to maintain the high standards of performance, quality, safety and
respect for the environment which characterize this Alfa 156.
The Warranty Booklet also contains the regulations, the warranty certificate and a guide to the services offered by Alfa Romeo.
Services which are essential and precious because, when you purchase an Alfa Romeo you are not only acquiring a car, but the tranquility that
comes from knowing that an efficient, willing and widespread organization is at your service for any assistance problems you may have.
Whats more every single component of the Alfa 156 is fully recyclable. At the end of your car’s useful lifespan any Alfa Romeo dealer
would be pleased to make arrangements for you car to be recycled (in compliance with current regulations in force).
Nature benefits in two ways: there’s no pollution from waste disposal, and the demand for raw materials is reduced.
Have a good trip.
This booklet describes all the versions of the Alfa 156, so you should only consider the information concerning
the trim level, engine and version purchased by you.
1
MUST BE READ!
REFUELLING
K
Petrol engines: only refuel with unleaded petrol with octane rating (RON) no less than 95.
Diesel engines: only refuel with diesel fuel conforming to the European specification EN590.
ENGINE START-UP
Petrol engines with mechanical transmission: make sure the handbrake is pulled; put the gear lever into neutral;
press the clutch pedal down to the floor without touching the accelerator, then turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as
soon as the engine starts.
Petrol engines with Selespeed transmission or Q-System: keep the brake pedal fully depressed; turn the ignition key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine has started; the transmission sets to neutral automatically (the display
shows position N).
Diesel engines: Turn the ignition key to MAR and wait for the Y and m warning lights to go off; turn the ignition
key to AVV and release it as soon as the engine starts.
PARKING OVER FLAMMABLE MATERIAL

2
While functioning normally, the catalytic converter reaches high temperatures. For this reason do not park the car over inflammable material, grass, dry leaves, pine needles, etc.: fire hazard.
PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
U
A system for continuously monitoring emission system components to ensure greater environmental protection is fitted in
your car.
ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
쇵
If, after buying the car, you decide to add electrical accessories (that will gradually drain the battery), contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the car’s electric system can support the
required load.
CODE CARD
Keep the code card in a safe place, not in the car. You should always keep the electronic code written on the CODE card with
you in case you need to carry out an emergency start-up procedure.
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Correct maintenance of the car is essential for ensuring it stays in tip-top condition and safeguards its safety features, its environmental friendliness and low running costs for a long time to come.
THE OWNER’S MANUAL CONTAINS…
…information, tips and important warnings regarding the safe, correct driving of your car, and its maintenance. Pay particular attention to the symbols " (personal safety) # (environmental protection) â (car well-being).
3
Any queries concerning servicing should be forwarded to the showroom from which the vehicle was purchased, the subsidiary company or to
our branch offices or associated companies.
Warranty Booklet
The Warranty Booklet is delivered together with every new vehicle and contains the regulations tied to the services given by Alfa Romeo Services and to the warranty conditions.
Correctly carrying out the scheduled services specified by the manufacturer is the best way to maintain the performance, safety characteristics
and low running costs of your vehicle. It is also necessary to maintain warranty cover.
“Service” guide
This contains the Alfa Romeo Authorized Services. The services can be recognized by the presence of the Alfa Romeo badge and logo.
The Alfa Romeo organization in Italy can be found in the telephone book under the letter “A” Alfa Romeo.
Not all the models described in this booklet are available in all countries. Only some of the fittings described in this booklet are fitted as standard to the vehicle. The list of available accessories should be requested from the Alfa Romeo Dealers.
4
THE SYMBOLS USED IN THIS BOOKLET
The symbols illustrated in these pages show the subjects which should,
in particular, be closely studied.
PERSONAL
SAFETY
Warning: partially or
fully ignoring these rules may lead
to serious injury.
PROTECTING THE
ENVIRONMENT
This indicates the correct procedures
to be followed to prevent
the vehicle from damaging
the environment.
VEHICLE
SAFETY
Warning: partially or fully ignoring these
rules may lead to serious damage
being caused to the vehicle which, in some
circumstances, may cause forfeiture of the
warranty cover.
The texts, illustrations and specifications given in this booklet refer to the vehicle at the time of going to press.
As part of our ongoing striving to improve our products, Alfa Romeo may introduce technical changes
during production, therefore the specifications and fittings may be altered without prior notice.
For details on this subject, please apply to the manufacturer’s sales network.
5
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SYMBOLS
Special coloured labels have been attached
near to or actually on some of the components making up your Alfa 156.
These labels bear symbols that remind you
of the precautions to be taken as regards
that particular component.
ALFA ROMEO
CODE SYSTEM
To increase protection against attempted
theft, the car is fitted with an electronic engine lock system (Alfa Romeo CODE) which
is activated automatically when the ignition
key is removed. In fact the grip of each key
contains an electronic device which modulates the radio frequency signal transmitted when the engine is started by a special
aerial incorporated in the ignition switch. This
modulated signal is the “password” by
which the control unit recognises the key
and only in this condition can the engine
be started.
THE KEYS
The car is delivered with two keys, key
(A-fig.1) with metal insert and remote
control function and another key with metal
insert only, without remote control.
The key remote control operates:
– door centralised opening/locking
– opening luggage compartment boot/
tailgate
– activation/deactivation of electronic
alarm (if existing)
A0B0016m
6
fig. 1
– the ignition switch
– the driver's door lock and, optional for
versions/markets where applicable, the passenger's door lock
– passenger’s side Air bag deactivation.
WARNING In order to ensure perfect efficiency of the electronic devices contained
inside the keys, they should never be directly
exposed to the rays of the sun.
The CODE card (fig. 2) is also supplied
with the key and it contains the codes of the
keys (both the mechanical one and the electronic one for emergency starting).
The code numbers on the CODE card must
be kept in a safe place, not in the car.
The driver should always keep the electronic code given on the CODE card with him
in the event of having to carry out emergency starting.
KEY WITH REMOTE CONTROL
The key with remote control (fig. 3) is
fitted with:
– a metal insert (A) that can be enclosed
in the key grip
– button (B) for remote opening/closing of the doors and turning the electronic
alarm on/off (where fitted)
– a button (C) for remote boot unlocking
– removable hook ring (D)
If the car changes owner,
the new owner must be
given all the keys and the
CODE card.
– a button (E) for power-assisted opening
of the metal insert.
A0B0010m
fig. 2
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Key metal insert operates:
A0B9000m
fig. 3
7
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
The metallic insert (A) of the key operates:
– the ignition switch
– the driver's door lock and, optional for
versions/markets where applicable, the passenger's door lock
– passenger’s Air bag deactivation.
To move the metallic insert out of the key
grip, press button (E).
WARNING
When button (E) is
pressed, take the utmost
care to prevent the metal insert
from causing injury or damage
when it comes out. Button (E) must
only be pressed when the key is
away from the body, in particular
the eyes, and from objects that
could be spoilt (e.g. clothes). Never
leave the key unattended to prevent anyone, especially children,
from holding it and pressing button
(E) inadvertently.
8
To insert the metallic insert in the key grip,
press the button (E-fig. 3) to release the
insert and turn it in the direction of the arrow until it clicks.
To open/close the doors by remote control, press button (B). On cars fitted with
electronic alarm system, pressing button (B)
also turns the electronic alarm.
WARNING Certain radio devices outside
the car (e.g. mobile phones, HAM radio systems) could disturb the remote control frequency. In this case the remote control could
malfunction.
OPENING THE BOOT
The boot can be opened by remote control
from outside pressing button (C-fig. 3),
also when the electronic alarm (where fitted) is on.
In this case the alarm system switches off
the boot volumetric protection and control
sensor, the system gives two “beeps” (with
the exceptions of versions for certain markets) and the direction indicators light up for
about three seconds.
Closing the boot again, the control functions are restored, the system gives two
“beeps” (with the exceptions of versions for
certain markets) and the direction indicators
light up for about three seconds.
Each time the ignition key is turned to
STOP position, the Alfa Romeo CODE system deactivates the functions of the engine
electronic control unit.
Each time the engine is started, turning the
key to the MAR position, the control unit
of the Alfa Romeo CODE system sends a
recognition code to the engine control unit
to deactivate the inhibition of the functions.
The recognition code, which is crypted and
variable between over 4 billion combinations, is only sent if the system control unit
has recognised the code sent to it by the
key, which contains an electronic transmitter, through an aerial in the ignition switch.
A0B0599m
fig. 4
This condition is indicated by a brief flash
of the warning light (A) on the check panel.
If the code has not been recognised correctly, the warning light (A) stays on together with the warning light (B).
In this case, you are recommended to return the key to the STOP position and then
back to MAR; if the inhibition persists, try
again possibly with the other key provided
with the car. If it is still impossible to start
the car carry out the emergency starting procedure described in section “In an emergency” and turn to an Alfa Romeo Authorized Service.
WARNING Every electronic key has its
own code, which must be memorised by the
system control unit. To memorise new keys,
up to a maximum of eight, apply solely to
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services taking with
you all the keys in your possession, the
CODE card, a personal identity document
and the car’s possession documents.
The codes of the keys not
provided during the new
memorising procedure are
erased from the memory. This is to
ensure that any lost or stolen keys
can no longer be used to start the
car.
WARNING The Alfa Romeo CODE Y
warning light comes on when travelling with
the ignition key on MAR:
1) If the warning lamp lights up while the
car is moving, it means that the system is
running a self-diagnosis (e.g. due to a voltage drop). The first time you stop you can
test the system as follows: switch the engine off by turning the ignition key to
STOP; then turn the key back to MAR:
the warning lamp will light up and should
go out in the space of about one second. If
the warning lamp fails to go out, leave the
key at STOP for more than 30 seconds and
repeat the procedure described previously.
If the problem persists, contact your Alfa
Romeo Authorized Service.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
OPERATION (fig. 4)
9
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
2) If the warning lamp flashes it means
that the car is not protected by the immobiliser. Contact your Alfa Romeo Authorized
Service immediately and get them to store
the codes of all the keys in the memory.
WARNING The system is protected by
a 10 A fuse housed in the fuse-holder set
under the dashboard (see paragraph “If a
fuse or relay blows” in the chapter “In an
emergency”).
If after 2 seconds with
the key in the MAR position, the warning light turn
on again flashing, this means that
the code of the keys has not been
memorised, thus the car is not protected by the Alfa Romeo CODE
system against attempted theft. In
this case, contact an Alfa Romeo
Authorized Service to have the key
codes memorised.
A0B9000m
10
fig. 5
CHANGING THE BATTERY
OF THE KEY WITH REMOTE
CONTROL
If when pressing button (B or C-fig. 5)
the control is rejected or is not performed,
the battery should be replaced by a new one
of the same type to be found c/o normal
retailers. On versions fitted with electronic
alarm, the need to replace the remote control battery is indicated by the coming on,
with fixed light, of the deterrent led set on
the dashboard near the central air vent.
Dead batteries are harmful for the environment.
They must be disposed of
in special containers as specified by
current regulations. Avoid exposure to naked flames and high temperatures. Keep out of reach of
children.
– move the metal insert (A) to the unlocking position;
(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
– turn the pin (B), taking the reference
mark (dot) of the cut to the UNLOCK position (2);
DESCRIPTION
– working on the notch (C) remove the
battery holder (D);
– change the battery (E) putting it in the
position shown on the holder;
– insert the holder back in the key and
lock it, turning the reference mark of the pin
(B) to the LOCK position (1).
A0B0047m
REMOTE CONTROL (fig. 8)
The remote control is built into the key and
it is fitted with a button for activating the
alarm (B-fig.8)
The system comprises: transmitter, receiver, control unit with siren and volumetric sensors and anti-lift sensor. The electronic
alarm is controlled by a receiver inside the
car and it is turned on and off through the
remote control incorporated in the key which
sends the crypted and variable code. The
electronic alarm monitors: unlawful opening
of the doors, bonnet and boot (perimetral
protection), operation of the ignition key,
battery and emergency key cable cutting,
the presence of moving bodies (volumetric
protection), any abnormal raising/sloping
of the car (for versions/markets where applicable) and operates the central door locking system. It also makes it possible to cut
off the volumetric protection.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
ELECTRONIC ALARM
To change the battery (fig. 7):
A0B9000m
WARNING The engine inhibitor function
is guaranteed by the Alfa Romeo CODE system which is activated automatically when
the ignition key is removed.
fig. 7
fig. 8
11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
REQUEST FOR ADDITIONAL
KEYS WITH REMOTE CONTROL
The receiver can recognise up to 5 keys
with remote control. If during the life of the
car a new key with remote control is needed
for any reason whatsoever, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services directly, taking
with you the CODE card, a personal identity document and the car’s possession documents.
ACTIVATING THE ALARM
Surveillance
When the doors and boot/bonnet lids are
closed and the ignition key is in the STOP
or PARK position (key removed), point the
remote control towards the car and then
press and release the button (B-fig. 8).
When the system has been turned on, the
led (A-fig. 9) on the dashboard will flash
to indicate that the system is in the surveillance mode. The led will flash continuously
while the system is under surveillance.
With the exception of some markets the
system sounds a beep and the door lock is
engaged.
WARNING Operation of the electronic
alarm is adapted at the origin to the regulations of the different countries.
Engagement of the alarm is preceded by
a self-diagnosis phase characterised by a
change in the frequency at which the deterrent led (A-fig. 9) on the dashboard
flashes. If an anomaly is detected the system gives off a further beep.
A0B0563m
12
fig. 9
If, after the alarm has been activated, a
second acoustic signal is heard, check that
all the doors and bonnet/boot are closed
properly and engage the system once again.
On the other if a door or bonnet/boot lid
is not correctly closed it will not be controlled
by the system.
If the control signal is repeated when the
doors and bonnet/boot are closed properly
this means that the self-diagnosis function
has detected a system operating fault, in
which case it is necessary to contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
DEACTIVATING THE ALARM
To deactivate the alarm, press the button
on the key with remote control. The system
performs the following (with the exception
of some markets):
– the direction indicators turn on twice
briefly
– two beeps are sounded briefly by the
siren
– the doors are released.
WARNING If the led (A-fig. 9) in the
car stays on when the system has been deactivated, (maximum of 2 minutes or until
the ignition key is moved to MAR) the following should be borne in mind:
– if the led stays on permanently, it means
that the remote control batteries are flat and
need replacing;
– if the led continues to flash, but at different intervals than normal, it means that
attempts to steal the car have been made,
counting the number of flashes it is also possible to identify the type of attempt:
1 flash:
right front door
2 flashes:
left front door
3 flashes:
right rear door
4 flashes:
left rear door
5 flashes:
volumetric sensors
6 flashes:
bonnet
7 flashes:
boot
8 flashes:
tampering with car starting
cables
9 flashes:
tampering with battery or
cutting emergency key cables
10 flashes:
at least three causes of
alarm.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Self-diagnosis and monitoring
of doors and bonnet/boot
13
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
AUTOMATIC ENGAGEMENT
OF THE ALARM
(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
If the alarm has not been engaged with
the remote control it will come on automatically after an established time of 30
seconds from the moment that the ignition
key has been turned to the STOP or
PARK positions and a door or the boot has
been opened and then closed again. This
condition is shown by the intermittent illumination of the led in the car and by the signalling described previously.
To deactivate the alarm press the button
on the remote control.
The alarm is also automatically engaged
when the doors are closed using the key.
When the alarm is engaged automatically
the doors are not locked.
WHEN THE ALARM
IS TRIGGERED
When the alarm is engaged it will sound
when:
– one of the doors, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened;
– the battery is disconnected or the electric cables are cut, or the emergency key cables are cut;
– intrusion into the passenger compartment, e.g. window being broken (volumetric
protection);
– attempt to start the engine (key at
MAR);
– abnormal car raising/sloping (for versions/markets where applicable).
Depending on the markets, the triggering
of the alarm will activate the siren and the
hazard warning lights (for about 26 seconds). The methods of operation and the
number of cycles may vary depending on
the versions/markets.
However a maximum number of cycles is
foreseen.
Once the alarm cycle has come to an end,
the system will return to its normal monitoring state.
14
INTERRUPTING THE ALARM
To interrupt the alarm press the button on
the remote control or, if the remote control
battery is down, get into the car, insert the
key into the ignition switch and turn the key
to MAR.
WARNING If it is necessary for the vehicle to lie inactive for long periods (over 3
weeks), close the vehicle using the key to
deactivate the alarm.
To guarantee correct operation all the windows and the sunroof, if any, should be
closed.
This function can be excluded (for example when leaving animals on-board the car)
by performing the following operations in
quick succession: when the key is at MAR,
move the key to the STOP position and
then return the key to MAR and then once
again to the STOP position. Remove the
ignition key.
The led in the car will come on for about
2 seconds to confirm that the function has
been excluded.
To restore volumetric protection move the
ignition key to the MAR position and hold
it in this position for more than 30 seconds.
If requiring to activate an electric control
operated by the ignition key at MAR (e.g.
electric windows) with the volumetric protection deactivated, turn the ignition key
to MAR, operate the control and return the
key to STOP within a maximum time of
30 seconds. This way volumetric protection
is not restored.
CUTTING OUT OPERATION
OF THE SIREN
(for versions/markets where
applicable)
When requiring to dispense with the siren
acoustic signalling in the alarm condition,
simply keep the remote control button (Bfig. 10) pressed for 4 seconds when engaging the system.
This condition is shown by a series of 5
beeps in quick succession after the normal
acoustic/visual signals when the system is
operated.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
VOLUMETRIC PROTECTION
The next time the system is activated, normal operation of the siren is restored automatically.
A0B9000m
fig. 10
15
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
MINISTERIAL HOMOLOGATION
In keeping with the laws in force in each
country on the subject of radio frequency,
we point out that:
– the separate homologation numbers for
each market are given on the last pages of
this handbook before the alphabetical index
(for some countries also homologation document);
REMOTE CONTROL
DOOR LOCKING SYSTEM
The system comprises a receiver inside the
car and a transmitter (remote control) incorporated in the key (E-fig. 11).
To lock/unlock the locks, point the transmitter towards the car, press and release the
button (B-fig. 11).
– for markets in which the transmitter
needs to be marked with the homologation
number, this has been stated on the component.
(Depending on the versions/markets, the
code may also be marked on the transmitter and/or on the receiver).
A0B9000m
16
fig. 10
WARNING Should it be necessary to
programme additional remote controls, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
– AVV: unstable position for starting the
engine.
THE SWITCH (fig. 12)
WARNING If the engine does not start,
return the ignition key to the STOP position and repeat the sequence.
The key can be moved to one of four positions:
– STOP: engine switched off, key can be
removed, engine lock engaged, steering lock
engaged, all services excluded apart from
those powered directly (e.g. hazard warning lights).
– MAR: drive position. The engine lock
is deactivated and all electrical devices are
powered.
WARNING Never leave the key in this
position when the engine is stationary.
The ignition block is fitted with a safety device preventing it from being moved to the
AVV position when the engine is already
running.
– PARK: engine switched off, key can
be removed, engine lock engaged, steering lock engaged, sidelights automatically
switched on.
WARNING To turn the key to the
PARK position, button (A) located on the
switch should be pressed first.
WARNING
When leaving the car always remove the key from
the ignition to prevent any passenger in the car from inadvertently activating the controls.
Never leave children unattended in
the car. Remember to engage the
handbrake and if the car is facing
uphill, first gear and if the car is
facing downhill, reverse.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
IGNITION DEVICE
If the ignition device is
tampered with (for example during an attempted
break-in) have it checked over by
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services,
before travelling again.
A0B0610m
fig. 12
17
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
18
STEERING LOCK
DOORS
– To close the door, turn the key in the opposite direction.
Engaging lock:
– move the ignition key to the STOP or
PARK position and remove the key lightly
turning the steering wheel to facilitate the
locking action.
WARNING
Before opening a door, ensure that this can be done
safely.
WARNING
Never remove the key
with the car on the move.
The steering wheel would lock automatically the first time the steering wheel is turned. This also occurs if the car is towed.
– To open the door, only with the inner
knob (A-fig. 14) raised, pull the opening handle (A-fig. 15).
– To close, press the button (A-fig. 14)
also with the door open, then close the door.
Releasing the lock:
– turn the key to the MAR position and
gently rock the steering wheel.
Rear doors
OPENING/CLOSING FROM
OUTSIDE
Front doors
– To open the driver's door turn the key
clockwise and to open the passengers' door,
optional for versions/markets where applicable, turn the key anti-clockwise, then
remove the key and press the button (Afig. 13).
WARNING
It is absolutely forbidden to
carry out whatever aftermarket operation involving steering
system or steering column modifications (e.g.: installation of antitheft Device) that could badly affect
performance and safety, cause the
lapse of warranty and also result in
non-compliance of the car with homologation requirements.
A0B0023m
fig. 13
A0B0369m
fig. 14
Rear doors
CENTRALIZED LOCKING
Front doors
WARNING
The rear doors can only be
opened if the child safety
lock has been released.
This permits centralized locking of all
doors, both front and rear.
– To open the door pull the handle (Afig. 16) regardless of the position of knob
(B).
– To close the door pull the flap. To prevent the door from being opened from outside press knob (B).
– To open the door pull handle (Afig. 17).
– To close the door press the knob (B)
even when the flap is open, and then close
the flap.
If the boot is not properly shut, the warning light ´ will come on on the instrument
panel or (where applicable) on the Infocenter display (together with relevant message).
A0B0025m
fig. 15
To operate the centralized locking device
the doors must be perfectly closed otherwise
the system will not work.
For versions/markets, where applicable,
central locking depends on the complete
closing of all the doors and of the boot.
– From outside: when the doors are
closed, insert and turn the key in the lock of
one of the two front doors.
– From inside: when the doors are
closed, press one of the knobs (B-fig. 16)
located on the front doors, engage/release
the centralized locking system.
A0B0024m
fig. 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
OPENING/CLOSING
FROM INSIDE
A0B0026m
fig. 17
19
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
By pressing the knob (B-fig. 17) on one
of the rear doors only that particular door
will be locked.
WARNING For the front doors it is not
possible to keep the knob (B-fig. 16)
down if the door has not been shut properly.
WARNING The centralized locking system can be deactivated, thus unlocking all
doors, by lifting the door opening lever on
one of the two front doors.
If the power supply is interrupted (burnt
fuse, battery disconnected, etc.) each door
can be opened manually from both inside
and outside the car.
CHILD SAFETY LOCK
WARNING
Always use this device
when carrying children.
The rear doors are equipped with a special
device (fig. 18) which prevents the door
being opened from inside.
WARNING Each device only acts on the
door on which it is installed.
The device can only be engaged with the
doors open, raising or lowering the control
with the ignition key:
position 1 (control up) – device engaged
(door locked);
position 2 (control down) – device released (door can be opened from inside).
WARNING
After activating the safety
device check that it is
working correctly by pulling on the
inner lever used to open the door.
WARNING The intervention of the inertial fuel cut-off switch causes the automatic
door unlock and inhibits door locking for
about 30 seconds. After this time, door locking control unit operation is restored.
A0B0027m
20
fig. 18
WARNING
Adjustments may be made
solely with the car stationary.
Fig. 19: standard equipment;
Fig. 20: sporty seats (where applicable);
Fig. 21: sporty seats and lateral air bags.
MOVING THE SEATS
BACKWARDS OR FORWARDS
ADJUSTING THE HEIGHT
OF THE DRIVER’S SEAT
Lift lever (A) and push the seat backwards
or forwards: in the driving position the arms
should be slightly flexed and hands should
rest on the rim of the steering wheel.
To raise the seat, pull the lever (B) taking it upwards, then continue operating the
lever (up and down) until reaching the required height, then release the lever. To
lower the seat, push the lever (B) downwards, then operate the lever (up and
down) until reaching the height required.
WARNING
Once you have let go off
the lever, check that the
seat is firmly locked in the runners
by trying to move it back and
forth. If the seat is not locked properly, in the case of collision t might
move unexpectedly with clearly
dangerous consequences.
WARNING Adjustment must only be carried out when seated in the driver’s seat.
A0B0028m
fig. 19
A0B0054m
fig. 20
ADJUSTING THE ANGLE
OF THE BACKREST
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
FRONT SEATS
This can be done by turning the knob (C)
until the desired position is reached.
The sporty seats equipped with lateral air
bags have an electric adjustment; use the
button (D-fig. 21) on the outer part of
the seat to set the seat back in the required
position.
21
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
BACKREST ANGLE ELECTRIC
ADJUSTMENT
(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
LUMBAR ADJUSTMENT
OF THE DRIVER’S SEAT
(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
This can be done by pressing button (D)
located on the outer part of the seat.
Adjustment is done by turning the knob
(E) until reaching the most comfortable position.
The seat warming pad can be switched on
and off using switch (A) on the inner side
of the seat; for sporty seats, press the switch
(F-fig. 21) on the outer side of the seat.
CENTRE ARMREST
(where required)
When the warming pad is on, the warning
light (B) on the outer side of the seat turns
on.
A0B0053m
SEAT WARMING (fig. 23)
(optional for versions/markets
owhere applicable)
To use the armrest lower it as illustrated.
Inside the armrest there is an oddment
compartment (B-fig. 22); to use it, raise
the cover (A).
A0B0293m
22
fig. 21
fig. 22
A0B0052m
fig. 23
To increase the safety of passengers, the
headrests are adjustable in height and, for
versions with Recaro seats they are also adjustable in rake.
To adjust the height: move the headrest
up or down, then release it and make sure
that it is locked in one of the pre-established
positions.
WARNING
Remember that the head
restraints must be positioned so that they are supporting
the back of the head and not the
neck. They will only be able to provide effective protection in the
event of a collision if they are in
this position.
REAR SEAT
CENTRE ARMREST (fig. 26)
(where required)
To use the centre armrest, lower it holding
the grip (A) as illustrated.
A0B0564m
For angle adjustment (where applicable):
take hold of the headrest and turn it to the
most suitable position.
WARNING The shape of the headrest
may vary depending on the version and/or
market. The example shown is used only to
demonstrate the methods by which it can
be adjusted.
REAR POCKETS (where
required) (fig. 25)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
ADJUSTING THE HEADRESTS
(fig. 24)
The front seats are provided with a pocket
in the rear of the seat back.
fig. 26
A0B0050m
fig. 24
A0B0320m
fig. 25
A0B0565m
fig. 27
23
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SKI COMPARTMENT
(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
The compartment may be used for carrying long loads.
To gain access to this compartment, lower
the armrest, pull the grip (A-fig. 27) of
the lid and lower it onto the armrest
(fig. 28).
The compartment can be extended by removing the armrest: with the armrest lowered, press the two small handles (Bfig. 29) at the base of the armrest inwards
and remove it. Then pull the grip of the lid
and lower it onto the rear seat (fig. 30).
HEADREST
The car is fitted with two headrests for the
side seats. On request, for versions/markets
where applicable, a third headrest is available for the centre seat.
If necessary the headrests can be removed
as follows:
– raise the headrest to the maximum
height (where required);
– press both buttons (A and B-fig. 31)
and remove the headrests.
A0B0322m
fig. 28
A0B00323m
24
fig. 29
A0B0324m
fig. 30
A0B0566m
fig. 31
The steering wheel position is adjustable
and may be move nearer to or further away
from the driver and also raised or lowered.
To do this, it is necessary to release lever
(A-fig. 32) and pull it towards the steering wheel.
After setting the steering wheel in the most
appropriate position, lock it pushing the lever
fully home.
WARNING
The steering wheel position
must only be adjusted with
the car stationary.
ADJUSTING THE
REAR-VIEW MIRRORS
INTERNAL REAR-VIEW
MIRROR
WARNING
It is absolutely forbidden to
carry out whatever aftermarket operation involving steering
system or steering column modifications (e.g.: installation of antitheft Device) that could badly affect
performance and safety, cause the
lapse of warranty and also result in
non-compliance of the car with homologation requirements.
The mirror, fitted with a safety device
which releases it in the event of a violent
impact can be moved to two positions: normal or anti-glare by operating lever (Afig. 33).
A0B0035m
fig. 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
STEERING WHEEL
ADJUSTMENT
A0B0595m
fig. 33
25
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
DOOR MIRRORS
Electrically adjustable (fig. 34)
Select the mirror to be adjusted (right or
left) using switch (A):
– move switch (A) to (B) to adjust the
left door mirror;
– move switch (A) to (D) to adjust the
right door mirror.
Then, reposition the switch (A) in the intermediate locking position (C).
WARNING The mirror can only be adjusted electrically when the ignition key is
in the MAR position.
Folding (fig. 35)
Defrosting/demisting (fig. 36)
– If necessary (for example when the size
of the mirror causes difficulty in narrow
spaces) the door mirror can be folded in towards the car from position (A) to position
(B).
The electric mirrors can be fitted with heating coils which are operated together with
rearscreen heating pressing button (A) and
prevent the mirrors from frosting and/or
misting.
WARNING This function is timed and
is deactivated after a few minutes.
WARNING
When travelling the door
mirrors must always be in
position (A).
WARNING
As the driver’s door mirror
is curved, it may slightly
alter the perception of distance.
A0B0018m
26
fig. 34
A0B0370m
fig. 35
A0B0399m
fig. 36
WARNING With ignition key at STOP
windows can be opened manually for about
max. 2 minutes or until opening one of the
front doors.
WARNING The driver’s power window
is fitted with a “continuous automatic operation” for both lowering and raising the
window device. A brief press on the upper
or lower part of the button will cause the
window to move and continue its stroke automatically: the window stops in the position required by pressing either the upper or
lower part of the button again.
Driver’s (fig. 37-39)
Passenger’s (fig. 38)
The driver’s door panel plate contains the
buttons which, with the ignition key at
MAR, operate the following windows:
Button (A) is used to operate the passenger’s window.
FRONT
A – left front window
B – right front window
C – left rear window (where fitted)
REAR (where required)
The rear windows are operated by the handles on the door panels.
On request for versions/markets where
applicable, the rear doors can be fitted with
power windows with split controls on driver’s
door (C and D-fig. 39) and on each rear
door (A-fig. 40).
With the ignition key at MAR, press the
button to lower the window; pull the button
to raise it.
WARNING The passenger’s window is
fitted with a device for “continuous automatic operation” only for lowering it. The
device works as described for the driver’s
window.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
POWER WINDOWS
D – right rear window (where fitted)
E – rear door window control inhibitor
(where fitted) (with the inhibitor activated
the button is up, press again to re-enable
the rear buttons).
A0B0031m
fig. 37
A0B0032m
fig. 38
27
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
WARNING
Incorrect use of the power
windows can be dangerous.
Before and during operation of them
always make sure that the passengers are not exposed to the risk of
harm caused either directly by the
windows in motion or by personal
objects drawn or knocked by them.
WARNING
When leaving the car always remove the ignition
key to prevent passengers (especially children) from being injured
by the power windows inadvertently operated.
SEAT BELTS
USING THE SEAT BELTS
The belt should be worn keeping the chest
straight and rested against the seat back.
Take hold the tongue (A-fig. 41) and insert it into the buckle (B), until hearing the
locking click.
Do not hold the button
down when the window is
fully open or fully closed.
At removal, if it jams, let it rewind for a
short stretch, then pull it out again without
jerking.
Versions not fitted with power windows
have a window winder (A-fig. 40a) for
working the window by hand.
To unfasten the seat belts, press button
(C). Guide the seat belt with your hand
while it is rewinding, to prevent it from twisting.
A0B0033m
fig. 39
A0B0034m
28
fig. 40
A0B0608m
fig. 40a
A0B0325m
fig. 41
Through the reel, the belt automatically
adapts to the body of the passenger wearing it, allowing freedom of movement.
When the car is parked on a steep slope
the reel mechanism may block; this is normal. The reel mechanism prevents the webbing coming out when it is jerked or if the
car brakes sharply, in a collision or when cornering at high speed.
The centre seat is fitted with inertial seat
belt with three anchor points and reel like
side seats (fig. 42).
On request, for versions/markets where
applicable, the rear seat can be fitted with
inertial seat belt with three anchor points
and reel for side seats and lap belt with two
anchor points for the centre seat (fig. 44).
WARNING
To offer the highest level of
protection, the rear seat
belts should be fastened as shown
in fig. 42 and fig. 44.
In order to ensure that the correct tabs, are
fitted in the correct clips, the tabs of the side
belts and the clip of the central belt (only
abdominal) are incompatible (fig. 43).
A0B0300m
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
WARNING
Never press button (C)
when travelling.
fig. 44
A0B0301m
fig. 42
A0B0467m
fig. 43
A0B0466m
fig. 45
29
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
WARNING
Proper backrest coupling is
guaranteed when button
(A-fig. 46) set near each handle (B)
is retracted in the handle.
WARNING
Make sure the seat back is
correctly hooked on both
sides (not visible red buttons (A) to
prevent seat back being thrown
forwards and injuring passengers
should you brake sharply.
WARNING
Remember that, in the
event of an accident, any
passengers occupying the rear
seats who are not wearing a seat
belt not only subject themselves to
great personal risk but constitute
a danger to the occupants of the
front seats.
fig. 46
REAR CENTRAL ABDOMINAL
BELT (fig. 48)
Fasten the belt by inserting the tab (A)
into the clip (B), until a click is heard.
WARNING
After tilting, when resetting
the rear seat in straight position, take care to reposition the
seat belt properly to have it ready
for use.
A0B0123m
30
When the rear seats are not occupied, use
the proper pockets (A-fig. 47) on the
backrest to stow the seat belt clips neatly,
the tab (B) of the central abdominal belt
shall be fitted into (C) (see next paragraph
“Rear abdominal centre housing”).
To adjust the belt, run the tape in the
buckle (D) pulling the end (E) to tighten
and part (F) to loosen.
Press button (C) to release the belt.
WARNING The belt is adjusted properly
when it fits closely across the hips.
A0B0118m
fig. 47
A0B0003m
fig. 48
When the rear centre belt, which is of the
abdominal type, is not in use, hook the
tongue (A) in the special support (B) on
the rear seat back.
WARNING
Always hook the belt tip
when it is not used to prevent it from hitting the occupants
in the event of a crash.
ADJUSTING THE HEIGHT
OF FRONT AND REAR SIDE
SEAT BELTS
(Sportwagon versions only)
The rocker ring of the rear side belts has
three different positions through which belt
height adjustment is possible.
Always adjust the height of belts adapting
them to the size of the person wearing them.
This precaution will improve their effectiveness, substantially reducing the risk of injury
in the event of a crash.
Correct adjustment is obtained when the
belt passes about half way between the end
of the shoulder and the neck.
A0B0468m
fig. 49
To adjust the seat belt, raise or lower the
anchoring device grip (A-fig. 50) of the
front (A-fig. 51) or side rear seat belts
(Sportwagon versions only), and move at
the same time the ring (B) to the most suitable of the set positions.
A0B0029m
fig. 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
REAR ABDOMINAL CENTRE
BELT HOUSING (fig. 49)
A0B0099m
fig. 51
31
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
WARNING
After adjustment, always
check that the slider (B) is
anchored in one of the positions
provided. To do this, with the button (A-fig. 50) or (A-fig. 51) released, exert a further pressure to
allow the anchor device to catch if
release did not take place at one of
the preset positions.
PRE-TENSIONING DEVICES
To increase the efficiency of the front seat
belts, Alfa 156 is fitted with pre-tensioning devices.
These devices “feel” that the car is being
subject to a violent impact by way of a sensor rewind the seat belts a few centimetres.
In this way they ensure that the seat belt
adheres to the wearer before the restraining
action begins.
The seat belt locks to indicate that the device has intervened; the seat belt cannot be
drawn back up even when guiding it manually.
WARNING
Make the height adjustment when the car is stationary.
WARNING The pretensioner will give
maximum protection when the seat belt adheres snugly to wearer’s chest and hips.
Front seat pretensioners activate only if
front seat belts are properly fitted into buckles. A small amount of smoke may be produced. This smoke is in no way toxic and
presents no fire hazard.
The emergency tensioning retractor needs
no maintenance or lubrication. Any modification to its original features will nullify the
retractor’s effectiveness. If, due to unusual
natural events (floods, high waves, etc.),
the device has been affected by water and
mud, it must be replaced.
32
WARNING
The pretensioner can only
be used once. After a collision that has triggered it, have it
replaced at Alfa Romeo Authorized
Service. The validity of the device
is written on the plate located on
the front left door near the lock.
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services to have pretensioner replaced as this date approaches.
Operations
involving
banging, vibrations or
heating (above 100°C for
a maximum of 6 hours) in the area
of the pretensioners may damage
or trigger off the device. Vibrations
from rough road surfaces or accidental jolting caused by mounting
pavements etc. do not have any effect on the pretensioner. If, however, you need assistance, go to
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS FOR
THE USE OF THE SEAT BELTS
All the occupants of the car are obliged to
respect the local traffic laws regarding the
wearing of seat belts.
Always fasten the seat belts before starting.
WARNING
The seat belt must not be
twisted and should cling
tightly to the body. The upper part
must pass over the shoulder and diagonally across the chest. The
lower part must rest across the
pelvis and not across the stomach
to eliminate the risk of sliding forwards (fig. 52). Do not use devices
(clips, stoppers, etc.) which keep
the belts away from the body.
WARNING
WARNING
To ensure the highest degree of protection, you are
recommended to keep the seat
backrest in the straightest position
possible, and the belt adhering well
to the chest and pelvis.
Seat belt should always be worn
in both the front and rear positions!
Travelling without seat belt increases the risk of serious injury or
death in the case of accident.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
WARNING
Never disassemble or
tamper with the pretensioner components. All interventions must be carried out by qualified and authorised personnel.
Always contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
Under no circumstances should
the components of the seat
belts and pretensioner be tampered
with or removed. Any operation should
be carried out by qualified and authorised personnel. Always contact an
Alfa Romeo Authorized Service.
A0B0004m
fig. 52
33
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
WARNING
If the seat belt has been
subjected to shock, for example during an accident, it must
be completely replaced together
with the attachments and their
screws, and the pretensioning devices, even if visible defects are not
detected as the belt may have lost
its resilience.
Seat belts are also to be worn by expectant mothers: the risk of injury in the case of
accident is greatly reduced for them and the
unborn child if they are wearing a seat belt.
Pregnant women must of course position
the lower part of the belt very low down so
that it passes under the abdomen (fig. 54).
HOW TO KEEP THE SEAT BELTS
ALWAYS IN EFFICIENT
CONDITIONS
– Always use the belts with the tape well
taut and never twisted; make sure that it
is free to run without impediments.
– After a serious accident, replace the belt
being worn at that time, even if it does not
appear damaged. Always replace the seat
belts if pretensioners have been activated.
– To clean the belts, wash by hand with
neutral soap, rinse and leave to dry in the
shade. Never use strong detergents, bleach
or dyes or any other chemical substance that
might weaken the fibres.
WARNING
Do not carry children on
your knee using a single
seat belt for both (fig. 53). Do not
fasten other objects to the body.
– Prevent the reels from getting wet: correct operation of them is only guaranteed
if water does not get inside.
– Replace the seat belt if it shows significant wear or cut signs.
A0B0007m
34
fig. 53
A0B0008m
fig. 54
WARNING
SERIOUS DANGER: Never place cradle child’s seats on the
front passenger seats of cars equipped with passenger air
bag since the air bag activation could cause serious injuries, even mortal.
You are advised to carry children always on the rear seat, as this is the
most protected position in the case of a crash. In any case, child’s seats
must absolutely not be positioned on the front seat of car’s with passenger’s air bag, which during inflation could cause serious injury, even mortal, regardless of the seriousness of the crash that triggered it. Children
may placed on the front seat of cars fitted with passenger’s air bag deactivation. In this case, it is absolutely necessary to check the warning light
F on the check panel to make sure that deactivation has actually took
place (see paragraph “Front and side air bags” at item ”Front passenger
air bag”). The front passenger seat shall be adjusted in the most backward
position to prevent any contact between the child’s seat and the dashboard.
For the best level of protection in the event
of a crash, all occupants must travel seated
and secured by suitable restraint systems.
This is even more important for children.
According to 2003/20/EC Directive, this
prescription is compulsory for all European
Community countries.
Compared with adults, a child’s head is proportionately larger and heavier than the rest
of the body, while muscles and bone structure are not completely developed. Therefore, in order to restraint them correctly in
the event of a crash, different systems are
needed then adult seat belts.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
CARRYING CHILDREN SAFELY
A0B0001m
fig. 55
35
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
The results of research on the best protection for a child are summarised in European Standard ECE-R44, which in addition
to making them compulsory, subdivides restraint systems into five groups:
Group 0
0-10 kg in weight
Group 0+
0-13 kg in weight
Group 1
9-18 kg in weight
Group 2
15-25 kg in weight
Group 3
22-36 kg in weight
As it may be noted, the groups partially
overlap and in fact, in commerce it is possible to find devices that cover more than
one weight group (fig. 56).
All the restraint devices must bear the homologation data, together with the control
brand, on a solidly fixed label which must
absolutely not be removed.
GROUP 0 and 0+
GROUP 1
Babies up to 13 kg must be carried facing behind (fig. 56) on a cradle seat,
which, supporting the head, does not induce
strain on the neck in the event of sharp deceleration.
Starting from 9 kg to 18 kg in weight, children may be carried facing forwards with
seats fitted with front cushion (fig. 57),
through which the car seat belt restrains both
child and seat.
The cradle is restrained by the car safety
belts, as illustrated, and it should in turn
restrain the child with the belts incorporated
on it.
WARNING
Illustrations is indicative
only for assembly. Assemble the seat according to the
compulsory instructions provided
with it.
Over 1.50 m in height, from the point of
view of restraint systems, children are considered as adults and wear belts normally.
WARNING
Illustrations is indicative
only for assembly. Assemble the seat according to the
compulsory instructions provided
with it.
A0B0005m
A0B0006m
The Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo includes
seats for each weight group, which are the
recommended choice because they have
been designed and specifically experimented
for Alfa Romeo cars.
36
fig. 56
fig. 57
GROUP 2
GROUP 3
Starting from 15 to 25 kg in weight, children may be restrained directly by the car
seat belts. Child seats only have the function of positioning the child correctly in relation to the belts, so that the diagonal part
adheres to the chest and never to the neck
and that the horizontal part adheres to the
child’s pelvis and not to the abdomen
(fig. 58).
For children from 22 kg up to 36 kg the
child’s chest is thick enough not to need the
spacer back rest any more.
WARNING
Illustrations is indicative
only for assembly. Assemble the seat according to the
compulsory instructions provided
with it.
WARNING
Illustrations is indicative
only for assembly. Assemble the seat according to the
compulsory instructions provided
with it.
Fig. 59 shows proper child seat positioning on the rear seat.
Over 1.50 m tall children may wear seat
belts like adults.
A0B0002m
fig. 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
WARNING
Seats exist which are suitable for covering weight
groups 0 and 1 with a rear connection to the car belts and its own
belts to restrain the child. Because
of their mass, they can be dangerous if installed incorrectly fastened
to the car belts with a cushion.
Strictly adhere to the assembly instructions provided.
A0B0009m
fig. 59
37
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
PASSENGER SEAT COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS ON CHILD’S SEAT USE
Alfa 156 complies with the new EC Directive 2000/3 regulating child’s seat assembling on the different car seats according to the
following table:
Front and rear seat (saloon and Sportwagon versions)
Group
Range of weight
SEAT
Front passenger
Rear side passenger
seat
until to 13 kg
L
U
U
(*)
Group 1
9 -18 kg
L
U
U
(*)
Group 2
15 - 25 kg
L
U
U
(*)
Group 3
22 - 36 kg
L
U
U
(*)
Group 0, 0+
Rear centre passenger Rear centre passenger
Seat (inertial seat belt
Seat (centre lap belt
with three anchor points) with two anchor points)
Key:
U = suitable for child restraint systems of the “Universal” category, according to European Standard ECE-R44 for the specified “Groups”
L = suitable for certain child’s restraint systems available at Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo for the specified group
(*) = child’s seats cannot be installed on the rear centre seat with lap belt with two anchor points
38
1) The recommended position for installing a child’s seat is on the rear seat, as
it is the most protected in the event of a
crash.
WARNING
If a passenger’s air bag is
installed, children should
never travel on the front seat.
4) Always pull the tape to check that the
belts are buckled.
5) All restraint systems are strictly for one
child only: never use for two children at the
same time.
6) Always make sure that the belts do not
rest on the child’s neck.
7) During the journey, do not allow the
child to stay in abnormal positions or release
the belts.
8) Do not carry children in your arms, not
even small babies. No-one, however strong,
can keep hold of them in a crash.
9) In the case of accidents, replace the
child’s seat with a new one.
2) If the passenger’s air bag is deactivated
always check that deactivation has taken
place through the special warning light F.
3) Carefully follow the instructions provided with the child’s seat, which the supplier is obliged to attach. Keep them in the
car together with the documents and this
booklet. Do not use used seats without the
instructions for use.
PRESETTING FOR INSTALLING
THE “ISOFIX TYPE” CHILD
RESTRAINT SYSTEM
The car is created preset for mounting the
Isofix type child restraint system. Isofix is
a new European standardised system for carrying children. Isofix type child restraint system is an additional option that does not
prevent from using traditional child restraint
systems. Isofix type child restraint system
covers three weight groups: 0, 0+ and 1.
Due to its different anchoring system, the
Isofix type child’s seat should be anchored
using only the proper brackets provided for
the purpose in the car.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Below is a summary of the safety
rules to be observed when carrying children:
It is possible to mount both the traditional
restraint system and the Isofix type one, one
on the left and the other on the right, for example.
Since sizes are different, it is possible to
install max two Isofix type child's seats using the proper couplings on the rear seat
or three traditional child's seats using the
seat belts. On the front passenger seat it is
possible to mount only traditional child's
seats.
39
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
40
Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo provides the
Kiddy Isofix seat for babies up to 13 kg
weight to be positioned facing backwards
(groups 0 and 0+) and the seat for babies
from 9 to 18 kg weight to be positioned facing the running direction (group 1). The
Kiddy Isofix seat has been certified according to the European Standard ECE-R44/03.
Isofix type child’s seats are to be anchored
to two metal brackets, set between the rear
seat back and the cushion and that can be
identified through the slots in the seat cover
(A-fig. 60).
A0B0298m
fig. 60
WARNING
Install the child restraint
system only with the car
stationary. The Isofix child restraint system is properly anchored
to the preset brackets when clicks
are heard. In any case, keep to the
installation instructions that must
be provided by the child restraint
system’s Manufacturer.
For proper installation proceed as follows:
For children of the 0, 0+ weight group,
the child’s seat is facing backwards (babies
up to 13 kg) and the child is restrained by
the child’s seat belts (D-fig. 61).
– check whether the release lever (Bfig. 61) is at rest position (inward)
– find the presetting brackets (A), then
position the child’s seat with the fastening
devices (C) aligned with the brackets
– push the child restraint system until hearing the locking clicks.
A0B0400m
A0B0401m
As the child grows up, passing to weight
group 1 the child’s seat should be mounted
facing forwards (running direction).
Installation of the seat for
weight group 1
For proper installation proceed as follows:
– check whether the release lever (Bfig. 62) is at rest position (inward);
– find the presetting brackets (A), then
position the child’s seat with the fastening
devices (C) aligned with the brackets;
– push the child restraint system until hearing the locking clicks.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Installation of the seat for
the 0 and 0+ groups
If the Isofix type seat is positioned facing
backwards, the passenger’s seat must be
positioned completely back until touching
the child’s seat back.
fig. 61
fig. 62
41
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
FRONT AND SIDE
AIR BAGS
FRONT AIR BAGS
Description and operation
The car is fitted with front Air bags for the
driver (fig. 63), for the passenger
(fig. 64), side bags (fig. 65) and window bags (fig. 66).
The front air bag (driver’s and passenger’s)
is a safety device that comes into action in
the event of a head-on collision.
A0B0568m
A0B0278m
The front Air bag (driver’s and passenger’s)
is a device designed to protect the occupants
in the event of head-on collision of mediumhigh severity by the interposition of the cushion between the occupant and the steering
wheel or dashboard.
In the event of a crash, the electronic control unit processes the signals leading from
a deceleration sensor and when necessary,
triggers inflation of the cushion.
fig. 63
fig. 64
The cushion inflates instantly as a protective barrier between the occupants’ bodies
and the structures which could cause injury.
The cushion deflates immediately afterwards.
fig. 65
A0B0582m
42
It is formed of an instantly-inflating cushion contained in a special recess:
– in the centre of the steering wheel for
the driver;
– in the dashboard and with a larger-sized
cushion for the passenger.
A0B0277m
fig. 66
The front air bag (driver’s and passenger’s)
does not replace but is complementary to
the use of belts, which should always be
worn, as specified by law in Europe and
most non-European countries.
Front air bags are designed to protect car’s
occupants in front crashes and therefore nonactivation in other types of collisions (side
collisions, rear-end shunts, roll-overs, etc…)
is not a system malfunction.
In collisions against highly deformable or
mobile objects (road signposts, heaps of ice
or snow, etc.), rear collisions (hit from behind by another vehicle), side collisions,
wedging under other vehicles or protective
barriers (for example under a lorry or guard
rail) cutting in of the air bag is not activated
as it does not offer any more protection than
the seat belts therefore activation would be
inappropriate.
Therefore the failure to be triggered does
not mean that the system is not working
properly.
WARNING
Please don’t apply stickers
or other objects to the
steering wheel, to the air-bag
cover on the passenger's side or on
the side roof lining to the upholstery on the roof side. Don’t place
objects on the dashboard passenger’s side (such as mobile phones)
because they could tamper with the
correct opening of the passenger’s
air-bag and than cause serious injuries to the vehicle occupants.
PASSENGER’S FRONT
AIR BAG
The passenger’s front air bag has been designed to improve the protection of a person wearing a seat belt.
Its volume at maximum inflation fills most
of the space between the dashboard and the
passenger.
WARNING
SERIOUS DANGER:
The car is fitted
with front passenger’s air bag.
Never place cradle child’s seats on
the front passenger seat of cars
equipped with passenger air bag
since the air bag activation could
cause serious injuries, even mortal.
In the case of need, always deactivate the passenger’s air bag
when a child’s seat is placed on the
front seat. The front passenger
seat shall be adjusted in the most
backward position to prevent any
contact between child’s seat and
dashboard. Even if not ruled by
law, for better protection of adults
you are recommended to reactivate
the air bag immediately as soon as
child transport is no longer necessary.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
In the event of a crash a person that is not
wearing the seat belt moves forwards and
may come into contact with the cushion
while it is still opening. Under these circumstances the protection offered by the
cushion is reduced.
43
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
MANUAL DEACTIVATION OF
PASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG
The key switch (fig. 67) has two positions:
SIDE AIR BAGS
(SIDE BAG - WINDOW BAG)
Should it be absolutely necessary to carry
a child on the front seat, the passenger’s
front air bag can be deactivated.
1) Passenger’s front Air bag active: (ON
position P) warning light on check panel
off; it is absolutely prohibited to carry children on the front seat.
The side bag and window bag have the
task of increasing protection of the occupants in the event of a side crash of mediumhigh severity.
2) Passenger’s front Air bag deactivated:
(OFF position F) warning light F on
check panel on; it is possible to carry children protected by special restraint systems
on the front seat.
They are formed of an instantaneously-inflating cushion:
Deactivation/reactivation takes place with
ignition key at STOP and operating it in the
special key switch on the right-hand side of
the dashboard (fig. 67). Access to the
switch is only possible with the door open.
The warning light F on the check panel
glows steadily until the passenger’s Air bag
is reactivated.
WARNING
Use the switch only with
the engine off and the ignition key removed.
Deactivation of the front passenger’s air
bag does not prevent operation of the side
Air bags.
With the door open the key can be inserted
and removed in both positions.
A0B0583m
– the side bag is housed in the back rest
of the front seats; with this solution it is always possible to have the cushion in the optimum position in relation to the passenger,
regardless of the adjustment of the seat;
– the window bags, which are “curtain”
cushions, are housed in the side roof lining
covered by a special trim, which makes it
possible to extend the cushion downwards.
This solution, designed to protect the head,
makes it possible to offer the highest degree
of protection to the front and rear occupants
in the event of side crash, thanks to the wide
cushion inflation surface.
In the event of a side crash, an electronic
control unit processes the signals leading
from a deceleration sensor and activates,
when necessary, inflation of the bags.
44
fig. 67
In the event of minor side crashes (for
which the restraining action of the seat belts
is sufficient), the air bags are not deployed.
Also in this case it is of vital importance to
wear the seat belts since in case of side
crash they guarantee proper positioning of
the occupant and prevent the occupant to
be pitched out of the car in case of violent
crashes.
Therefore the side air bags do not replace
but are complementary to the use of belts,
which you are recommended to always
wear, as specified by law in Europe and most
non-European countries.
Operation of the side air bags and window
bags is not disabled by the front air bag deactivation switch, as described in the previous paragraphs.
WARNING In the event of side crash,
you can obtain the best protection by the
system keeping a correct position on the
seat, thus allowing correct window bag unfolding.
WARNING
Never rest head, arms and
elbows on the door, on the
windows and in the window bag
area to prevent possible injuries
during the inflation phase.
WARNING The front and/or side air
bags may be activated if the car is subjected
to heavy shocks or accidents that involve the
underbody area, such as for example violent
bumps against steps, pavements or fixed obstacles on the ground, falling into big holes
or bumpy roads.
WARNING The triggering of air bags releases a small amount of powder. This powder is not harmful and does not indicate a
start of fire; also the surfaces of the deployed bag and the car interior may be covered with dusty residue: this may irritate the
skin and eyes. In the event of exposure,
wash with neutral soap and water.
WARNING
Never lean head, arms and
elbows out of the window.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
The bags inflate instantaneously, setting
themselves between the body of the front
passengers and the car door. The bags deflate immediately afterwards.
The airbag system has a validity of 14
years for the pyrotechnic charge and 10
years for the coil contact (see the plate located on the front left door near the lock).
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
for replacement as these dates approach.
45
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
WARNING If an accident has triggered
the air bag, Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
must be contacted to have the devices activated replaced and to have the whole system checked.
All operations involving checking, repairing and replacing components concerning
the Air bag must be carried out by Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
If the car is to be demolished, Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services should be contacted beforehand to have the system deactivated.
If the car changes ownership, the new
owner must be informed of the instructions
for use and of the above warnings and be
given this “Owner’s Manual”.
WARNING The triggering of the pretensioners, front air bags and side bags is
decided by the electronic control unit in a
differentiated manner depending on the type
of crash. The failure to trigger one or more
of them does not necessarily indicate a system malfunction.
46
GENERAL CAUTIONS
WARNING
If the ¬ warning light does
not turn on when turning the
ignition key to MAR or if it stays on
when travelling, this could indicate a
failure in safety retaining systems; under this condition air bags or pretensioners could not trigger in the event
of collision or, in a restricted number
of cases, they could trigger accidentally. Stop the car and contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services to have
the system checked immediately.
WARNING
Do not cover the back rest
of front seats with trims or
covers there are not set for the use
of side bags.
WARNING
Never travel with objects
on your lap, in front of the
chest or with a pipe, pencil, etc. between your lips. Serious injury may
result in the case of the air bag being triggered.
WARNING
Always keep your hands
on the steering wheel rim
when driving, so that if the Air bag
is triggered, it can inflate without
meeting any obstacles. Do not
drive with the body bent forwards,
keep the seat back rest in the erect
position and lean your back well
against it.
WARNING
If the car has been stolen
or an attempt to steal it
has been made, if it has been subjected to vandals or floods, have
the Air bag system checked by Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
WARNING
Please don’t apply stickers
or other objects to the
steering wheel, to the air-bag
cover on the passenger's side or on
the side roof lining to the upholstery on the roof side. Don’t place
objects on the dashboard passenger’s side (such as mobile phones)
because they could tamper with the
correct opening of the passenger’s
air-bag and than cause serious injuries to the vehicle occupants.
WARNING
Turning the ignition key to
MAR the F warning light
(with the passenger’s front Air bag
deactivation switch at ON) turns
on for about 4 seconds, and then
flashes for another 4 seconds to
remind that the passenger’s Air
bag and corresponding side Air
bags will be activated in the event
of a crash, then it goes off.
WARNING
The front Air bags are designed to be triggered for
heavier crashes than the pretensioners. It is therefore normal for
the pretensioners only to be triggered for crashes within the two
activation thresholds.
WARNING
Do not hook rigid objects to
the coat hooks and to the
support handles.
WARNING
Do not wash the seat back
with pressurised water or
steam (by hand or at automatic
seat washing stations).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
WARNING
You are reminded that
when the ignition key is
engaged and in the MAR position,
the Air bags can be triggered also
on a stationary vehicle, if it is
bumped by another moving vehicle. Therefore, even with the car
stationary, never allow children on
the front seat. You are also reminded that with the car stationary, without the key engaged and
turned, the Air bags are not triggered in the event of an impact; in
this case the failure to trigger the
air bags should not be considered
a system failure.
WARNING
The air bag does not replace the seat belts, but increases their effectiveness. Additionally, as the front air bags are
not triggered for head-on collision
at low speed, side crashes, crashes
from behind or overturning, in
these cases the occupants are protected only by the seat belts, which
must, therefore, always be fastened.
47
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
STEERING WHEEL
LEVERS
The devices and services controlled by the
levers on the steering wheel can only be activated when the ignition key is in the MAR
position.
LEFT-HAND LEVER
The left-hand lever controls the external
lights except the foglamps and the rear foglight.
When the external lights are switched on
the various controls located on the dashboard are illuminated.
Lights switched off (fig. 68)
Main-beam headlights (fig. 71)
When the pointer on the knurled ring is opposite the symbol O, the external lights are
switched off.
When the knurled ring is in the 2 position, the headlights can be changed from
dipped-beam to main-beam by pushing the
lever towards the dashboard (stable position). The 1 warning light will come on
on the instrument panel.
To return from main-beam to dipped-beam,
once again pull the lever towards the steering wheel and then release.
Sidelights (fig. 69)
The sidelights are switched on by turning
the knurled ring from O to 6.
The 3 warning light on the instrument
panel will come on at the same time.
Dipped-beam headlights (fig. 70)
These are switched on by turning the
knurled ring from 6 to 2.
The sidelights will come on if the ignition
key is in the PARK position, regardless of
the position of the knurled ring.
A0B0371m
48
fig. 68
A0B0372m
fig. 69
A0B0373m
fig. 70
Direction indicators (fig. 73)
The headlights are flashed by pulling the
lever towards the steering wheel (unstable
position) regardless of the position of the
knurled ring. The 1 warning light on the
instrument panel will come on at the same
time.
WARNING Only the main-beam lights
are flashed. To avoid penalties, follow local regulations.
Moving the lever to the stable position will:
up - engage the right-hand direction indicators.
down - engage the left-hand direction indicators.
WARNING If you wish to signal a rapid
change of direction involving only a minimum movement of the steering wheel, the
lever can be moved up or down without
clicking (unstable position). When released
the lever will return to its home position.
One of the warning lights (R or E) will
come on on the instrument panel at the
same time.
A0B0376m
The lever is returned to its home position
automatically and the indicators are
switched off when the steering wheel is
straightened.
A0B0374m
fig. 71
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Flashing (fig. 72)
A0B0375m
fig. 72
fig. 73
49
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
RIGHT-HAND LEVER
The right-hand lever is used to operate the
windscreen wiper and windscreen washer.
The control used to activate the windscreen
washers also activates the headlights washers, if fitted.
Windscreen wiper - windscreen
washer (fig. 74-75)
The lever can be moved to five different
positions corresponding to:
A - Stationary (off).
B - Intermittent.
A0B0250m
With the lever in position (B), turning the
ring (F) four possible intermittent speeds
are obtained:
■
= intermittent slow.
■■
= intermittent medium.
■■■ = intermittent medium-fast.
■■■■ = intermittent fast.
A0B0377m
50
fig. 74
fig. 75
C - Continuous, slow.
D - Continuous, fast.
E - Fast, temporary (unstable position).
Operation in position (E) is limited to the
time the lever is held in this position. When
the lever is released, it returns to position
(A) automatically stopping the wiper.
Pulling the lever towards the steering
wheel (fig. 76) (unstable position) operates the windscreen washer.
Keeping the lever pulled, with only one
movement it is possible to operate the
washer jet and the wiper at the same time;
indeed, the latter comes into action automatically if the lever is pulled for more than
half a second.
The wiper stops working a few strokes after releasing the lever; a further “cleaning
stroke” after a few seconds completes the
wiping operation.
Rain sensor
(for versions/markets where
applicable) (fig. 77)
The rain sensor (A), fitted only on certain versions, is an electronic device combine with the windscreen wiper which has
the purpose of automatically adjusting the
number of wipes during intermittent operation, to intensity of the rain.
All the other functions controlled by the
right-hand lever remain unchanged.
The rain sensor is activated automatically
moving the right-hand lever to position (Bfig. 74) and it has a range of adjustment
that gradually varies between wiper stationary (no wiping) when the windscreen is
dry, to wiper at first continuous speed (continuous, slow) with heavy rain.
A0B0374m
fig. 76
Turn ring (F-fig. 75) to set the rain sensor sensitivity level:
■■
= low sensitivity
■■■ = medium ensitivity
■■■■ = high sensitivity.
Operating the windscreen washer with the
rain sensor activated (lever at position B)
the normal washing cycle is performed at
the end of which the rain sensor resumes its
normal automatic function.
Turning the ignition key to STOP the rain
sensor is deactivated and the next time the
engine is started (MAR position) it will not
be reactivated even if the lever has remained
in position (B). In this case to activate the
rain sensor, simply move the lever to (A)
or (C) and then back to (B).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
“INTELLIGENT WASHING” FUNCTION
A0B0012m
fig. 77
51
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
When the rain sensor is reactivated, the
wiper performs at least one stroke, even if
the windscreen is dry, to indicate that reactivation has occurred.
At each start, the rain sensor automatically
stabilises at a temperature of about 40°C
to eliminate any condensation from the control surface and prevent the formation of ice.
WARNING In case of failure of the righthand stroke or rain sensor, windscreen wiper
operation with the right-hand lever at (B)
shall take place in intermittent mode.
The rain sensor is able to detect and automatically adapt to the presence of the following particular conditions which require
different sensitivity:
– impurities on the control surface (salt,
dirt, etc.);
– streaks of water caused by worn wiper
blades;
– difference between day and night (the
human eye is more disturbed during the
night by the wet glass surface).
The rain sensor is located behind the inner
rear-view mirror in contact with the windscreen and inside the area cleaned by the
wiper and it controls an electronic control
unit which in turns controls the wiper motor.
Headlight washers (fig. 78)
(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
These are operated when the sidelights
are on and the windscreen washer is
switched on.
A0B0581m
52
fig. 78
(optional for versions/
markets where applicable)
GENERAL
The speed regulator (CRUISE CONTROL), with electronic control, makes it
possible to drive the car at the required
speed without pressing the accelerator
pedal. This reduces driving fatigue on motorways, especially during long journeys because the speed memorised is automatically
maintained.
WARNING The device can only be engaged at speeds between 30 and 190
km/h.
The device may only be engaged in the
4th, 5th or 6th gear. Travelling downhill with
the device engaged, the car speed may increase more than the memorised one, due
to the change in the engine load.
The device is disengaged automatically in
any one of the following cases:
– pressing the brake pedal;
– pressing the clutch pedal;
– if the VDC, ASR system cuts in;
– with Selespeed or Q-System transmission if a gear is changed;
– if car speed is below the set limit.
CONTROLS (fig. 79)
Cruise Control is controlled by the
ON/OFF knurled ring (A), by the +/ring (B) and by the RCL button (C).
Ring (A) has two positions:
– OFF: in this position the device is deactivated;
– ON: is the normal operating position of
the device: the warning light Ü on the check
panel turns on.
Ring (B) serves for memorising and maintaining the car speed or for increasing or lowering the speed memorised.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
CRUISE CONTROL
Turn the ring (B) to (+) to memorise the
speed reached or increase the speed memorised.
A0B0055m
fig. 79
53
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Turn the ring (B) to (–) to lower the speed
memorised.
Each time the ring is actuated (B) the
speed increases or lowers by about 1.5
km/h.
Keeping the ring turned the speed changes
continuously. The new speed reached will
be maintained automatically.
The RCL button (C) resets the memorised
speed.
WARNING Turning the ignition key to
STOP or the ring (A) to OFF, the speed
memorised is cleared and the system is
switched off.
The ring (A) can be constantly left to ON
without damaging the device. However, we
suggest to disconnect the device when it is
not used, turning the ring to OFF, to avoid
fortuituous speed memorisations.
54
TO MEMORISE THE SPEED
Move the ring (A) to ON and take the car
to the required speed normally. Turn the ring
(B) to (+) for at least three seconds, then
release it. The car speed is memorised and
it is therefore possible to release the accelerator pedal.
The car will continue to travel at the memorised constant speed until one of the following condition takes place:
– pressing the brake pedal;
– pressing the clutch pedal;
– if the VDC, ASR system cuts in;
– with Selespeed or Q-System transmission if a gear is changed.
WARNING In the case of need (when
overtaking for instance) acceleration is possible simply pressing the accelerator pedal;
later, releasing the accelerator pedal, the car
will return to the speed memorised previously.
TO RESET THE MEMORISED
SPEED
If the device has been disengaged for example pressing the brake or clutch pedal,
the memorised speed can be reset as follows:
– accelerate gradually until reaching a
speed approaching the one memorised;
– engage the gear selected at the time
of speed memorising (4th, 5th or 6th speed);
– press the RCL button (C).
RESETTING THE MEMORISED
SPEED
The speed memorised can be increased
in two ways:
The memorised speed is automatically reset turning off the engine or moving the ring
(A) to OFF.
1) pressing the accelerator and then memorising the new speed reached (turning the
ring (B) for more than three seconds);
or
2) momentaneously turning the ring (B)
to (+): each pulse of the ring will correspond
to a slight increase in speed (about 1.5
km/h) while pressing continuously will correspond to a continuous speed increase. Releasing the ring (B) the new speed will be
memorised automatically.
TO REDUCE THE MEMORISED
SPEED
The speed memorised can be reduced in
two ways:
WARNING
When travelling with the
cruise control on, do not
move the gearshift lever to neutral.
WARNING
The cruise control may only
be engaged at speeds between 30 and 190 km/h.
WARNING
It is advisable to engage
the cruise control only
when the conditions of the traffic
or road so permit under completely
safe conditions: i.e.: straight and
dry roads, dual carriageways or
motorways, flowing traffic and
smooth road surface. Do not engage the device in town or in
heavy traffic conditions.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
TO INCREASE THE MEMORISED
SPEED
WARNING
If the device is faulty or
not working, turn the ring
(A) to OFF and contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services after checking
that the protection fuse is intact.
1) disengaging the device (for instance
pressing the brake pedal) and then memorising the new speed (turning the ring (B)
to (+) for at least three seconds);
2) keeping the ring pressed (B) at (–)
until reaching the new speed which will be
memorised automatically.
55
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
DASHBOARD
A0B0570m
fig. 80
1. Side air outlets - 2. Defrosting/demisting vents for side windows - 3. Upper side vents - 4. Radio controls on the steering wheel (where
applicable) - 5. Outside lights control lever - 6. Speedometer (mileage recorder) - 7. Check panel - 8. Rev counter - 9. Windscreen wiper
control lever - 10. Fuel level gauge - 11. Centre air vents - 12. Infocenter Display - 13. Clock - 14. Engine coolant temperature gauge 15. Sound system (where required) - 16. Passenger’s Air bag - 17. Glove box - 18. Controls for heating, ventilation and climate control 19. Ashtray and cigar lighter - 20. Hazard warning lights switch - 21. Ignition switch - 22. Steering wheel lock/release lever - 23. Driver’s
Air bag and horns - 24. Cruise Control control lever (if provided) - 25. Bonnet opening lever - 26. Set of controls: instrument panel lighting
adjustment, trip meter reset and headlamp aiming device.
56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
´ - Warning light fitted
for versions/markets
where applicable
A0B0584m
fig. 81 - T.SPARK versions
A. Speedometer (mileage recorder) - B. Odometer with double counter (total and partial) display - C. Check panel - D. Rev counter - E.
Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light - F. Clock - G. Engine coolant temperature gauge with maximum temperature warning light - H.
Warning lights.
57
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
t
Warning light fitted
only on Selespeed
gearbox versions
´ Warning light fitted
for versions/markets
where applicable
A0B0695m
fig. 81a - JTS and T.SPARK (equipped with VDC system)
A. Speedometer (mileage recorder) - B. Odometer with double counter (total and partial) display - C. Check panel - D. Rev counter - E.
Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light - F. Clock - G. Engine coolant temperature gauge with maximum temperature warning light - H.
Warning lights - L. Selespeed gearbox display (where fitted).
58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
t
Warning light fitted
only on Q-System
gearbox versions
A0B0696m
fig. 82 - 2.5 V6 24V versions
A. Speedometer (mileage recorder) - B. Odometer with double counter (total and partial) display - C. Check panel - D. Rev counter E. Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light - F. Clock - G. Engine coolant temperature gauge with maximum temperature warning light H. Warning lights - L. Q-System gearbox display (where fitted).
59
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
´ - Warning light fitted
for versions/markets
where applicable
A0B0586m
fig. 83 - JTD versions (equipped with VDC system)
A. Speedometer (mileage recorder) - B. Odometer with double counter (total and partial) display - C. Check panel - D. Rev counter - E.
Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light - F. Clock - G. Engine coolant temperature gauge with maximum temperature warning light - H.
Warning lights.
60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
´ - Warning light fitted
for versions/markets
where applicable
A0B0597m
fig. 83a - JTD versions
A. Speedometer (mileage recorder) - B. Odometer with double counter (total and partial) display - C. Check panel - D. Rev counter - E.
Fuel level gauge with reserve warning light - F. Clock - G. Engine coolant temperature gauge with maximum temperature warning light - H.
Warning lights.
61
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
62
REV COUNTER
The rev. counter shows engine rpm. The
needle pointed to the danger area (red) indicates excessive high engine speed. Do not
drive for long periods with the needle in this
area.
WARNING The electronic injection control system gradually shuts off the flow of
fuel when the engine is “over-revving” resulting in a gradual loss of engine power.
The rev counter may, when the engine is
idling, indicate gradual or sudden increase
of engine revs as the case may be; such behaviour is normal and must not be interpreted as a faulty condition as it occurs during normal operation, for instance when
climate control or electric fan are switched
on. In particular, slow revs variation helps
keep the battery charged.
FUEL GAUGE AND RESERVE
WARNING LIGHT
This shows the amount of fuel left in the
fuel tank.
ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE GAUGE AND
MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE
WARNING LIGHT
This warning light ç comes on to indicate
that approximately 7 litres of fuel are left in
the tank.
This shows the temperature of the engine
coolant fluid and begins when the fluid temperature exceeds approx. 50°C.
WARNING Under certain conditions
(heavy slopes, for instance), the reading on
the gauge may differ from the actual
amount of fuel in the tank and changes in
level may be indicated late.
The pointer should normally be towards
the middle of the scale. If the pointer
reaches the higher temperature values of
the scale (red area), the request for vehicle performance should be decreased.
This condition falls within the operation logics of the electronic control circuit to avoid
highly unstable readings due to swaying of
the fuel when travelling.
The illumination of the warning light ç
(together with the message shown by the
Infocenter display) indicates an excessive
temperature of the engine cooling fluid. In
this case, stop the car and contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
WARNING Refuelling shall always be
performed with engine off and ignition key
to STOP. If the engine is off but the key
is to MAR, a wrong fuel level could temporarily be indicated. This is due to the internal system control logic and cannot be
considered as a system malfunctioning.
WARNING The temperature of the engine coolant may rise towards the maximum
values (red) when the vehicle is driven at
low speeds, especially when the ambient air
temperature is high. In this case, the vehicle should be stopped and the engine
switched off for a few minutes after which
the journey can be resumed, preferably at
a higher speed.
The display shows:
– the mileage on the first line (6 figures)
– the trip meter on the second line (4 figures)
To reset the trip meter, keep button (Afig. 84) pressed for a few seconds.
Pressing button â, or after about 5 seconds from last operation performed, returns
to previous screen.
INFOCENTER DISPLAY
RHEOSTAT LIGHTS
ADJUSTMENT (where
required)
This function makes it possible to adjust
the brightness (dimming/brightening) of
the Infocenter display during night and day.
WARNING During failure indication displaying, brightness cannot be adjusted since
under these conditions the display gets automatically to max. brightness.
To perform the desired brightness adjustment (night or day), use buttons â or ã,
bearing in mind that:
– if the outside lights are on, the message
BRIGHTN. ADJUST. NIGHT will appear on the
display (fig. 85)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
MILEAGE DISPLAY
(with double meter display)
– if the outside lights are OFF, the message BRIGHTN. ADJUST. DAY will appear on
the display (fig. 86).
A0B0489m
A0B2124g
fig. 84
fig. 85
A0B2125g
fig. 86
63
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
INFOCENTER DISPLAY
(where required)
The Infocenter display is able to display all
the useful and necessary information during
driving, in particular:
INFORMATION AVAILABLE ON STANDARD
SCREEN
– Date (A-fig. 87)
The standard screen will remain on until
a function is activated which requires being shown on the display (e.g. “Infocenter
display rheostat lights adjustment”).
INFORMATION ABOUT VEHICLE
CONDITION (for each event)
– Scheduled maintenance programme expiry
– Trip computer information
– Outside temperature (B)
– Rheostat brightness adjustment
– Failure and warning symbol (e.g.: possible presence of ice on the road C).
– Engine oil level (only JTD versions).
Moreover, a menu is available which allows the driver to perform, by operating the
control buttons (see “Control buttons” in the
next pages) the following controls and settings:
Set-up menu
SPEED LIMIT
– Switching on/off the relevant signal
(ON/OFF)
– Speed limit setting
TRIP B ON/OFF
– Switching on/off the relevant function
(ON/OFF)
DATE SETTING/TIME SETTING
– Day setting
– Month setting
– Year setting
– Hour setting
– Minute setting
LANGUAGE SELECTION
A0B2126g
64
fig. 87
– Setting the language for the messages
shown on the display
– Selection of the following units: km or
mi (miles), °C or °F, l/100 km or km/l
WARNING/FAILURE BUZZER VOLUME
SETTING
– Volume setting of warning/failure
buzzer
“WINTER” TYRES SPEED LIMIT
– Switching on/off the relevant function
(ON/OFF)
– Setting the limit speed value among the
available ones (160 km/h, 190 km/h
or 210 km/h)
PROGRAMMED MAINTENANCE
– Displaying the expiry date of the next
car service check (strictly related to the
Programmed Maintenance Schedule)
DEFAULT VALUE RESET
– Switching on/off the relevant function
(ON/OFF)
EXIT MENU
DISPLAY CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT
– Infocenter display graphics brightness
setting (dimming/brightening)
– Exiting the menu
WARNING The use of polarized glasses
may reduce Infocenter display readability.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
UNITS SELECTION
65
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
CONTROL BUTTONS (fig. 88-89)
To make use of the information that the Infocenter display (with the key in the MAR position) is able to provide, you should first get familiar with the relevant control buttons (placed on the central console aside the climate control/ventilation controls and on top of the left
lever for the Trip computer function) and use them in accordance with the descriptions below. It is also recommended that you read over this
chapter before performing any operation.
INFO, â, ã buttons
Depending on the cases: to scroll the menu screens and their respective options
upwards or to increase the displayed value
A0A0013m
ç
in the following
A single press for less than 2 seconds (pulse), shown by
screens, to confirm the desired option and/or switch to the next screen or access the menu
é
A single press for more than 2 seconds, shown by
in the following screens,
to confirm the desired option and return to the previous screen
Depending on the cases: to scroll the menu screens and their respective options
downwards or to decrease the displayed value
fig. 88
SET button
A0A0014m
ã
66
fig. 89
ä
A single press for less than 2 seconds (pulse), shown by
in the following
screens, to scroll the different Trip computer information screens
å
A single press for more than 2 seconds, shown by
in the following screens,
to reset the Trip computer information (reset) and initiate a new mission
The menu is made up of a set of functions arranged in a “circular fashion”, which can be selected by means of buttons âand ã, for access to the different select operations and settings (see the examples “LANGUAGE” and “DATE” in the table below); for further details, also
refer to “Access to the menu screen” in the following pages.
ç
Day
SPEED
TRIP B
SERVICE
WINTER TYRES
ç
DATE
DEFAULT VALUES
CONTRAST
Year
Hour
MENU OFF
Month
Minutes
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
MENU DESCRIPTION
LANGUAGE
UNITS
ç
BUZZER
English
Deutsch
Italiano
Portoguese
Espãnol
Français
Nederlands
67
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
INITIAL CHECK
By turning the ignition key to the MAR position, the Infocenter display will show the message CHECK ACTIVE: this indicates the start of the
diagnosis phase for all the electronic systems available on the vehicle; this phase lasts a few seconds (in diesel versions only, the Infocenter
display is able to provide the engine oil level indication too, see following paragraph “Engine oil level check”). If, during this phase, no anomaly is found and after the engine has been started, the display will show the message CHECK OK.
If the display shows an anomaly message, see paragraph
“Warning lights and indications” in this chapter.
Is the
engine
started?
If no
failures
are
present
YES
NO
or
JTD versions only
68
Standard screen display
continues on next page
The Programmed Maintenance Schedule includes car maintenance every 20,000 km
(or 12,000 miles) or one year; this is shown automatically, with the ignition key at MAR,
starting from 2,000 km (or 1,240 miles) or 30 day from this deadline and it is shown again
every 200 km (or 124 miles) or 3 days. When a programmed maintenance interval
(“coupon”) is near to come, turning the ignition key to MAR, will display the message
SCHEDULED SERVICE WITHIN followed by the number of kilometers, days or miles to go before
vehicle maintenance. The PROGRAMMED MAINTENANCE message is displayed in km,
mi or days, according to the approaching service interval. At the very moment the value
of 0 km, 0 miles or 0 days is reached, the display will show, every time the ignition key
is turned to MAR, the message SCHEDULED SERVICE EXPIRED, followed by the number
of kilometers, miles or days. In this case, to reset this visual information contact
Authorised Alfa Romeo Services.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
continued from previous page
69
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Engine oil level check
(JTD versions only)
By turning the ignition key to the MAR
position, the Infocenter display will show the
engine oil level display for about 3 seconds.
During this phase, to clear the display and
move to the following screen, press
.
The following display in fig. 90 refers to
correct engine oil level. As the oil level gradually falls, the full bars go off leaving room
for the empty bars.
The following fig. 91 and fig. 92 refer to the display with an oil level below the
foreseen minimum. Under this condition, the
bars are all empty with symbol and warning messages.
ç
WARNING To ensure correct reading of
the engine oil level, the check must be carried out with the vehicle on level ground.
A0B2134g
fig. 91
A0B2129g
70
fig. 90
A0B2135g
fig. 92
The following refers to the display
(fig. 93) (appearing for about 3 seconds)
with an oil level above the foreseen maximum. Under this condition the bars are all
full.
Do not add oil with different characteristics from
those of the oil already
used in the engine (see “Fluids and
lubricants” in chapter “Car maintenance”).
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have
the engine oil restored to
its correct level.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Restore correct engine oil
level (see paragraph
“Checking fluid levels” in
chapter “Car maintenance”).
A0B2136g
fig. 93
71
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
ACCESS TO THE MENU SCREEN
After the INITIAL CHECK, it is possible to access the menu screen by pressing button
To navigate use the âand ãbuttons.
ç.
WARNING If you access the Menu and no setting/adjustment is made within about 60 seconds, the system automatically leaves the Menu
and displays the screen previously set. In this case, the latest setting selected but not confirmed (by means of button
) is not stored; therefore, the operation must be performed again.
– When the car is running, only the short menu can be accessed (SPEED LIMIT setting).
– When the car is stopped, the extended menu can be accessed.
The following table gives the description of the cases provided.
ç
ç
See
INITIAL CHECK
Example of standard
screen
Is the car
moving?
YES
Short menu screen
NO
SPEED
TRIP B
DATE
LANGUAGE
UNITS
BUZZER
WINTER TYRES
SERVICE
INTENSITY
DEFAULT VALUES
MENU OFF
Extended menu
screen
72
With this function it is possible to set the car speed limit which, if exceeded, automatically sounds a buzzer and displays a specific message
to alert the driver. To set the limit speed, proceed as follows:
Return to previously
set screen, e.g.
See INITIAL CHECK and
ACCESS TO THE MENU SCREEN
â
ã
Menu screen
â
ã
é
ç
Select, by means of buttons âor ãactivation or deactivation
(ON/OFF). The set option will be highlighted.
ç
â
ã
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SPEED LIMIT (SPEED)
Using âand/or ãbuttons to set the speed required. During the setting
operation, the value flashes on the screen. The possible setting is between 30
and 250 km/h or between 20 and 150 mph, depending on the unit
set previously (see paragraph UNITS described later). Every press (pulse)
of the button increases or decreases by one unit. Keeping the button pressed
obtains fast increase or decrease. When you are near the required setting, release
the button and complete adjustment with single presses.
ç
é
Return
to menu screen
é
73
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
74
Speed limit exceeded indication
As soon as the vehicle exceeds the set speed limit, the following display is shown automatically, together with the sounding of a buzzer.
Example of display when the set value is 120 km/h
With this option it is possible to turn ON or OFF the TRIP B function (partial trip) which displays the figures relating to: TRAVEL DISTANCE B, AVERduring a “partial mission”.
AGE CONSUMPTION B, AVERAGE SPEED B, TRAVEL TIME B
For further details, see “General Trip - Trip B”
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESS
TO THE MENU SCREEN
â
ã
Menu screen
é
ç
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
TRIP B ON/OFF (TRIP B)
Return to previously
set screen, e.g.
â
ã
é
ç
Using the âor ãbuttons choose activation
or deactivation ON/OFF.
The set option will be highlighted.
Return to menu screen
75
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
DATE SETTING/TIME SETTING (DATE)
To set the date (day - month - year) and the time (hours-minutes), proceed as follows:
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESS
TO THE MENU SCREEN
â
ã
Menu screen
é
ç
â
ã
Return to previously
set screen, e.g.:
é
ç
â
ã
Each press (pulse) on the â
or ãbuttons increases or
decreases by one unit.
Keeping the corresponding
button pressed obtains fast
increase or decrease.
When you are near
the required value, release the
control and complete adjustment
by single presses.
76
é
ç
â
ã
é
ç
continues on next page
â
ã
é
ç
Return to previously
set screen, e.g.:
â
ã
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
continued from previous page
é
ç
Return to menu screen
Each press (pulse) on the â
or ãbuttons increases or
decreases buttons increases
or decreases by one unit.
Keeping the corresponding button
pressed obtains fast increase or
decrease. When you are near
the required value, release the
control and complete adjustment
by single presses.
77
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
LANGUAGE SELECTION (LANGUAGE)
The messages shown on the display can be provided in several languages (Italian, Deutsch, English, Spanish, French, Dutch, Portuguese).
To select the required language, proceed as follows:
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESS
TO THE MENU SCREEN
â
ã
Menu screen
é
ç
Return to previously
set screen, e.g.
â
ã
é
ç
Return to menu screen
78
The display provides information in relation to the unit of measure set. To choose the units, proceed as follows:
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESS
TO THE MENU SCREEN
â
ã
Menu screen
Return to previously
setscreen, e.g.
é
ç
â
ã
é
ç
â
ã
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
UNITS SELECTION (UNITS)
é
ç
â
ã
é
ç
Return to menu screen
79
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
WARNING/FAILURE BUZZER VOLUME SETTING (BUZZER)
The volume of the buzzer that signals any failure or warning to the driver can be adjusted according to a pre-set scale using the âand/or
ãbuttons. To switch OFF or adjust, proceed as follows:
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESS
TO THE MENU SCREEN
â
ã
Menu screen
é
ç
Return to previously
set screen, e.g.
â
ã
é
ç
Return to menu screen
80
With this function it is possible to set the speed limit when travelling with winter tyres. The speed limit can be chosen between: 160 km/h,
190 km/h or 210 km/h (see paragraph “Winter tyres” in section “Correct use of the car”).
Return to previously
set screen, e.g.
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESS
TO THE MENU SCREEN
â
ã
Menu
screen
é
ç
â
ã
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
“WINTER” TYRES SPEED LIMIT (WINTER TYRES)
Return to
menu screen
Select, by means of buttons âor ãactivation or deactivation
(ON/OFF). The set option will be highlighted.
ç
é
ç
é
81
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
PROGRAMMED MAINTENANCE (SERVICE)
â
ã
Menu screen
â
ã
â
ç
â
ã
ã
ã â
ã
â
ã
ã
â
82
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESS
TO THE MENU SCREEN
With the SERVICE function it is possible to receive information connected with correct vehicle maintenance. To consult this function, proceed as follows:
â
ç
é
Return to menu screen Return to previously
set screen, e.g:
The Programmed Maintenance Schedule includes vehicle maintenance
every 20,000 km (or 12,000 miles) or one year; this is shown
automatically, with the ignition key at MAR, starting from 2,000
km (or 1,240 miles) or 30 day from this deadline and it is shown
again every 200 km (or 124 miles) or 3 days. When a programmed maintenance interval
(“coupon”) is near to come, turning the ignition key to MAR, will display the message
SCHEDULED SERVICE WITHIN followed by the number of kilometers, days or miles to go
before vehicle maintenance. The PROGRAMMED MAINTENANCE message is displayed in km,
mi or days, according to the approaching service interval. At the very moment the value of 0
km, 0 miles or 0 days is reached, the display will show, every time the ignition key is turned
to MAR, the message SCHEDULED SERVICE EXPIRED, followed by the number of
kilometers, miles or days. In this case, to reset this visual information contact Authorized Alfa
Romeo Services.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
WARNING Products shown in the SERVICE screen and to be used for scheduled maintenance could be subject to modifications. Refer to
paragraph “Fluids and lubricants” in section “Technical specifications”.
83
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
DISPLAY CONTRAST ADJUSTMENT (CONTRAST)
This function allows to adjust the Infocenter display brightness (dimming/brightening).
To perform the adjustment, proceed as follows:
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESS
TO THE MENU SCREEN
â
ã
Menu screen
é
ç
Return to previously
set screen , e.g.
â
ã
é
ç
Return to menu screen
84
The following function:
– If ON restores: Speed limit, Trip B, Light rheostat, Language, Temperature unit, km/mi unit, Consumption unit, Buzzer, Winter tyres, Contrast,
with the following values Speed limit = 120 km/h, Trip B ON, Light rheostat ON = 4, Light rheostat OFF = 1, Language = Italian, Temperature
unit = °C, Distance unit = km, Consumption unit = l/100 km, Buzzer = 2, Winter tyres OFF (value set at 160 km/h), contrast value = 3
– If OFF, the above parameter values can be set manually
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESS
TO MENU SCREEN
â
ã
Menu screen
é
ç
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
DEFAULT VALUE RESET (DEFAULT VALUES)
Return to previously
set screen, e.g.
â
ã
é
ç
Return to menu screen
85
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
EXIT MENU (MENU OFF)
With this function it is possible to exit the setup menu and return to the previously set screen.
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESS
TO THE MENU SCREEN
â
ã
ç
Menu screen
86
Return to previously
set screen, e.g.
The TRIP COMPUTER function gives information relating to the operating status of the vehicle on the Infocenter display. This function comprises
the GENERAL TRIP concerning the complete mission of the car and TRIP B concerning the partial car mission. This function (as shown in the
graph below) is contained within the complete mission. Both functions are resettable.
The GENERAL TRIP displays the figures relating to RANGE, TRAVEL DISTANCE, AVERAGE CONSUMPTION, ACTUAL CONSUMPTION, AVERAGE VELOCITY, TRAVELTIME (complete mission time).
The TRIP B (with automatic reset each time at least 2 hours have passed since stopping the engine), displays information concerning TRAVEL
DISTANCE B, AVERAGE CONSUMPTION B, AVERAGE SPEED B, TRAVEL TIME B (partial mission time).
Start of journey procedure (reset)
To start a new journey monitored by the GENERAL TRIP, with the ignition key at MAR, press the button ã with å (see “Control buttons”).
Reset GENERAL TRIP
End of complete mission
Start of new mission
Reset GENERAL TRIP
End of complete mission
Start of new mission
˙
˙
GENERAL TRIP
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
GENERAL TRIP - TRIP B
Reset TRIP B
˙
End of partial mission
Start of new partial mission
˙
TRIP B
End of partial mission
Start of new partial mission
˙
˙
Reset TRIP B
TRIP B
˙
Reset TRIP B
End of partial mission
Start of new partial mission
˙
TRIP B
Reset TRIP B
End of partial mission
Start of new partial mission
The reset operation (pressing the å button) in the presence of the screens concerning the GENERAL TRIP also makes it possible to reset
TRIP B. The reset operation (pressing the å button) in the presence of only the screens concerning TRIP B makes it possible to reset only the
information associated with this function.
WARNING The RANGE and ACTUAL CONSUMPTION information cannot be reset.
87
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
WARNING At the beginning of a new mission, due to battery reconnection, the average consumption value is initialised to the “average
predefined standard consumption” equal to 9 l/100 km (for 1.6 T.SPARK, 1.8 T.SPARK, 2.0 JTS and 2.0 JTS Selespeed versions),
12 l/100 km (for 2.5 V6 24V and 2.5 V6 24V Q-System versions) and 6.5 l/100 km (diesel versions only).
The TRIP COMPUTER information is displayed in sequence according to the table below.
Continues on
next page
See INITIAL CHECK and ACCESS
TO THE MENU SCREEN
ä
ä
å
ä
å
Previously set screen;
e.g.
ä
ä
å
å
88
ä
Reset GENERAL TRIP and TRIP B, excluding
Range and Actual Consumption
(see next paragraph RESET GENERAL TRIP)
å
ä
Continued from
previous page
TRIP B ON?
NO
YES
ä
ä
ä
å
å
å
Reset TRIP B
(see next paragraph RESET
å
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Return to previously
set screen, e.g.:
ä
å
TRIP B)
WARNING Pressing the â button returns
automatically to the standard screen
89
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
After resetting TRIP by pressing the button with
Reset GENERAL TRIP
Reset TRIP B
90
å mode, the display will show the following functions:
å
= Reset GENERAL TRIP and TRIP B
(excluding Range and Actual Consumption)
å = Reset TRIP B
A) range values lower than 50 km (approx. 31 miles) (after the reduced range warning message),
B) Parking with running engine or car speed lower than 4 km/h for over 5 minutes.
TRAVEL DISTANCE = This shows the distance traveled by the car from the start of the new mission (*).
AVERAGE CONSUMPTION = This shows the average actual consumption in l/km or in l/100 km depending on the unit selected.
ACTUAL CONSUMPTION = This shows the consumption of the car updated every 5 sec. approx. If parking with running engine or in
case of speed values lower than 4 km/h the display will show “- - - -“. Actual consumption calculation algorithm, according to the above procedure, restarts as soon as the car speed will be equal to or higher than 4 km/h.
AVERAGE VELOCITY = This shows the average speed of the car as a function of the overall travel time elapsed from the start of the
new mission (*).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
RANGE = This shows the distance (in km or miles) the car can still cover before needing fuel if keeping the same driving conditions. The
display will show “- - - -“ after the following events:
TRAVELTIME = time elapsed from the start of the new mission (*).
(*) NEW MISSION: this takes place when performing the “manual” reset by pressing the dedicated button.
WARNING GENERAL TRIP is reset automatically when the Distance Traveled is equal to 9999,9 km (or mi), when Travel Time is 99:59
(99 hours and 59 minutes) or after reconnecting the battery.
WARNING If no information is available, all the TRIP COMPUTER parameters display the message “****” instead of a value, together
with the typical description of each parameter. When the normal operation condition is resumed, the count of the various parameters starts
again normally, with no reset of the values displayed prior to the failure, nor the start of a new mission.
91
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
WARNING LIGHTS AND INDICATIONS
GENERAL WARNING
The failure indications shown on the Infocenter display, together with the buzzer (adjustable) and the turning on of the relevant warning light (if available), are accompanied by specific warning messages (e.g. “Go to dealer”, “Switch off eng., do not proceed”, etc…).
These warnings are concise and precautionary and are intended to suggest the prompt action that the driver should take when a
failure occurs. However, these warnings are not to be considered exhaustive and/or alternative to the prescriptions of this Owner’s Manual,
which must always be read over carefully. When an anomaly occurs always refer to the contents of this chapter.
WARNING When an anomaly occurs, the Infocenter display reaches its maximum brightness. By pressing button â the warning messages
disappear and the symbol referring to the failure warning is reduced to an icon in the right bottom area of the display.
WARNING The anomaly warnings that appear on the Infocenter display are divided into two categories: very serious and serious anomalies.
Very serious anomalies are displayed indefinitely, by interrupting any message previously shown on the display, and are proposed again every
time the ignition key is turned to MAR, until the malfunction is eliminated. Moreover, the “cycle” can be interrupted by pressing button â: in
this case, the symbol referring to the anomaly will be shown in the right bottom area of the display until the malfunction is eliminated.
Serious anomalies are displayed for about 20 seconds and then disappear, but they are proposed again every time the ignition key in turned
to MAR. At the end of the display cycle, equal to about 20 seconds, or when button â is pressed, the symbol referring to the anomaly will
be shown in the right bottom area of the display until the malfunction is eliminated.
92
x
Message
on display
LOW BRAKE FLUID AND/OR HANDBRAKE ON
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light comes on but must go out after a
few seconds.
The warning light comes on (together with the message + symbol shown on the display) when
the level of the brake fluid inside the tank falls below the minimum, due to a possible leak in the
circuit and when the handbrake is switch on with the car moving.
WARNING
If the warning light x comes on when travelling (together with the
message on the display), check that the handbrake is not engaged. If
the warning light stays on with the handbrake off (together with the message
on the display), stop immediately and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
d
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Warningl ight
BRAKE PAD WEAR
The warning light on the dial comes on (together with the message + symbol shown on the display) when the front brake pads are worn; in this case, have them replaced as soon as possible.
WARNING As the car is fitted with wear sensors for the front brake pads, when replacing them,
also check the rear brake pads.
93
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Warning light
ç
Message
on display
HIGH ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
WARNING
When the engine is very hot, do not remove the tank cap: danger of
burns.
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light comes on but must go out after a
few seconds.
The engine coolant temperature warning light comes on (together with the message + symbol
shown on the display) when the engine is overheated.
If the warning light comes on, proceed as follows:
– Normal driving conditions: stop the car, switch the engine off and check if the water
level inside the tank is not below the reference mark MIN.
In this case, wait a few minutes to let the engine cool down, then open the cap slowly and carefully, fill with coolant, making sure its level is between reference marks MIN and MAX on the
tank. Moreover, perform a visual check for any fluid leakage. If the warning light comes on again
the next time the engine is started, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
– Car heavy duty (e.g. towing a trailer uphill or car fully loaded): slow down and, if the
warning light stays on, stop the car. Pause for 2 or 3 minutes, keeping the engine on and slightly
accelerated to facilitate better coolant circulation, then switch the engine off.
Check correct fluid level, as described above.
WARNING In case of highly demanding use of the car, you are recommended to keep the engine on and slightly accelerated for a few minutes before switching it off.
94
¬
Message
on display
AIR BAG FAILURE
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light on the check panel comes on, but must
go out after a few seconds. This warning light will come on glowing steadily if there is an operating
failure in the Air bag system.
WARNING
If the ¬ warning light does not turn on when turning the ignition key
to MAR or if it stays on when travelling, this could indicate a failure
in safety retaining systems; under this condition air bags or pretensioners could
not trigger in the event of collision or, in a restricted number of cases, they
could trigger accidentally. Stop the car and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have the system checked immediately.
The failure of the warning light ¬ (warning light off) is also indicated by the
flashing of the passenger’s front Air bag deactivated warning light F for more
than the normal seconds.
F
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Warning light
PASSENGER’S FRONT AIR BAG DEACTIVATED
The check panel warning light F turns on when the passenger’s front Air bag is deactivated by means
of the relevant key switch. With the passenger’s front Air bag activated, turning the ignition key to
MAR, the warning light on the check panel comes on but must go out after approx. 4 seconds.
WARNING
Warning light F indicates also warning light ¬ failure. This is indicated by intermittent flashing, over 4 seconds, of warning light F.
In this event, warning light ¬ could be not up to indicate restraint system failures, if any. Stop the car and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have
the system checked immediately.
95
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Warning light
LOW OIL PRESSURE
v
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light on the check panel comes on but
must go out as soon as the engine is started.
WARNING
If the warning light v comes on when travelling (together with
the message + symbol shown on the display), switch the engine off immediately and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
w
<
96
Message
on display
LOW BATTERY CHARGE
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light on the check panel comes on, but must
go out as soon as the engine is started (a slight delay is permitted when the engine is running at
idle). It if stays on, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services immediately.
SEAT BELTS NOT FASTENED
The warning light on the check panel will turn on for some seconds when, with the ignition key at
MAR, the driver’s seat belt is not fastened properly.
´
Message
on display
INCOMPLETE DOOR CLOSING
The message + symbol shown on the display will appear when one or more doors or the tailgate
are not properly shut.
The warning light on the dial turns on when one or more doors or the tailgate are not properly shut.
This warning light is only fitted on the dials of IMPRESSION versions.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Warning light
97
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Warning light
U
Message
on display
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM (EOBD) FAILURE
In normal conditions, turning the ignition key to MAR, the dial warning light turns on but it should
go off when the engine has started. The initial turning on indicates that the warning light is working properly.
If the warning light stays on or turns on (together with the message + symbol shown on the display) when travelling:
glowing steadily - indicates a fault in the supply/ignition/injection system which could cause
high exhaust emissions, possible lack of performance, poor handling and high consumption levels.
In these conditions, it is possible to continue driving without however demanding heavy effort or
high speeds. Prolonged use of the car with the warning light on may cause damage. Contact an
Alfa Romeo Authorized Service as soon as possible.
The warning light turns off if the fault disappears, but it is still stored by the system;
flashing - indicates that the catalyst could be damaged (see paragraph on “EOBD system” in this
chapter).
If the warning light flashes, it is necessary to release the accelerator pedal to lower the speed until the warning light stops flashing; continue travelling at moderate speed trying to avoid driving
conditions that could cause the warning light to flash again. Contact an Alfa Romeo Authorized Service as soon as possible.
If, when turning the ignition key to MAR, the warning light U does
not switch on or if it turns on glowing steadily or flashing when travelling, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Service as soon as possible. The
operation of the warning light U can be checked by traffic agents by proper
equipment, therefore comply with the regulations in force in the country where
you are driving.
98
Y
Message
on display
ALFA ROMEO CODE SYSTEM
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light on the check panel should flash only
once and then go out. If the warning light stays on with the key at MAR, this indicates a possible
failure: see “Alfa Romeo CODE System”.
WARNING The turning on at the same time of U and Y warning lights indicates a failure of
the Alfa Romeo CODE System.
If with the engine running, the Y warning light flashes, this means that the car is not protected
by the engine inhibitor device (see “Alfa Romeo CODE system” in this chapter). Contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services to have all the keys memorised.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Warning light
POSSIBLE PRESENCE OF ICE ON THE ROAD
When the outside temperature is below or equal to 3° C, in order to warn the driver on the presence of ice on the road, message + symbol are displayed accompanied by the related buzz.
The buzz lasts about 2 seconds while the message is displayed for about 10 seconds. After this
period, only the symbol is displayed until the temperature does not go over 6° C or until the engine stops.
If during travelling, after the presence of ice on the road has been signalled, should temperature
rise over 6° C the symbol will go off and should temperature fall again to 3° C, a new message +
symbol will be displayed accompanied by the buzz.
99
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Warning light
Message
on display
GLOW PLUGS (JTD engines)
m
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the dial warning light comes on and go out when the
glow plugs have reached the pre-established temperature.
Start the engine as soon as the warning light has gone out.
WARNING With a high environment temperature, the warning light may turn on for an imperceptible length of time. For versions/markets where applicable, the warning light flashes for approx.
30 seconds after starting the engine, which means that there is a fault in the glow plug warming
system, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
c
WATER IN THE FUEL OIL FILTER (JTD engines)
The warning light switches on with fixed light when driving, to indicate the presence of water in
the fuel oil filter.
The presence of water in the fuel circuit may cause serious damage to
the entire injection system and cause irregular engine operation. If warning light c comes on the dial, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
as soon as possible to have the system relieved. Should the above warning indication come one immediately after topping up, water has probably been poured
into the tank: turn the engine off immediately and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
100
Message
on display
ENGINE OIL SENSOR FAILURE (JTD versions)
The message + symbol are shown on the display when there is a failure in the engine oil level
sensor. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon as possible to have the fault eliminated.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Warning light
INERTIAL FUEL CUT-OFF SWITCH
The message + symbol are shown on the display when the fuel cut-off switch comes into operation.
WARNING
If, after the message has been displayed, you can smell fuel or notice
leaks from the supply system, do not re-engage the switch to avoid
the risk of fire.
101
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Warning light
>
Message
on display
INEFFICIENT ABS SYSTEM
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the warning light comes on but must go out after a
few seconds.
This warning light comes on (together with the message + symbol, where required, on the display)
when the system is inefficient. In this case, normal braking is ensured, though without making use
of the ABS system. Caution is recommended, especially in cases of less than perfect grip. In any
case, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon as possible.
x
Inefficient EBD electronic braking distributor
+
>
102
WARNING
The vehicle is equipped with an electronic braking distributor (EBD). Simultaneous lighting of dial warning lights > and x (together with the
message + symbol on the display) with the engine running indicates an EBD
system failure; in this case, any sudden braking action can cause early locking
of rear wheels, with possible sideslip. Drive very carefully and go immediately
to the nearest Alfa Romeo Authorized Service to have the system checked.
á
Message
on display
VDC SYSTEM (VEHICLE DYNAMICS CONTROL)
(optional for versions/markets where applicable)
When the ignition key is turned to MAR, the dial warning light comes on but must go out after
a few seconds.
If the warning light does not go out, or if it stays on (together with the message + symbol on the
display and the coming on of the ASR button led) when the vehicle is running, contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.
The flashing of the warning lamp when the vehicle is running indicates the actuation of the VDC
system.
W
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Warning light
OUTSIDE LIGHT FAILURE
The warning light comes on when an anomaly is found in one of the following lights:
– sidelights
– braking lights or corresponding fuse
– rear fog guards
– number plate lights.
The warning of a fault may mean one or more blown bulbs, a burnt fuse or cut off connection.
103
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Warning light
ç
Message
on display
FUEL RESERVE
The warning light comes on when about 7 litres of fuel are left in the tank, and when the car
range is below 50 km.
REDUCED RANGE
This message is displayed when the car range is below 50 km.
SPEED LIMIT EXCEEDED
The message + symbol turns on, together with the sound of the buzzer, on the display when the
vehicle exceeds the speed limit set previously (see “Speed limit” in this section).
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
This message appears on the display 2,000 kilometres from the deadline given in the Scheduled
Maintenance Programme (every 20,000 km) and it is shown again at timed intervals, turning the
ignition key to MAR every 200 km.
104
4
5
R
E
Message
on display
REAR FOG LIGHTS
This warning light comes on when the rear fog lights are turned on.
FRONT FOG LIGHTS
(optional for versions/markets where applicable)
This warning light comes on when the front fog lights are turned on.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Warning light
LEFT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR (INTERMITTENT)
This warning light comes on when the control lever is moved downwards or, together with righthand indicator, when the hazard warning lights are switched on.
RIGHT-HAND DIRECTION INDICATOR (INTERMITTENT)
This warning light comes on when the control lever is moved upwards or, together with the lefthand indicator, when the hazard warning lights are switched on.
105
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Warning light
3
Ü
1
l
106
Message
on display
SIDELIGHTS AND DIPPED-BEAM HEADLIGHTS
The warning light on the dial comes on when the sidelights or dipped-beam headlights are
switched on.
CONSTANT SPEED ADJUSTMENT (CRUISE CONTROL)
(where applicable)
The warning light on the check panel turns on, with the knurled ring of the cruise control in the
ON position, when the device starts to intervene on the engine.
MAIN-BEAM HEADLIGHTS
The warning light comes on when these lights are turned on.
DIRECTION INDICATORS IF A TRAILER IS TOWED
The warning light on the dial comes on when the direction indicator control lever is moved up or
down, or when the hazard warning light button is pressed.
Message
on display
SELESPEED GEARBOX FAILURE
t
t
Turning the ignition key to MAR, the warning light on the cluster shall come on and then go off after about 4 seconds. If the warning light stays on, it indicates that a fault has been detected in the Selespeed gearbox; at the same time, the buzzer beeps intermittently for 4 seconds to draw the attention of the driver. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible to remove the fault.
Q-SYSTEM AUTOMATIC GEARBOX FAILURE
Turning the ignition key to MAR, the warning light on the cluster shall come on and then go off
after about 4 seconds. If the warning light stays on or turns on when travelling, it indicates overheated gearbox oil (glowing steadily) or a gearbox fault (flashing).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Warning light
on the dial
Warning light glowing steadily: it indicates that the gearbox oil has reached the maximum established temperature.
To make oil cooling down, stop the car, move the lever to P or N and let the engine idle until the
warning light goes out. Resume driving without demanding high performance from the engine. If
the warning light comes on again, it is necessary to stop again with the engine idling until it goes
out again. If the interval between one lighting up of the warning light and next is below 15 minutes,
you are advised to stop the car, turn the engine off and wait for the engine-gearbox unit to cool down
completely. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible.
Warning light flashing: it indicates a fault in the automatic gearbox.
The automatic control system provides an emergency programme. Under these circumstances,
you are advised to stop the car and turn the engine off; in fact, the next time the engine is started,
the self-diagnostic system could cut off the fault which will however be memorised. Conversely, if
the fault remains (warning light flashing), it is necessary to select the gears manually as if driving
a car with mechanical gearbox, bearing in mind that the only two speeds available are the 2nd and
4th gear. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorised Services as soon as possible.
107
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
A0A0571m
fig. 94
1 Central defrosting/demisting vents for windscreen - 2 Adjustable upper side vents - 3 Defrosting/demisting vents for side windows 4 Adjustable side air outlets - 5 Adjustable upper vent - 6 Adjustable centre, swivel vents - 7 Front feet area fixed vents - 8 Rear feet area
fixed vents - 9 Rear adjustable swivel outlets.
108
The vent has an opening/closing control.
closed.
•) == Completely
Completely open.
CENTRE VENT ADJUSTMENT
(fig. 96)
UPPER SIDE VENT ADJUSTMENT
(fig. 97)
Each vent has a lever which makes it possible to direct the flow of air towards the
passengers in an horizontal direction. To adjust the air flow, use the opening/closing
centre vent device.
On the dashboard ends are adjustable vents
(A) for car interior, and fixed defrosting/
demisting vents (B) for side windows.
closed.
•( == Completely
Completely open.
A0B0572m
fig. 95
Air flow can be adjusted by means of the
knob (C).
closed.
•) == Completely
Completely open.
A0B0573m
fig. 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
UPPER VENT ADJUSTMENT
(fig. 95)
A0B0039m
fig. 97
109
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Air flow can be adjusted by means of vanes
(A) with press-on opening and closing.
REAR SWIVEL OUTLET
ADJUSTMENT
Fig. 98: front seats (on dashboard ends)
Fig. 99: rear seat (on the console between seats)
Air flow can be directed by rotating the outlet by means of the vanes.
MANUAL CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM
(fig. 99a - where applicable)
CONTROLS
1 Air temperature adjustment knob (mixing warm / cold air)
2 Climate control compressor on / off button
3 Inside air re-circulation on / off button
4 Fan knob
5 Maximum defrosting / demisting on /
off button for windscreen and front side windows and wing mirror coils
6 Rearscreen heating and wing mirror defrosting on / off button.
7 Air distribution knob.
A0B0038m
110
fig. 98
A0B0289m
fig. 99
To obtain the temperature required, proceed as follows:
– turn knob (1) as far as it will go clockwise
– turn knob (4) clockwise to the required
speed;
– urn knob (7) to set air distribution as
follows:
Q
to warm feet and to demist the
Z
windscreen
QUICK FRONT WINDOW
DEMISTING / DEFROSTING
(MAX-DEF FUNCTION)
Press button (5) - to quicken demisting
/ defrosting of the windscreen and front side
windows (MAX-DEF function).
Max. quick demisting / defrosting function will be activated.
When this function is on the relevant button led will come on.
To turn this function off, press button (5)
-again (the button led will go off) or turn
whatever knob or press any manual climate
control system button.
After demisting/defrosting, turn the
MAX-DEF function off to maintain the optimum conditions of vision.
A0B0598m
ZE to warm feet and to keep the face
cool (bilevel function)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
HEATING
Z
to direct warm air to the front and
rear lower parts of the passenger compartment.
E
for summer ventilation
Q
to defrost/demist the windscreen
– turn off inside air re-circulation (if on).
fig. 99a
111
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Preventive demisting procedure
In cases of heavy damp and/or rain
and/or big differences in temperature between inside the car and outside, it is advisable to proceed as follows to demist the
windows:
– turn off inside air re-circulation (if on)
– turn knob (1) as far as it will go clockwise
– turn knob (4) clockwise to an intermediate speed
– turn knob (7) to Q or Q if the winZ
dows do not mist up.
Climate control system is very useful to
speed up demisting. Set controls to demisting function as described previously and
switch the climate control system on by
pressing button (2) √
112
REARSCREEN AND WING
MIRROR (where applicable)
DEMISTING / DEFROSTING
Press button (6) ( ) to demist /defrost
the rearscreen and wing mirrors (where applicable).
When this function is on the relevant button led will come on.
To turn this function off, press the button
again, the button led will go off.
WARNING Do not apply stickers on the
inside of the rearscreen over the heating filaments to avoid damaging it.
FAN SPEED ADJUSTMENT
To ventilate the passenger's compartment
properly, proceed as follows:
– open completely the central and side
vents;
– turn knob (4) to the required speed;
– turn knob (7) to E;
– - turn off inside air re-circulation (if on).
Press button (3) vto turn the inside air
re-circulation function on.
When this function is on the relevant button led will come on.
It is advisable to turn on the inside air recirculation function in queues or tunnels to
avoid admitting polluted air from outside.
The prolonged use of this function should
however be avoided, especially with several
persons on board, to avoid the possibility of
the windows misting inside.
WARNING The inside air re-circulation
function makes it possible to reach the required "heating" or "cooling" conditions
faster.
It is however inadvisable to use it on
rainy/cold days as it would considerably increase the possibility of the windows misting inside, especially if the climate control
system is off.
CLIMATE CONTROL (COOLING)
Proceed as follows:
– turn knob (1) as far as it will go counterclockwise (blue led next to TEMP lit);
– turn knob (4) to the required speed;
– turn knob (7) to E;
-– press buttons (2) √ and (3) vthe
relevant leds will go on.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SWITCHING THE INSIDE AIR
RE-CIRCULATION FUNCTION
ON
113
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Cooling adjustment
Proceed as follows:
– turn off inside air re-circulation (if on);
– turn knob (1) counterclockwise to reduce temperature;
– turn knob (4) counterclockwise to reduce the fan speed.
LOOKING AFTER THE SYSTEM
During the winter the climate control system must be turned on at least once a
month for about minutes.
Before summer, have the system checked
at Alfa Romeo Authorized Service.
AUTOMATIC
TWO-ZONE CLIMATE
CONTROL SYSTEM
To start the system (fig. 100):
– turn the knob rings to set the required
temperatures (driver’s side – passenger’s
side).
– press the AUTO button.
WARNING The climate control system
makes it possible to adjust the temperatures
required for the two sides with a maximum
difference of 7°C between the driver’s and
the passenger’s sides.
WARNING The climate control compressor works only when the engine is running and the outside temperature is more
than 2°C.
114
The coolant used for the
climate control system is
R134a which meets current regulations and does not harm
the environment in the event of accidental spillage.
Absolutely avoid the use of other
fluids which are incompatible with
the system components.
GENERAL
The car is equipped with a two-zone climate control system, controlled by an electronic control unit which makes it possible
to separately adjust the air temperature on
the driver’s side and on the passenger’s side.
To obtain optimum temperature control in
the two areas of the passenger compartment, the system has an outside sensor, a
passenger compartment sensor and a twozone sun ray sensor.
On some versions, the system is integrated
with an incipient misting sensor installed behind the internal rearview mirror, which is
able to “monitor” a predefined area of the
windscreen inner surface which can automatically act on the system to prevent or reduce misting, through a series of operations
such as: opening air recirculation, enabling
compressor, air flow to the windscreen, fan
speed sufficient for demisting; and, in case
of heavy misting, enabling the MAX-DEF
function.
For more detailed information on the system and how to make the best use of it,
read the instructions given in the following
pages.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
WARNING
The climate control compressor cannot work when
the outside temperature is less
than 2°C. Therefore, it is recommended that the internal air recirculation function v is not used
when the outside temperature is
low, as the windows could mist
over rapidly.
A0B0382m
fig. 100
115
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
116
To ensure correct operation of the incipient misting
sensor, stickers (e.g. road
licence holder) must not be applied
in the “control” area between the
sensor and the windscreen. For this
very reason, both the sensor and
the windscreen must always be
kept clean, to avoid accumulation
of dirt or other substances.
WARNING The demisting procedure is
enabled every time the ignition key is turned
to MAR, or pressing the AUTO button.
When this procedure is working it can be
turned off pressing one of the following buttons: compressor, air recirculation, air distribution, air flow. This operation inhibits the
incipient misting sensor signal until the AUTO
button is pressed again or the next time the
ignition key is turned to MAR.
On certain versions, the system is integrated by an anti-pollution sensor that is able
to switch on the inside air recirculation function automatically, to reduce the unpleasant
smell of polluted air when driving in urban
areas, queues, tunnels, and when the windscreen wash/wiper is operated (with the
typical smell of spirits).
WARNING The function of the anti-pollution sensor is subordinate to safety conditions; therefore disabling the climate control compressor or at an outside temperature
below 4°C, the sensor is disabled. In any
case, the sensor can be re-enabled pressing the recirculation button vuntil taking
it to the automatic mode.
The anti-pollution sensor
is placed in the air flow in
front of the combined particle activated carbon filter and,
therefore, must be protected
against possible compressed air
jets produced by cleaning equipment. Moreover, the water collected from the windscreen wipers
should not come into contact with
the sensor: otherwise, the internal
air recirculation function could be
disabled for long periods.
The climate control system automatically
controls and adjusts the following parameters and functions:
– temperature of the air admitted to the
passenger compartment (for the driver’s and
passenger’s side separately)
– fan speed
– air distribution
– inside air recirculation on/off
– climate control compressor on/off enable.
The settings of the following functions can
be modified manually:
– fan speed
– air distribution
– inside air recirculation on/off
– climate control compressor on/off enable
– window defrosting/demisting.
The control of the functions that have not
been modified manually will always be automatic and, in any case, the temperature
of the air flowing into the passenger compartment is controlled automatically depending on the temperatures set on the driver’s and passenger’s displays.
WARNING Manual selections prevail
over automatic ones and remain in storage
until the user decides to resume automatic
control. The settings selected manually are
stored when the engine is switched off and
resumed the next time the engine is started.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
The air quality control is also entrusted
to a combined particle and activated carbon
filter.
117
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
CONTROLS (fig. 101)
1 - Inside temperature adjustment knob
(driver’s side)
2 - Inside temperature set display (driver’s
side)
3 - Knob for adjusting the fan speed and
switching the system off
10 - Maximum defrosting/demisting
on/off button for windscreen and front side
windows, rearscreen heating and wing mirror coils (function MAX-DEF - -)
11 - Button for aligning the temperature
set on the passenger’s side with that on the
driver’s side MONO
13 - Inside air temperature sensor
14 - Button for selecting the system automatic mode AUTO
4 - Fan speed set, air distribution and system off display (OFF)
A0B0056m
5 - Inside temperature set display (passenger’s side)
6 - Inside temperature adjustment knob
(passenger’s side)
7 - Inside air recirculation on/off button
v (manual/automatic)
8 - Air distribution selection button
9 - Rearscreen heating and wing mirror defrosting on/off button (
118
12 - Climate control compressor on/off
enable button √
fig. 101
WARNING The knob rings are not provided with automatic stopper; therefore,
they are free to rotate in both directions once
they have reached the maximum or minimum values.
The system can be started in different
ways, but it is recommended that the required temperatures are set on the
displays; then, press (14) AUTO button.
Thus, the system will start operating fully
automatic, to reach the set temperatures
in the shortest possible time and keep them.
During the fully automatic operation of the
system, the set temperatures can however
be modified at any time: the system will automatically modify its own settings to adapt
itself to the new requirements.
WARNING The temperature difference
between the driver’s and the passenger’s
sides must not be greater than 7°C in order
to be accepted by the system.
The selections made by the system in automatic mode can be customized by manually acting on the following controls:
– fan speed adjustment knob (3)
– air distribution selection button (8)
– inside air recirculation on/off button (7)
v
– climate control compressor on enable
button (12) √.
With one or more functions switched on
manually, the temperature control for the air
admitted to the passenger compartment will
in any case continue to be monitored automatically by the system (left led on button
14 AUTO on), except with the climate control compressor off.
In fact, in this condition, the temperature
of the air admitted into the passenger compartment cannot be lower than the outside
air temperature; this condition is indicated
by the turning off of the two leds on button (14) AUTO and flashing on the display
(2) and/or (5) related with the temperature rate that cannot be obtained.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
HOW TO USE THE AUTOMATIC
TWO-ZONE CLIMATE CONTROL
(fig. 101)
Manually selecting one or more of these
functions turns off the right led on the button (14) AUTO.
119
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
AIR TEMPERATURE
ADJUSTMENT KNOBS (fig. 102)
A0B0063m
Turning the rings of knobs (1 or 6) clockwise or counterclockwise, respectively highers or lowers the temperature of the air required in the left zone (knob 1) or right
zone (knob 6) of the passenger compartment. The temperatures set are shown on
the displays (2) and (5) placed below the
respective knobs.
Separate operation of the temperatures set
is restored automatically using knob (6) is
actuated.
Turning the knob rings clockwise or counterclockwise, until they reach the extreme
selection positions HI or LO, will cause the
maximum heating or cooling functions, respectively, to be switched on:
fig. 102
120
A0B0064m
It is switched on by setting a temperature
of more than 32.5°C on the display, and
can be switched on independently from the
driver’s or passenger’s side, or both of them;
this setting brings the system to the “onezone” mode and is shown by both displays.
This functions can be switched on when
you wish to heat the passenger compartment as quickly as possible, by taking the
greatest advantage from the system potential.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
HI function
(highest heating power - fig. 103)
The function uses the maximum temperature of the heating fluid, whereas air distribution to feet and 5th fan speed.
With the function switched on, however,
all the manual settings can be made.
fig. 103
To switch the function off, you only need
to turn the ring of a knob (1) or (6) of the
temperature set to a value lower than
32.5°C; the opposite display will show
32.5°C.
By pressing button (14) AUTO, the display indicates a temperature of 32.5°C and
falls within an operating condition with automatic temperature control.
121
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
LO function
(highest cooling power - fig. 104)
A0B0065m
It is switched on by setting a temperature
lower than 16.5°C on the display; this setting is shown by both displays.
This function can be switched on when you
wish to cool the passenger compartment as
quickly as possible, by taking the greatest
advantage from the system potential.
The function cuts off air heating, switches
on both internal air recirculation (to prevent
hot air from entering the compartment) and
the climate control compressor, brings air
distribution to E and 5th fan speed.
With the function switched on, however,
all the manual settings can be made.
To switch the function off, you only need
to turn the ring of a knob (1) or (6) of the
temperature set to a value greater than
16.5°C; the opposite display will show
16.5°C.
fig. 104
By pressing button (14) AUTO the display
indicates a temperature of 16.5°C and falls
within an operating condition with automatic
temperature control.
122
A0B0066m
By pressing button (11) MONO the passenger’s side temperature automatically
aligns with that on the driver’s side and,
therefore, the same temperature can be set
for both areas by simply turning the ring of
knob (1), on driver’s side.
This function is provided to facilitate temperature adjustment inside the entire passenger compartment when only the driver
is on board.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
MONO BUTTON
FOR ALIGNMENT OF
THE TEMPERATURES SET
(fig. 105)
Separate operation of set temperatures is
automatically restored when the passenger
operates the ring of knob (6) or by pressing button (11) MONO.
fig. 105
123
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
124
FAN SPEED ADJUSTMENT
KNOB (fig. 106-107)
A0B0067m
Turning the ring of knob (3), clockwise
or counterclockwise will cause the fan speed
- and, therefore, the amount of air flowing
into the passenger compartment - to increase or decrease, respectively; the 16
speeds that can be selected are displayed
by a bar (every 3 clicks), up to a maximum
of 6 illuminated bars:
– max. fan speed = all bars lit;
– min. fan speed = one bar lit.
The fan can be cut off (all bars off) only
if the climate control compressor has been
switched off by pressing button (12) √.
To resume automatic fan speed control after a manual setting has been made, press
button (14) AUTO. By fully turning the ring
of knob (3) counterclockwise, the system
will be turned off, with the following situation: display (2) OFF; display (5) OFF; central display (4) OFF and left-hand led available on internal air recirculation button (7)
v ON and both led on AUTO button
switch OFF.
fig. 106
WARNING By pressing the internal air
recirculation button (7) v, it is possible
to let external fresh air into the passenger
compartment.
A0B0068m
WARNING After exiting the condition
the internal air recirculation v is resumed to the condition preceding the switching off.
OFF,
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
To turn the system on again, you only need
to turn the ring of knob (3) clockwise, or
press any button, except the internal air recirculation button (7) and rear window
heater button (9); this operation resumes
all the operating conditions previously stored
in the memory.
fig. 107
125
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
AIR DISTRIBUTION SELECTION
BUTTON (fig. 108)
By pressing button MODE (8) repeatedly, you can manually choose one of the
five possible modes for air distribution:
E
Flow of air to the dashboard centre
and side outlets and rear outlets.
E Splitting of the air flow between the
Z vents to the lower part of the passenger compartment (warmest air)
and the dashboard centre and side
outlets and the rear outlet (coolest
air). This air flow distribution is particularly useful in spring and autumn,
when the sun is shining.
Z Air flow towards the front and rear
lower part of the passenger compartment. Due to the natural tendency of
heat to spread upwards, this type of
distribution allows heating of the passenger compartment in the shortest
time, also giving a prompt feeling of
warmth to the coldest parts of the
body.
126
A0B0069m
fig. 108
Q Splitting of the air flow between the
Z windscreen and side window defrosting/demisting vents and the lower
part of the passenger compartment.
This type of air distribution allows satisfactory heating of the passenger
compartment while preventing possible misting of the windows.
Q Air flow to the windscreen and front
side window vents to demist or defrost them.
To resume automatic air distribution control after a manual selection, press button
(14) AUTO.
A0B0070m
√
Pressing button (12) √ enables the turning on of the climate control compressor.
This condition is shown by the lighting up of
the led placed on the button itself.
When the climate control compressor is
turned off, the leds on buttons (14) AUTO
and (12) √ go off; automatic inside air recirculation control is also excluded (both leds
off on button 7 v) which always stays
off to prevent window misting; in any case,
the automatic operation of inside air recirculation can be resumed (though it is not
recommended) by pressing button 7 v.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
CLIMATE CONTROL
COMPRESSOR ON/OFF
ENABLE BUTTON
(fig. 109)
fig. 109
127
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
When the climate control compressor is off,
it is not possible to admit air to the passenger compartment with a temperature below the outside temperature; in this case,
the value flashes on the display concerning
the temperature that cannot be reached
and the left led on button (14 AUTO fig. 110) goes off.
The switching off of the climate control
compressor remains in storage even when
the engine has been stopped. To resume automatic control for switching on the climate
control compressor, press button (12) √
again, the button led will turn on, or press
button (14) AUTO; in which case, the other
manual settings set will be cancelled.
WARNING
Operation of the climate
control compressor is necessary for cooling and dehumidifying the air; it is advisable to keep
this function always on, to prevent
window misting problems.
128
A0B0071m
fig. 110
A0B0072m
Inside air recirculation is controlled according to three operating logics:
– automatic control, indicated by the turning on of the right led on the button;
– forced switching on (inside air recirculation always on), indicated by the turning
on of the left led on the button (and by the
right led going off at the same time);
– forced switching off (inside air recirculation always off, with air inlet from the outside), indicated by the turning off of both
leds.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
INSIDE AIR RECIRCULATION
ON/OFF BUTTON v
(fig. 111)
These operating conditions are obtained
by pressing in sequence the inside air recirculation button (7) v.
When inside air recirculation is controlled
automatically by the system, the right led
on the air recirculation button (7) v
stays on all the time and the left led shows
the air recirculation condition:
ON = air recirculation operating;
OFF = air recirculation off.
fig. 111
If inside air recirculation has been switched
on or off manually, the led on button (14)
AUTO turns off.
In automatic operation, inside air recirculation is switched on automatically when the
anti-pollution sensor detects the presence of
polluted air, for instance in cities, queues,
tunnels, and when the windscreen
wash/wiper is operated (with the characteristic smell of spirit).
129
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
WARNING
With the outside temperature below 2°C the climate control compressor is unable
to work. It is therefore inadvisable
to use the inside air recirculation
function v with low outside temperature as windows may mist
over quickly.
WARNING
The inside air recirculation
function makes it possible
to reach the required “heating” or
“cooling” conditions faster. It is
however inadvisable to use it on
rainy/cold days as it would considerably increase the possibility of
the windows misting inside, especially if the climate control system
is off.
WARNING
It is advisable to turn on the
inside air recirculation system in queues or tunnels to avoid
admitting polluted air from outside.
The prolonged use of this function
should however be avoided, especially with several persons on
board, to avoid the possibility of the
windows misting inside.
130
WARNING
In certain weather conditions (e.g. outside temperature around 0°C) and with automatic air recirculation control on,
mist may form on the windows. In
this case press the inside air recirculation button (7) v, to
switch off recirculation (leds on
button off) and if necessary increase the flow of air to the windscreen.
A0B0073m
When button (14) AUTO is pressed, the
system automatically regulates the amount
and distribution of the air admitted into the
passenger compartment, clearing all the previous manual settings.
This condition is indicated by the lighting
of both button leds.
When the right led, on button (14) AUTO,
is OFF, it indicates that one or several manual operations have been carried out and,
therefore, that automatic control is not complete (except for temperature control, which
is always automatic) indicated by the left
led on.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
BUTTON AUTO AUTOMATIC
OPERATION (fig. 112)
fig. 112
131
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
QUICK FRONT WINDOW
DEMISTING/DEFROSTING
BUTTON (
MAX-DEF function)
(fig. 113)
A0B0074m
-
Pressing button (10) - the climate control automatically activates timed operation
of all the functions needed to quicken
demisting/defrosting of the windscreen and
front side windows, i.e.:
– it turns on the climate control compressor;
– switches off inside air recirculation, if on
(both leds off);
– sets the maximum air temperature (HI)
on both displays (2) and (5);
– operates the fan at a predefined speed;
– directs the flow of air towards the windscreen and front side window vents;
– turns on rearscreen heating and, if present, the wing mirror coils.
fig. 113
When the maximum demisting/defrosting function is on, the led on button (10)
-, the led on the rearscreen heating button (9) ( and the led on button (12)
√ come on; at the same time the leds on
button (7) v go out.
132
WARNING If the engine is not warm
enough, the function will not engage the
predefined fan speed immediately, to limit
the flow to the passenger compartment of
air that is not warm enough to demist the
windows.
A0B0075m
Pressing one of the following buttons:
(10) -, (7) v, (11) MONO, (14)
AUTO or (12) √ the system switches off
the maximum demisting/defrosting function, resuming the system operating conditions prior to turning it on, in addition to
activating the last function required, if any.
WING MIRROR AND
REARSCREEN DEFROSTING/
DEMISTING BUTTON
(fig. 114)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
When the maximum demisting/defrosting function is on, the only manual operations possible are manual adjustment of the
fan and switching rearscreen heating off.
(
Pressing button (9) ( , turns on demisting/defrosting of the rearscreen and, if present, the wing mirror coils.
The activation of this function is shown
by the turning on of the led on the button.
This function is timed and switches off automatically after 20 minutes, or pressing the
button again; the function is also switched
off when the engine is stopped and will not
be switched on again the next time the engine is started.
fig. 114
WARNING Rear heated window manual on/off control prevails over automatic
activation decided by the climate control system control unit.
133
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
This function is timed and switches off automatically after 20 minutes, or pressing the
button again; the function is also switched
off when the engine is stopped and will not
be switched on again the next time the engine is started.
WARNING The system turns on
rearscreen heating automatically if the temperature is below 3°C.
WARNING Do not apply stickers on the
inside of the rearscreen over the heating filaments to avoid damage that might cause
it to stop working properly.
WARNING When reconnecting the negative battery cable after having disconnected
it, wait for 2 minutes before turning the key
to enable the climate control system to reset actuator strokes properly.
134
POLLEN FILTER
This filter has the specific capability of combining the mechanical filtering of the air with
an electrostatic effect so that the outside air
admitted to the passenger compartment is
purified and free from particles such as dust,
pollen, etc.
If the vehicle is used mainly in polluted
or dusty areas it should be checked and if
necessary replaced, at shorter intervals.
In addition to the above, it also effectively
reduces the concentration of pollutants.
The filtering action takes place under all
air inlet conditions and it is clearly most effective with the windows shut.
Have the conditions of the filter checked by
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services at least once
a year, preferably on the onset of summer.
Failure to replace the filter may considerably reduce the effectiveness of
the climate control system up to
blocking the air flow from the outlets and vents.
(JTD engines) (for versions/
markets where applicable)
The car is equipped with an additional
heater (not programmable) which supports
the engine during cold or winter weather
to quickly reach a comfortable temperature
inside the passenger compartment.
CONTROLS
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS
(fig. 116)
TAILGATE OPENING (fig. 115)
They are switched on by pressing button
(A), regardless of the position of the ignition key.
To open the boot pull the lever (A) at the
side of the driver’s seat.
When the hazard warning lights are
switched on, the switch itself begins to flash
together with the direction indicator warning lights and the emergency indicator on
the instrument panel. This functions is
switched off by pressing the button again.
The heater operates with the engine running when the outside temperature is below
20°C and the engine has not yet reached
normal operating temperature.
WARNING
Do not operate the boot release lever with the car on
the move.
WARNING
Use of the hazard warning
lights is ruled by the Highway Code of the country in which
the car is used. Observe regulations.
A0B0042m
fig. 115
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
ADDITIONAL HEATER
A0B0036m
fig. 116
135
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
FRONT FOGLIGHTS (fig. 117)
(where required)
These come on when button (A) is
pressed and when the external lights are already on.
The warning light 5 will light up on the
instrument panel.
By turning the ignition key to STOP, the
fog lights are turned off automatically and
do not come on the next time the engine
is started without pressing button (A).
Press the button (A) again to switch the
front foglights off.
WARNING The front foglights should be
used in compliance with the local traffic
laws.
REAR FOG GUARDS (fig. 117)
These are turned on, with the dipped beam
headlamps or fog lights on, by pressing button (B).
At the same time, warning light 4 on the
instrument cluster lights up.
By turning the ignition key to STOP, the
fog guards are automatically turned off and
they do not come on the next time the engine is started unless button (B) is pressed.
DASHBOARD LIGHTING
ADJUSTMENT (fig. 118)
When the outside lights are on, the dashboard lighting is adjusted by pressing button
(A).
Each press of the button (A) cyclically selects one of the three lighting levels provided: low-medium-high.
Press button (B) to turn them off.
WARNING Always use the rear fog
guards in accordance with local regulations
in force.
A0B0740m
136
fig. 117
A0B0326m
fig. 118
This is an automatic safety switch which is
triggered in the event of crash to interrupt
the flow of fuel.
The intervention of the inertial switch is indicated by a message + symbol on the Infocenter display (see “Infocenter Display”
in this chapter) and by the door unlocking.
Inspect the care carefully to make sure that
there are no fuel leaks, for instance in the
engine compartment, under the vehicle or
near the tank area.
If no leaks are found and the vehicle can
be restarted again, press button (A) to activate the fuel supply system.
OPENING THE FUEL FLAP
(fig. 120)
The fuel flap is released from inside the car
raising the front part of the lever (A).
After a collision, remember to turn the ignition key to STOP so as not to run the battery down.
WARNING
If a smell of fuel is noted
following an accident, or
the fuel system is leaking, to avoid
the risk of fire do not reset the
switch.
A0B0574m
fig. 119
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
INERTIAL FUEL CUT-OFF
SWITCH (fig. 119)
A0B0044m
fig. 120
137
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
HEADLIGHT CORRECTOR
(fig. 121)
position 2: 5 people on-board, luggage
compartment full (50 kg approximately);
If the car is fitted with xenon headlights,
beam aiming is electronic and therefore control (A) on the mask near the steering column is not present.
position 3: Driver and 300 kg in luggage
compartment.
The headlights should be aimed correctly
depending on the vehicle load.
The control (A) on the plate at the side of
the steering column can be moved to four
positions corresponding to the vehicle loads
given below:
position 0: 1 or 2 people occupying front
seats, full fuel tank, on-board equipment present;
HAND BRAKE (fig. 122)
The hand brake lever is located between
the two front seats.
To operate the brake when the vehicle is
“stationary”, pull the lever (A) upwards until the required braking action is obtained.
When the ignition key is in the MARposition, the x warning light will come on on
the instrument panel.
WARNING
Check the positioning of
the headlight beams every
time you change the load to be carried.
position 1: 5 people on-board;
A0B0240m
138
fig. 121
A0B0288m
fig. 122
To release the hand brake:
– slightly lift the lever (A) and press the
release button (B);
WARNING The handbrake lever (A) is
fitted with a safety device which prevents
the brake from being released when, if the
lever is pulled, button (B) is pressed. Therefore, to release the brake, in addition to
pressing button (B), it is also necessary to
pull lever (A) further upwards to release the
safety device, then lower the lever completely
GEARSHIFT LEVER (fig. 123)
Depending on the versions the car is fitted
with a five or six speed mechanical gearbox
(see “Technical specifications” chapter).
The position of the individual gears is
shown by the pictogram on the gearshift
lever knob.
When changing gear, always fully depress
the clutch pedal. Before engaging reverse
gear (R) wait for the car to be stationary.
– holding the button down lower the lever.
The x warning light on the instrument
panel will go out.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
WARNING
The wheels should be
locked after a few clicks of
the hand brake. If this does not occur, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services to have the hand brake
adjusted.
To prevent the car from moving accidentally, keep the brake pedal pressed when
engaging the handbrake.
A0B0290m
fig. 123
139
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
140
For 2.5 V6 24V versions and Diesel versions, to engage reverse gear (R), it is necessary to wait for the car to be stationary,
then raise the ring under the grip (with the
fingers of the same hand holding the lever).
After engaging reverse gear, release the
ring. It is not necessary to raise the ring on
the lever when shifting from reverse to another gear.
WARNING Reverse gear can only be engaged with the vehicle completely stopped.
With the engine running, before engaging
reverse gear it is necessary to wait for at
least 3 seconds with the clutch pedal fully
pressed, to avoid grating and the possibility of damaging the gears.
WARNING
To change gear smoothly,
the clutch pedal must be
fully depressed. Therefore, there
should be no hindrances under the
pedal unit. Make sure that any
mats are well laid and do not interfere with the pedals.
Do not drive with your
hand resting on the
gearshift lever, since the
applied pressure, though slight,
may, with the passing of time,
damage parts inside the gear.
(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
The 2.0 JTS engine can be supplied with
a mechanical gearbox with electronic control, called “Selespeed”.
The Selespeed considerably simplifies the
use of the car, it reduces driving fatigue in
town or when frequent gearshifting is necessary, but at the same time it assures brilliant performance.
WARNING To be able to use the Selespeed correctly, this chapter should be read
in full to understand the correct, permissible
operations to be carried out right from the
start.
This device comprises a conventional mechanical gearbox to which an electronically-operated electro-hydraulic device has been
added which automatically controls the
clutch and gear engagement.
The clutch pedal has been eliminated and
the vehicle moves off using only the accelerator pedal.
Gearshifting takes place through a floating
control lever (A-fig. 124) with only one
stable central position. Using this lever it is
possible to request increase/decrease of the
ratio of the gear engaged and/or engagement of reverse gear (R) or neutral (N).
There are also two levers on the steering
wheel spokes (fig. 125) through which,
only with the car on the move (with speed
above 0.5 km/h), it is possible to shift gear
up or down.
A0B0271m
fig. 124
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SELESPEED GEARBOX
A0B0270m
fig. 125
141
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
The gearbox can work in two operating
modes:
– the first is semiautomatic(then called
MANUAL), in which the driver directly requests gearshifting through the lever on the
centre console or pressing the buttons at the
steering wheel;
– the second is automatic, called CITY
(mode selectable with the specific button
B-fig. 124, the CITY sign appears on the
display fig. 126 fitted on rev-counter), in
which the system decides directly when to
shift gear.
With the gearbox in the CITY mode it is
still possible to carry out manual gearshifting, both using the gear lever and the steering wheel controls. The gearbox remains in
the CITY mode.
The gear engaged (fig. 126) is always
signalled on the display regardless of the selected mode.
N = neutral;
1 = first gear;
2 = second gear;
3 = third gear;
4 = fourth gear;
5 = fifth gear;
R = reverse.
A0B0384m
142
fig. 126
Failures of Selespeed gearbox are signalled
to the driver through a warning light (B-fig.
126) accompanied by an acoustic signal.
WARNING Opening the driver’s door,
the Selespeed starts the hydraulic part of
the system to prepare it for the engine to be
started. This function (noted by the turning
of the electric pump) is deactivated after 10
openings/closings of the door that are not
followed by actual system activation using
the ignition key.
Turning the ignition key to MAR, all the
segments of the display (A-fig. 126), the
gearbox failure warning light (B-fig. 126)
and the word CITYlight up. After about one
second, the display indicates the gear engaged (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, R); from this moment, the Selespeed system accepts
gearshift commands.
OPERATION WITH THE
ENGINE OFF
To request gearshifting, in addition to keeping the brake pedal pressed it is necessary to:
WARNING Before operating the gearshift control lever, always check the gear engaged on the display (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, R).
– to increase gear (+) (fig. 127) push
the lever “forwards” (if the car is in first gear
this shifts to second, if it is in second gear
it goes to third and so on up to fifth). If the
system is in neutral (N) or reverse (R) the
forward movement on the lever causes engagement of first gear (1).
When the engine is off and the vehicle is
stationary, it is possible to engage all the
gears.
With the vehicle stationary and with the
brake pedal pressed, requests to shift gear
are accepted only if they are carried out
through the control lever on the central console.
– to shift down (–) (fig. 127) push the
lever backwards (if the car is in fifth gear
it moves to fourth, if fourth gear is engaged
it shifts to third and so on down to first).
WARNING If after 10 seconds the display segment do not display the gear engaged or the failure warning light stays on,
turn the ignition key to STOP and wait for
the display to go off, then repeat the system activation procedure. If the fault persists, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SYSTEM ACTIVATION
A0B0272m
fig. 127
143
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
To put the gearbox in neutral (N), starting from the condition with the vehicle stationary and the brake pedal pressed, it is
necessary to move the gearshift control lever
to the right (fig. 128).
From any gear (N, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5) and
with the vehicle practically at a standstill,
it is possible to request engagement of reverse gear, pushing the lever to the right and
then backwards (fig. 129). If the vehicle is on the move, the request is not accepted; wait for the car to stop and then
request reverse gear engagement again
WARNING If wanting to leave the car
parked on a sloping road with a gear engaged to keep it braked, it is necessary to
check that the Infocenter display shows the
new gear engaged and then wait for 1 to
2 seconds before releasing the brake pedal
to allow complete clutch engagement.
A0B0273m
144
WARNING Once a gear has been shifted
it is necessary to release the gearshift control lever immediately after making the request. A prolonged action (over 10 seconds)
causes automatic shifting to CITY; previous
conditions are restored when releasing the
lever.
fig. 128
A0B0274m
fig. 129
The engine can be started with the gear
engaged or in neutral (N), provided that the
brake pedal is pressed down.
WARNING Keep the brake pedal
pressed during the starting operation. As the
brake pedal stiffens if it is pressed repeatedly with the engine off, in this situation, to
allow the engine to be started, it is necessary to increase the pressure exerted on the
pedal itself.
After starting, the gearbox automatically
sets to neutral, the display shows the letter (N) and the system selects the operating mode stored before switching off.
WARNING
If the engine fails to start
with the gear engaged, the
driver is alerted of the potentially
dangerous situation due to the fact
that the gearbox has automatically
set to neutral by the buzzer and
the display on the rev counter.
TURNING THE ENGINE OFF
AND SYSTEM DEACTIVATION
Turning the ignition key to STOP the engine switches off but the Selespeed system
still remains active, waiting for the vehicle
to stop completely. After about 2 - 4 seconds
from when the key has been turned to the
STOP position, the hydraulic part is deactivated and immediately afterwards the display on the rev counteralso goes out ; the
Selespeed system is only deactivated at this
point.
The gear selected before turning the engine off remains engaged.
If the engine stops with the gearbox in
neutral (N), the buzzer draws the attention
of the driver so that the vehicle can be put
in safety conditions engaging the first gear
(1) or reverse (R). In this case, it is necessary to turn the ignition key to MAR and
with the brake pedal pressed, engage first
gear (1) or reverse (R).
WARNING
NEVER leave the car with
the gearbox in neutral (N).
WARNING
Never remove the key
when the car is on the
move, because in addition to the
fact that the Selespeed system
would not work properly until
stopping the car, the steering
wheel would automatically lock at
the first turn.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
STARTING THE ENGINE
WARNING
It is absolutely necessary
to turn off the engine consequently deactivating the Selespeed system keeping the brake
pedal pressed: release the pedal
ONLY when the display on the rev
counter goes off.
145
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
MOVING OFF
With the engine running and the vehicle
stationary, the gears that can be engaged
for moving off are only first (1), second (2)
or reverse (R).
To engage them it is possible to use the
control lever on the centre console, with the
brake pedal pressed, as the levers on the
steering wheel allow gear engagement only
over 0.5 km/h.
WARNING Reverse gear (R) can be engaged from each of the following other ratios: neutral (N), first gear (1) or second
gear (2). If the car is on the move, the request is not accepted; it is necessary to wait
for the car to be completely stopped and
then request reverse (R) again.
The driver is informed of the reverse gear
engaged condition by the intermittent sound
of the buzzer as well as by the display on
the rev counter.
WARNING If while shifting from reverse
(R)/first gear (1) to neutral (N)/first gear
(1) sticking occurs on the first gear, the system automatically engages second gear
(2).
146
This should not be considered as a fault as
it is part of the operating logic. For the same
reason, in the event of sticking on reverse,
the system commands partial clutch closing
to allow engagement of the gear; in this
case engagement of reverse gear (R) will
be less comfortable.
Moving off of the vehicle is obtained:
1) releasing the brake pedal;
2) gradually operating the accelerator
pedal.
The vehicle pick-up torque is higher the
more the accelerator pedal is pressed.
WARNING
After a request to shift
gear with the vehicle stationary, before pressing the accelerator pedal to make the car start,
the driver must always check that
the gear engaged shown on the
display is the one required.
WARNINGS
– With the vehicle stationary and a gear
engaged, always keep the brake pedal
pressed until you decide to move off;
– in prolonged stops with the engine running it is advisable to keep the gearbox is
neutral;
– when the car is parked on a slope, do
not use the pick-up manoeuvre to keep the
vehicle stopped; use the brake pedal and
work on the accelerator pedal only when
you decide to move off;
– use second gear only when necessary
to obtain better control of pick-up in low
speed manoeuvres;
– if, with reverse gear engaged, you need
to engage first gear or vice versa, shift gear
only when the car is completely stationary
and with the brake pedal pressed.
Downhill with the gear engaged and the
accelerator released (if the vehicle is travelling), if a certain pre-established speed is
exceeded, the system automatically engages the clutch to provide adequate engine
braking.
Due to safety reasons, the Selespeed system activates the buzzer when:
Still for safety reasons, when the vehicle
is stationary, with the engine started and
gear (1), (2) or (R) engaged, the system
activates the buzzer and shifts to neutral
(N) automatically when:
– there is no action on the accelerator
and/or brake pedal for at least 3 minutes;
– the brake pedal is pressed for over 10
minutes;
– the driver’s door is opened and the accelerator and brake pedal are not pressed
for at least 1 second.
STOPPING THE CAR
To stop the vehicle, simply release the accelerator pedal and, if necessary, operate
the brake pedal.
Regardless of the gear engaged and of the
operating mode activated (MANUAL or
CITY), the system automatically disengages the clutch and downshifts gear.
If you intend to move off again without
having completely stopped the car, this way
the most suitable gear ratio for re-accelerating will be available.
Stopping the vehicle, the system automatically engages first gear (1).
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Though strongly inadvisable, if due to unforeseen circumstances when driving downhill the car is allowed to travel with the gearbox in neutral (N), when the engagement
of a gear is requested, the system automatically engages the best gear to allow
transmission of the torque to the wheels in
relation to the speed of the car.
– clutch overheating occurs during vehicle
starting; in this case, it is necessary to
“force” moving off avoiding hesitations or
to release the accelerator and use the brake
pedal to park the vehicle if the car is on a
slope;
– the car moves in the opposite direction
to the gear engaged, (e.g.: vehicle moving
forward with reverse engaged); in this situation it is necessary to stop the vehicle and
keeping the brake pedal pressed, engage
the gear correctly.
147
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
OPERATION
The gearbox can work in two operating
modes:
– the first is semiautomatic (MANUAL),
in which the driver directly decides when to
shift gear;
– the second is completely automatic
(CITY), in which the system decides directly when to shift gear according to the
type of driving.
The CITY mode can be selected by pressing the specific button CITY on the gearbox
lever knob; when this mode is selected, the
CITY sign appears on the display fitted on
rev counter.
SEMIAUTOMATIC OPERATION
(MANUAL)
In the MANUAL operating mode the display on the rev counter shows the gear engaged.
The MANUAL operating mode is set
when, with the CITY mode selected, the
CITY button (B-fig. 130) is pressed
again, excluding the previously selected
mode.
In this operating mode, the decision to
change gear is left to the driver who decides
the most appropriate moment.
The requests to change gear can take place
through:
– the control lever on the centre console
(A-fig. 130);
– the levers on the steering wheel
(fig. 131), which can be used only when
the vehicle speed exceeds 0.5 km/h.
A0B0271m
148
fig. 130
A0B0270m
fig. 131
With the accelerator pedal pressed by over
60% of its stroke and with an engine speed
of over 5,000 rpm, gearshifting becomes
quicker.
– reduce and then increase the engine
torque;
In the MANUAL mode there are some
automatic/safety devices which make driving easier:
– adapt the engine speed to the new gear
ratio engaged.
When downshifting, double de-clutching
(acceleration of the engine to bring it to the
speed necessary with the new gear ratio) is
carried out automatically.
The move to neutral (N) command is accepted when the car speed exceeds 20 km/h.
The command to engage reverse gear (R)
is accepted only if the car is stationary.
– when slowing down, the clutch is
opened and the gear ratio is reduced automatically to be ready for possibly picking up
speed again; if not, stopping the vehicle,
first gear (1) will be engaged automatically;
– request to change gear that could take
the engine above the maximum rpm or below the minimum permissible rpm are not
accepted;
– if the engine reaches the maximum permissible rpm and accelerating continues
(without coming into operation of the VDC
system), the system automatically engages
a higher gear; with the activation of the VDC
system, with the maximum engine rpm,
gear shifting is excluded;
– if sticking occurs during the engagement
of a gear, the system firstly tries to engage
the required gear again and, if it is still not
possible, it automatically engages the immediately higher one to avoid leaving the
vehicle in neutral speed.
WARNING It is advisable to wait for a
gearshift to end before requesting another
one, this will avoid multiple requests in quick
succession.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
When shifting gear, releasing the accelerator pedal is not necessary because the Selespeed system directly controls the engine
so as to:
149
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
AUTOMATIC OPERATION (CITY)
FAILURE SIGNALLING
The CITY automatic operating mode is selected pressing the button (A-fig. 132),
at the base of the gearshift lever.
Failures to the Selespeed gearbox are indicated by the t (A-fig. 133) warning light on the instrument cluster.
In addition to the gear, the display on the
rev counter will show the word CITY.
When the system is turned on (turning the
ignition key to MAR), the warning light
should turn on glowing steadily for about
4 seconds and then turn off.
The system decides directly when gearshifting according to the engine running speed
and the driving style.
Quickly releasing the accelerator pedal, the
system does not engage a higher gear in order to maintain an adequate level of engine
brake.
If the warning light stays on it means that
a fault to the gearbox has been detected; at
the same time a buzzer sounds intermittently for 4 seconds to attract the driver's
attention.
If the warning light t
comes on, contact the Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services
as soon as possible to remove the
fault.
In the case of a fault to the gearshift lever,
the system automatically activates the automatic CITY mode to allow the car to
reach the nearest Authorized Alfa Romeo
Services to have the fault detected eliminated.
In the event of faults to other components
of the gearbox, the system only allows the
engagement of certain ratios: first gear (1),
second (2) and reverse (R).
A0B0269m
150
fig. 132
A0B0383m
fig. 133
WARNING
In case of transmission
fault, contact the Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services as
soon as possible to check the system.
The buzzer is activated when:
– reverse gear (R) is engaged;
– the vehicle is parked with the gearbox
at neutral (N); this can be seen turning the
ignition key to STOP;
– clutch overheating takes place during
pick-up;
– the car moves in the opposite direction
to the gear engaged (e.g.: the car tends to
do downhill with reverse gear engaged);
– in the event of gearbox failure;
– the system has automatically engaged
neutral (N) after:
• there is no action on the accelerator
and/or brake pedal for at least 3 minutes;
PARKING THE VEHICLE
TOWING THE VEHICLE
To park the car safely it is absolutely
necessary to engage first gear (1) or reverse (R) and, when on a sloping road, also
engage the hand-brake.
WARNING For towing the vehicle, adhere to local regulations. Make sure that the
gearbox is in neutral (N) (checking that the
car moves when pushed) and proceed as for
towing a normal car with mechanical gearbox following the instructions given in the
chapter “In an emergency”.
Turning the engine off with the car facing
uphill and a gear engaged, it is absolutely
necessary to wait for the display on the
rev counter to go off before releasing the
brake pedal, so that the clutch has innested
completely.
Should it be impossible to set to neutral,
do not tow the vehicle; contact Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services.
If the gearbox is in neutral (N) and you
want to engage a parking gear, it is necessary to activate the system and engage the
gear (1) or reverse (R) with your foot on
the brake pedal.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SIGNALLING WITH THE BUZZER
WARNING
Do not start the engine
when towing the vehicle.
• the brake pedal is pressed for over 10
minutes;
• the driver’s door is opened and the accelerator and brake pedal are not
pressed for at least 1 second;
• detection of a gearbox fault.
151
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Q-SYSTEM
AUTOMATIC GEARBOX
(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
The 2.5 V6 24V engine can be supplied
with an automatic gearbox which in addition to the normal functions, makes it possible to shift gear by hand moving the selector lever to the special sector, Q-System
device.
WARNING To be able to use the automatic gearbox correctly, the description given
in this chapter should be read thoroughly
in order to learn the correct, allowed operations also in concerning the Shift-lock and
Key-lock safety devices with which the gearbox is fitted right from the start.
STARTING THE ENGINE
MOVING OFF
The engine can only be started with the
gearshift lever (fig. 134) in position P
or N.
After starting, with the engine idling and
keeping the brake pedal pressed (Shift-lock
safety device), move the gearshift lever
(fig. 134) to position D, or to the manual position. Release the brake pedal and
gradually press the accelerator pedal.
For safety reasons, you are advised to start
the engine with the brake pedal pressed.
WARNING When moving off, after having started the engine, do not press the accelerator pedal before and while moving the
gearshift lever. This is particularly important
when the engine is cold.
To move the lever, raise the ring (Afig. 134) under the gearshift lever knob.
A0B0268m
152
WARNING Moving the lever from position P, with the ignition key at MAR, is
only allowed with the brake pedal pressed
(Shift-lock safety device).
fig. 134
WARNING The ignition key in the
STOP position can only be removed from
the ignition switch provided that the
gearshift lever is at P (Key-lock).
In an emergency (failures, flat battery,
etc.), it is possible to remove the ignition
key also with the selector lever not positioned at P.
Press the release device (A-fig. 136),
next to the ignition switch inside the trim,
with your finger removing the key at the
same time.
The main feature of this gearbox is the possibility of using it either automatically or
manually. The choice of the operating mode
is carried out positioning the gearshift lever
in the right sector (automatic gearshifting)
or in the left sector (manual gearshifting).
Do not take the car to peak performance
until the engine has reached normal operating temperature.
The gearbox operating mode and the gear
engaged are shown on the display inside the
rev counter (A-fig. 137).
A0B0267m
fig. 135
SELECTING AUTOMATIC/
MANUAL GEARSHIFTING
A0B0266m
fig. 136
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
In an emergency (failures, flat battery,
etc.), it is possible to move the lever from
position P, pressing the special mechanical
button under the gearshift lever cover, in the
area (A-fig. 135); at the same time
move the lever from position P to the required position. If the engine is being
started, move the lever to position N, which
is the only one that allows this operation
in this case.
A0B0385m
fig. 137
153
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Selector lever
For automatic gearshifting, move the
gearshift lever to the right sector
(fig. 138) in one of the following positions:
P - park (the engine can be started)
R - Reverse
To prevent accidental engagements, moving the lever to position P is only allowed
raising the ring (A-fig. 138) placed under the gearshift lever knob.
Move the gearshift lever to R with the car
stationary, the engine idling and the brake
pedal pressed.
When the car is being parked, move the
lever to this position. A device in the gearbox will lock the driving wheels.
N - neutral (the engine can be started)
D - automatic forward gear.
Raise the ring (A-fig. 138) placed under the gearshift lever knob for shifting:
– from N to R.
A0B0265m
fig. 138
To prevent accidental engagements, moving the lever to this position is only allowed
raising the ring (A-fig. 138) placed under the gearshift lever knob.
With the lever in position R the reversing
lights turn on and a beep is sounded for
safety reasons to indicate that reverse gear
has been engaged.
R - reverse
– from P to R and vice versa
154
P - Park
WARNING
Always pull the handbrake completely before
leaving the car.
Move the gearshift lever to position P when getting out of the car
leaving the engine running.
Before moving the lever, press the brake
pedal: the car must be stationary.
WARNING With the lever in position R,
reverse gear is not engaged if the vehicle
speed is above the established level. When
the car speed falls below this level, reverse
gear is engaged and remains engaged even
if the speed returns above the limit.
D - Automatic forward gear
This is the neutral position to be used when
the car has to be pushed or towed.
This is the position to be used always under “normal” driving conditions, for example on the motorway and urban roads and
when wanting to minimise fuel consumption
(combined with the CITY driving mode).
WARNING
With the engine idling,
when moving the lever to
position N the car tends to move
even if it is on level ground: keep
the brake pedal pressed when the
lever is in position N.
When the lever is in this position, the gearbox automatically selects the four available
speeds. It is also the position to be used
for the ICE driving mode.
Shifting to lower gear
(Kick down)
In the event of the need to accelerate
heavily (e.g. for overtaking) pressing the
accelerator fully home beyond the stiff point
will cause automatic kick down to a shorter
ratio, engine speed conditions permitting.
Releasing the accelerator pedal as soon as
the stiff point has been passed, the gearbox
shifts to the optimum ratio in relation to the
driving mode, throttle opening position and
selector lever position.
The Kick-down function is advised only for
overtaking or fast accelerating to avoid increasing fuel consumption.
WARNING
With the engine idling and
the lever in position D the
vehicle tends to move: always
keep the brake pedal pressed until moving off.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
N - Neutral
Kick-down is cut off automatically in the
ICE driving mode.
155
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SELECTING THE DRIVING
MODES
SPORT (button
pressed):
The automatic gearbox for this car is controlled electronically and includes the selection of three different driving modes, thereby
giving the best response in terms of driving
comfort, consumption levels, sporty performance and travelling safety.
This is selected when wanting to avail of
the vehicle’s peak performance for sporty
driving or on demanding routes.
The three driving modes CITY, SPORT
and ICE are selected by 2 buttons on the
centre console (fig. 139).
The C/S button (A-fig. 139) selects the
CITY or SPORT functions, the ICE button
(B-fig. 139) selects the ICE mode.
With the ignition key at MAR, the driving
mode selected is indicated by the lighting
up of the corresponding word on the display
on the instrument cluster (rev counter):
C/S
(A-fig. 139)
Driving in the SPORT mode increases fuel
consumption.
WARNING The CITY or SPORT driving modes can be selected under any condition (vehicle stationary or on the move).
WARNING When the car is started with
a cold engine, the system selects the
SPORT driving mode, even if the CITY
mode has been selected, until the engine
reaches normal operating temperature.
CITY ( C/S button (A-fig. 139)
pressed):
A0B0264m
This is used under normal operating conditions; it gives preference to comfortable
driving and balanced consumption control
engaging gears at relatively low engine
speed.
156
fig. 139
ICE ( ICE button (B-fig. 133) pressed):
This driving mode is recommended when
the road surface offers poor grip (snow, ice,
etc.). Moving off takes place in 2nd gear.
The ICE driving mode is available only with
the selector lever at D.
Moving the lever from D, the ICE mode
is automatically cut off.
WARNING The ICE driving mode can
be engaged pressing the corresponding button also with the car on the move, provided
that the speed is below 45 km/h.
For manual gearshifting, move the lever
to the left sector (fig. 140).
Moving the gearshift lever to the manual
sector is only possible from position D.
Passing to manual gearshift control is possible under all driving conditions; however,
the system will allow engagement only of
the gear consistent with engine rpm and the
current speed of the vehicle.
Gearshifting takes place as for a normal
manual gearbox.
WARNING
When manual operation is
set (Q-System device) and
a high gear is engaged, to accelerate rapidly, for example for overtaking, it is necessary to shift to
a lower gear by hand, as for normal cars with mechanical gearbox.
Moving the lever back to position D the
gearbox will resume automatic operation instantly, engaging the ratio in accordance
with the driving characteristics and driving
mode selected.
STOPPING THE CAR
To stop the car, simply press the brake
pedal, regardless of the position of the
gearshift lever.
WARNING
With the engine idling even
on level ground, if the
brake pedal is not kept pressed,
the car tends to move.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
MANUAL OPERATING MODE,
Q-SYSTEM ACTIVATION
A0B0263m
fig. 140
157
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
FAULT SIGNALLING
Warning light glowing steadily
Warning light flashing
Automatic gearbox faults are indicated by
the t warning light (A-fig. 141) on
the instrument cluster as follows:
If the warning light turns on and glows
steadily when the car is travelling, it indicates that the gearbox oil has reached the
maximum established temperature.
The flashing of the warning light when travelling indicates a fault in the automatic gearbox.
– warning light glowing steadily
= maximum automatic gearbox oil temperature;
– warning light flashing = automatic
gearbox fault.
Turning the ignition key to MAR the warning light should turn on and go out after
approx. 4 seconds.
If the warning light stays on or turns on
during travelling, it indicates a gearbox fault
(flashing) or overheated gearbox oil (glowing steadily).
A0B0386m
158
fig. 141
The automatic control system provides an
emergency programme.
It is however advisable to stop the car,
move the lever to P or N and let the engine
idle until the warning light goes out. Resume
driving without demanding high performance from the engine.
If the warning light comes on again, it is
necessary to stop again with the engine
idling until it goes out again.
If the interval between one lighting up of
the warning light and the next is below 15
minutes, you are advised to stop the car,
turn off the engine and wait for the enginegearbox unit to cool down completely.
The automatic control system provides an
emergency programme. Under these circumstances, you are advised to stop the car
and turn off the engine; in fact, the next
time the engine is started, the self-diagnostics system could cut off the fault which
will, however, be memorised by the electronic control device.
Conversely, if the fault remains (warning
light (A- fig. 141) flashing), it is necessary to select the gears manually as if driving a car with mechanical gearbox, bearing in mind that the only two speeds
available are the 2nd and 4th gear, as shown
in the table below:
Gear engaged
manually
Gear ratio
available
1st
2nd
2nd
2nd
3rd
4th
4th
4th
If the indicator light remains flashing, contact the
Alfa Romeo Authorized
Service Centers as soon as possible to remove the fault.
If a fault is indicated when the engine is
started, this means that the gearbox control
system had detected and memorised a fault
during the journey prior to switching the engine off. In this case, too, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services to have the automatic gearbox checked over.
WARNING
When travelling with a
faulty gearbox, the reverse
lock might not work: absolutely
never move the lever to position
R with the car on the move.
ACOUSTIC WARNING
This comes into operation for about 18 seconds when:
– the driver’s door is open and/or the engine is off with the selector lever in a position other than P;
– position R (reverse) is engaged.
WARNING
When driving with a faulty
gearbox, drive with the utmost care considering the restricted
performance levels (in terms of acceleration and speed) the car can
offer.
PUSH STARTING
Starting the car by pushing or towing is not
possible. In the event of an emergency,
when the battery is flat, start the car with
a suitable emergency battery, following the
instructions given in the chapter “In an emergency”.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
It is possible to engage reverse gear.
159
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
TOWING THE CAR
WARNING For towing the car, abide by
current local regulations. Also follow the instructions given in the chapter “In an emergency”.
towed.
If the car needs to be towed, observe the
following recommendations:
– if possible, put the car on a rescue vehicle;
– if this is not possible, tow the car by raising the driving wheels (front) from the
ground;
– if this, too, is not possible, the car may
only be towed for 50 km at a speed below
50 km/h.
The gearshift lever should be at position N
for towing.
160
WARNING
Do not start the engine
when the vehicle is being
The failure to follow the
above instructions may
cause serious damage to
the automatic gearbox.
Cars with automatic gearbox may be towed only for
short distances and at low
speed: if longer towing is necessary, the driving wheels must be
raised to prevent the gearbox from
being pulled into rotation during
towing.
GLOVEBOX
On the dashboard there is a key glovebox
with light.
The compartment is lit by a courtesy light
when it is open (when the ignition key is
at MAR (B-fig. 143).
There is a recess on the lid (C-fig. 143)
for inserting a pen or pencil. For the versions
/ markets where provided, the closure flap
is fitted with a lock. The lock can be
opened/closed using the ignition key.
GRAB HANDLES (fig. 144)
Grab handles are set above the front doors.
Two grab handles (A) fitted with a coat
hook (B) are located above the rear doors.
WARNING
Do not travel with the
glovebox open; it could
harm the passenger in the event of
an accident.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
INTERNAL FITTINGS
To open the glovebox use lever (Afig. 142).
A0B0587m
fig. 142
A0B0261m
fig. 143
A0B0124m
fig. 144
161
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
CEILING LIGHTS
The car is fitted with passenger’s compartment ceiling lights (front/rear) with
gradual switching on/off. Timings, defined
as max. switching on time elapsing between
the end of gradual switching on and the start
of gradual switching off are as follows:
WARNING With ignition key at STOP
or when opening a door or the tailgate 15
minutes timing is activated, then ceiling
lights go off. Timing restarts each time a
door/tailgate is opened.
Front roof light (fig. 145)
The roof light comprises two lights with the
control switch.
1) approx. 6 seconds when:
– unlocking the doors manually or by the
remote control
– closing the driver’s door to get into the
car and fit the key into the ignition switch
– removing the key from the ignition
switch.
2) approx. 3 minutes from the door opening.
With switch (A) in the central position
(1), both lights turn on when a door is
opened.
When the doors are closed, a timer is activated for about 7 seconds, to allow the car
to be started. The lights go out when the ignition key is turned to MAR (with the doors
closed).
Moving switch (A) to the left (position 0),
the lights stay off (position OFF).
A0B0575m
162
fig. 145
Moving switch (A) to the right (position 2) both lights stay on.
The spot function is operated by switch
(B).
Moving switch (B) to the left (position 1)
the left spot light turns on. Moving switch
to the right (position 2) the right spot light
turns on.
With switch (B) in the central position (position 0) the spotlights stay off.
WARNING Before leaving the car, make
sure that both switches are in the central position. This way, the roof lights will go out
when the doors are closed. If a door is left
open, the lights will go out automatically after a few seconds.
To turn them on again, simply open another door or close the same one and open
it again.
Rear roof light (fig. 147)
(except versions with sunroof)
Centre rear roof lamp (fig. 148)
(only versions with sunroof)
Lowering the passenger’s sun visor, the
courtesy light on the roof lining can be seen.
In correspondence with each rear door
there is a light which turns on automatically
when a door is opened.
On the roof lamp there is a switch with
three positions.
This light makes it possible to use the courtesy mirror under conditions with dim light.
On Sportwagon versions there is also a
courtesy light under the driver’s sun visor.
Use switch (A) to turn it on and off, with
the ignition key at MAR.
They are timed and work in the same way
as described for the front roof light.
They can be turned on and off by hand
pressing the transparent cover (A) on the
circular impression.
When the switch (A) is in the central position (0) the roof lamp turns on automatically when a door is opened.
Lighting up is timed and it works as described for the front roof lamp.
Moving the switch to the right (position 1)
the roof lamp stays off all the time.
Moving the switch to the left (position 2)
the roof lamp stays on all the time.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Courtesy light (fig. 146)
(where required)
WARNING Before leaving the car make
sure that the switch (A) is in the central position (0), so that the lamp goes out when
the doors are closed.
A0B0259m
fig. 146
A0B0258m
fig. 147
A0B0257m
fig. 148
163
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
FRONT ASHTRAY AND CIGAR
LIGHTER (fig. 149)
To open the ashtray push and release the
front of the ashtray.
To use the cigar lighter press, with the ignition key at MAR, button (B); after some
seconds the knob will return automatically
to its initial position and the cigar lighter is
ready for use.
WARNING
The cigar lighter gets extremely hot. Handle with
care and prevent its use by children:
danger of fire and/or burning.
REAR ASHTRAYS (fig. 150)
An ashtray (A) is fitted to each rear door.
To open, pull downwards as shown below.
Always ensure that the
cigar lighter has turned off.
Remove the tray (A) to empty and clean
the ashtray.
WARNING
Do not use the ashtray as
paper bin: it could set on
fire on contact with cigarette stubs.
A0B0256m
164
fig. 149
A0B0255m
fig. 150
ODDMENTS RECESSES
ON DASHBOARD
FRONT DOORS
COMPARTMENTS AND POCKETS
(fig. 153)
Centre recess
Left side recess (fig. 152)
On the centre console near the handbrake
lever, there are the following oddments recesses:
An oddments recess (A) is provided on the
lower side of the dashboard, on the left of
the steering column.
Each front door has an oddments pocket
(A).
– oddments recesses (A) and (B);
– coin recess (C).
A0B0283m
fig. 151
A0B0254m
fig. 152
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
ODDMENTS RECESSES ON
CENTRE CONSOLE (fig. 151)
A0B0253m
fig. 153
165
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SUN VISORS
They can be adjusted frontally and laterally.
On the back of the visors there is a courtesy mirror with sliding cover (A-fig. 154),
lit by the lamp (B).
The passenger’s sun visor bears also the
symbol for correct use of children’s seats in
cars equipped with passenger’s airbag. For
further information, see the descriptions
given in paragraph “Passenger’s front
airbag” in this chapter.
TELEPHONE
PROVISION
(on request for versions/
markets where applicable)
On request for versions/markets where
applicable, the car may be fitted with a provision for the installation of a cellular telephone.
This provision comprises:
– sound system two-function aerial + cellular phone;
– supply and connection cables with specific connector for voice kit connection.
A0B0252m
166
fig. 154
The voice kit must be purchased separately by the
customer, since it has to be
compatible with the customer’s
own cellular phone.
For the installation of the
cellular phone and connection to the provision in the
car, contact only Alfa Romeo Authorized Services; this will guarantee first-rate results with no
possibility of any inconvenience
that may compromise the safety of
the vehicle.
ACCESSORIES
PURCHASED
BY THE OWNER
If, after purchasing your car, you want to
install electric accessories that require permanent power supply (burglar alarm, voice
function, radionavigator with satellite burglar alarm, etc.) or other accessories that affect the vehicle’s electric load, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services, whose qualified
staff is able to recommend the most suitable
equipment of the Lineaccessori Alfa Romeo,
and also assess the electric absorption of the
same, checking if the vehicle can withstand
the required load or if a battery of greater
power must be used.
Cellphones and other radio transmitters
(e.g. CB radios) cannot be used inside the
vehicle, unless you use a separate aerial
mounted outside the vehicle.
The transmission and reception efficiency
of this equipment may also be affected by
the shielding effect of the vehicle’s body.
WARNING
The use of cellphones, CB
radios or similar inside the
passenger compartment (without
an outside aerial) produces electromagnetic RF fields; if these are amplified by the resonance inside the
passenger compartment, they may
not only result in a potential health
hazard, or poor functioning of the
electronic systems such as engine
control units, ABS/EBD control
units, etc., fitted to the vehicle, but
also put the safety of your vehicle
in jeopardy.
SUNROOF
(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
The sunroof can only be operated when
the ignition key is in the MAR position.
WARNING
Improper use of the sunroof
can be dangerous. Before
and while operating it, always
make sure that the passengers are
not exposed to the risk of harm
caused either directly by the sunroof
in motion or by personal items
drawn or knocked by it.
Do not open the sunroof
when snow or ice are on
the roof as this may damage it.
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle,
the ignition key should always be removed to avoid accidents involving the sunroof which
could be inadvertently operated by
any passenger remaining in the vehicle.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
RADIO
TRANSMITTERS
AND CELLPHONES
167
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SLIDING FORWARDS/
BACKWARDS (fig. 155-16)
Press control button (A) on rear end (1)
to open the roof; press on front end (2) to
close it.
When the button is released, the sunroof
will stop in that position.
For versions/markets where applicable,
during opening the roof stops automatically
in an intermediate position called “Comfort”, which is advised for average speeds.
In this case, complete opening is obtained
pressing the rear end (1) of button (A)
again. When closing, the roof does not stop
in the “Comfort” position.
The sunroof is fitted with a curtain below,
which prevents sun radiation and is drawn
by hand using a catch.
The curtain is drawn by the roof when the
roof opens and is pushed completely inside
the roof panel when the roof is opened completely. With the closing movement the curtain will come out partially so that the hand
catch is accessible (A-fig. 157).
RAISING TO THE
QUARTERLIGHT POSITION
This can only be achieved (fig. 158)
when the sunroof is completely closed,
pressing front end (2) of the control button
(A-fig. 159).
Press the rear end (1) of the button (Afig. 159) to return the sunroof to the horizontal position (roof closed).
WARNING
Open and close the roof
only when the vehicle is
stationary.
A0B0041m
168
fig. 155
A0B0249m
fig. 156
A0B0248m
fig. 157
If the electrical control device does not
work, the sunroof can be opened manually
as follows:
WARNING At the end of the operation,
before removing the screwdriver or the
wrench, it is necessary to turn it by half a
turn in the direction opposite to that used,
until a click is felt.
– apply leverage to the points indicated
by the arrows and remove the plate with
switch (D-fig. 159);
The boot lid can be opened from outside
the vehicle (pressing the button on the key)
and from inside the vehicle.
WARNING If the boot is not properly
shut, the warning light ´ will come on on
the instrument panel or (where applicable)
on the Infocenter display (together with relevant message).
– use the outfit screwdriver or the special
wrench (B-fig. 160) supplied for the versions / market where provided, and located
in the object holder drawer, push on and turn
the sunroof control bushing (C-fig. 160)
clockwise to open it and anti-clockwise to
close it.
A0B0247m
fig. 158
LUGGAGE
COMPARTMENT
A0B0246m
fig. 159
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
EMERGENCY OPERATION
A0B0245m
fig. 160
169
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
Lifting the boot lid is made easier by the
action of gas springs.
OPENING FROM INSIDE
(fig. 161)
The luggage compartment can be opened
by remote control from outside pressing the
button (C), also when the electronic alarm
is on (where applicable).
To open the boot from inside the passenger compartment, pull the lever (A), at the
side of the driver’s seat.
WARNING
Only use the boot opening
lever with the vehicle stationary.
OPENING WITH REMOTE
CONTROL (fig. 162)
the gas springs are calibrated to guarantee correct
operation with loading
specified by the manufacturer. Arbitrary additions to the boot lid
(spoiler, etc.) may affect its operation and safety.
In this case, the alarm system switches off
volumetric protection and the boot lid control sensor. The system also sounds two
beeps and the arrows light up for about
three seconds (with the exception of versions for certain markets).
Closing the boot again the control functions
are restored, the system sounds two beeps
and the arrows light up for about three seconds (with the exception of versions for certain markets).
A0B0042m
170
fig. 161
A0B0743m
fig. 162
BOOT LIGHTING (fig. 163)
To close the boot, lower it and press down
above the locking mechanism until it is
heard to click into place.
Opening the boot, the light (A) in the upper part of the boot turns on automatically.
The light goes out closing the boot or after a few minutes (about 15) if the boot is
left open. In this case, to turn it on again
close the boot, then open it again.
A0B0000m
fig. 163
SECURING THE LOAD
(fig. 164-165)
The load carried may be blocked with
straps hooked to the special rings in the boot
corners.
The rings also serve to secure the luggage
retaining net (available upon request, for
versions/markets where applicable) c/o
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
A0B0242m
fig. 164
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
CLOSING THE BOOT
A0B0243m
fig. 165
171
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
CAUTIONS FOR CARRYING
LUGGAGE
Travelling at night with a load in the boot
it is necessary to adjust the height of the low
beam headlights (see next paragraph
“Headlights” in this chapter). For correct use
of the aiming device, also make sure that
the load does not exceed the values given
in the same paragraph.
WARNING
Do not load the luggage
compartment above the
permitted maximum (see “Technical specifications”). Also make
sure that the objects contained in
the boot are well secured to prevent them from being thrown forward causing harm to the passengers in the event of sharp braking.
172
WARNING
A heavy load that has not
been secured may cause
serious harm to passengers in the
event of an accident.
BONNET
The lever used to open the bonnet is located under the left end of the dashboard.
To open:
– Pull the lever (A-fig. 166) until the
bonnet clicks open.
WARNING
When wanting to carry a
spare can of petrol, this
must be done in compliance with
the law, only using a certified can,
appropriately fastened to the load
restraint eyelets. Even so, the risk
of fire is increased.
WARNING
Only with the car stationary.
A0B0049m
fig. 166
– Press the safety lever (fig. 167) upwards.
WARNING
DANGER-SERIOUS INJURY.
When carrying out checks
or maintenance operations in the
engine compartment, take special
care not to bump the head on the
raised bonnet.
To close:
– lower the bonnet to approx. 20 cm from
the engine compartment, then let it drop.
Try lifting it to make sure that it is shut completely and not simply caught in the safety
position.
If the bonnet does not close properly, do
not push it down but open it again and repeat the above procedure.
– Raise the bonnet.
WARNING Bonnet raising is aided by
two gas springs. Do not tamper with these
springs and accompany the bonnet while
raising it.
A0B0576m
fig. 167
WARNING
If checks need to be carried
out in the engine compartment when the engine is still
warm, keep away from the fan as
it could start up even when the key
is removed from the ignition. Wait
until the engine cools down.
WARNING
Scarves, ties and loose
clothing may be caught in
the moving parts.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
WARNING
Before lifting the bonnet,
make sure that the windscreen wiper arms are not raised
from the windscreen.
WARNING
For safety reasons the
bonnet shall always be
perfectly closed when travelling.
Always check for proper bonnet
locking. If the bonnet is left inadvertently open, stop the car immediately and close the bonnet.
173
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
ROOF RACK
PROVISION
The car is set for mounting special roof
racks.
WARNING
Distribute the load evenly
and when driving, bear in
mind the increased sensitivity to
side wind.
Roof racks, especially designed for this car,
must be fastened to pins (A-fig. 168) set
under the packing, as shown in the figure.
A0B0142m
LIGHT BEAM AIMING
WARNING The adjustment of the headlights is vital to your safety and comfort and
to that of other road users. The adjustment
of the headlights is also governed by precise
regulations. To guarantee both to yourself
and to the other drivers the best visibility
conditions when travelling with the headlights on, the vehicle must have its headlights properly adjusted.
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to
have the headlights correctly adjusted.
WARNING
After a few kilometres,
check that the fastening
screws are firmly tightened.
IMPORTANT On the inside surface of
the headlight there could appear a slight
coat of fogging; this does not show a defect,
since it is a natural occurrence due to low
temperature and to the degree of humidity
in the air; it will soon disappear as soon as
the lights are turned on. The presence of
drops inside the headlight shows water seepage: refer to the Alfa Romeo Dealership.
Strictly comply with the
regulations in force concerning the maximum overall dimensions.
174
HEADLIGHTS
fig. 168
If the car is fitted with xenon headlights,
beam aiming is electronic and therefore control (A) on the mask near the steering column is not present.
When the vehicle is loaded, the beam from
the headlights is raised due to the backwards tilt of the vehicle.
In this case the headlights must be adjusted using control (A) located on the plate
at the side of the steering column.
This control has four positions corresponding to various vehicle loads given below:
– position 0: 1 or 2 people occupying
front seats, full fuel tank, on-board equipment present;
– position 1: 5 people on-board;
ADJUSTING THE FRONT
FOGLIGHTS
(for versions/markets where
applicable)
To adjust the height of the beam of the
front foglights, act on adjusting screw (Afig. 170).
– position 2: 5 people on-board, luggage
compartment full (50 kg approximately);
– position 3: driver and 300 kg in luggage compartment.
Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to have
the headlights correctly ad-
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
COMPENSATION FOR TILT
(fig. 169)
justed.
A0B0240m
fig. 169
WARNING
Check the positioning of
the headlight beams every
time you change the load to be carried.
A0B0239m
fig. 170
175
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
176
GAS DISCHARGE HEADLIGHTS
(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
The gas (xenon) discharge headlights operate with a voltaic arc, in an ambient saturated with pressure xenon, instead of the
glow filament.
The resulting illumination is sensibly higher
to that of conventional lamps, both for light
quality (clearer light) and for the width and
positioning of the illuminated area.
The advantages of better illumination can
be perceived (due to less eyesight fatigue
and greater orientation capacity for the driver, which in turn means higher driving
safety) especially in case of bad weather,
fog and/or insufficient road signs, thanks
to the better illumination of the side parts
of the visual field, normally obscured.
The large increase of the side part illumination increases driving safety since it allows
the driver to better see the other users on
the edge of the road (pedestrians, cyclists
and bikers).
The triggering of the voltaic arc requires a
very high voltage, while subsequent power
supply can take place at a low voltage.
The electromechanical system to automatically keep constant trim makes the
headlight tilt compensating device unnecessary.
The xenon lamps have very long life which
makes possible fault very unlikely.
The headlights achieve their top luminosity approx. 15 seconds after they are
switched on.
The intense light produced by this type of
headlights requires the use of an automatic
system to keep headlight trim constant and
avoid dazzling the vehicles coming from the
opposite direction in case of braking, acceleration or when carrying loads.
WARNING
If necessary, have the system checked and repairs (if
any) made only by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
As regards cars equipped with gas discharge headlights (xenon lamps)(optional
for versions/markets where applicable) with
very great lighting power, when passing
from a country with right-hand driving to one
with left-hand driving, or vice versa, it is necessary to modify the orientation of the
dipped beam headlights, to optimize the illumination of the road edge and avoid dazzling the vehicles coming from the opposite
direction.
To have this operation
carried out, contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
ABS
The car is fitted with an ABS system which
prevents wheel lock when braking, better
exploits wheel grip and keeps the vehicle
controllable within the limits of the available
grip also during emergency braking.
The driver can feel that the ABS is operational by a light pulsing of the brake pedal,
accompanied by noise.
This should not interpreted as malfunctioning of the brakes, but it is the signal to
the driver that the ABS system is working:
it is the warning that the car is travelling at
the limit of grip an that, therefore, it is necessary to adapt the speed to the type of road
on which you are travelling.
The ABS system is an additional part of the
basic braking system; in the event of a fault
it is disabled, leaving the braking system
in the same conditions as a car without ABS.
In the event of a failure, though being unable to rely on the antilock effect, there is
absolutely no adverse effect on vehicle braking performance in terms of braking capacity.
If you have never used a car with ABS before, you are advised to learn how to use
it with a few preliminary trials on a slippery
surface, naturally under safety conditions
and fully adhering to the Highway Code of
the country concerned. You are also advised
to carefully read the following information.
The advantage of the ABS compared with
the conventional system is that it makes it
possible to maintain maximum vehicle handling performance also in the case of hard
braking under grip limit conditions, avoiding
wheel lock.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
DIPPED BEAM HEADLIGHT
AIMING FOR LEFT-HAND/
RIGHT-HAND DRIVING
(only for versions with gas
discharge headlights)
Do not however expect the braking distance always to be reduced with the ABS
system: for example, on soft surfaces such
as gravel or fresh snow on slippery surfaces,
the distance might increase.
WARNING
When you go back to your
country of origin, remember to have the dipped beam headlight orientation modified again.
177
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
In order to be able to exploit as far as possible the possibility of the antilock system
in the case of need, it is wise to follow a few
pieces of advice:
WARNING
The ABS exploits the available grip in full, but it cannot increase it; therefore, caution
is required on slippery surfaces,
without running unnecessary risks.
WARNING
If the ABS cuts in, it means
that the grip limit between
the tyres and the road surface has
been reached: it is necessary to
slow down and adapt driving to
the grip available.
178
WARNING
In the event of a system
fault, with lighting up of
the > warning light on the instrument cluster (together with the
message + symbol shown by the
display), have the vehicle checked
immediately by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services, driving slowly
to be able to regain full system
performance.
Braking on corners always requires the utmost caution, even with the help of the ABS.
The most important piece of advice, however, is the following:
WARNING
When the ABS cuts in and
you feel the pedal pulse, do
not reduce the pressure, but keep
the brake pedal firmly pressed
with no fear; this way you will
stop in the shortest possible space,
compatibly with the conditions of
the road surface.
Following these instructions you will be
in a condition to obtain peak braking performance at all times.
WARNING Cars fitted with ABS must
only be fitted with wheel rims, tyres and
brake linings of the type and brand approved
by the Manufacturer.
The braking system is completed by the
electronic control braking distribution system
called EBD (Electronic Braking Force Distributor) which distributes the braking action
through the ABS system control unit and
sensors.
WARNING
The car is fitted with an
electronic brake distributor
(EBD). If the > and x warning
lights, where required, come on at
the same time (together with the
message + symbol shown by the
display) when the engine is running, there is an EBD system fault;
in this case, violent braking may
lock the rear wheels too early, with
the possibility of skidding. Drive
extremely carefully to the nearest
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to
have the system checked over.
WARNING
The turning on of the >
warning light (together
with the message + symbol shown
by the display) with the engine
running normally indicates an ABS
system fault. In this case the braking system preserves its effectiveness, without however making
use of the antilock device. Under
these circumstances, the EBD system may fail to give top performance. In this case, too, you are
recommended to contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services immediately, driving in such a way as to
avoid abrupt braking, to have the
system checked.
VDC AND ASR
SYSTEMS
(where required)
VDC SYSTEM (VEHICLE
DYNAMICS CONTROL):
GENERAL
The VDC is an electronic vehicle stability
control system which, acting on the torque
and braking the wheels in a differentiated
manner, helps to bring the car back to the
correct course in the event of loss of grip.
While travelling the car is subjected to lateral and longitudinal forces that may be
controlled by the driver up to when the
tyres offer adequate road-holding; when
this falls below the minimum level, the car
starts to deviate from the course required
by the driver.
Above all on rough surfaces (such as cobbles, or due to the presence of water, ice
or soil), changes in speed (when accelerating or braking) and/or course (bends or the
need to avoid obstacles) can cause the tyres
to lose grip.
When the sensors detect the conditions
that would lead to skidding, the VDC system
acts on the engine and brakes generating
a stabilising torque.
WARNING
The system performance
levels, in terms of active
safety, should not induce the driver to run pointless and unjustified
risks. Driving conduct should always be suited to the conditions of
the road surface, vision and traffic. The responsibility for road
safety is always and anyway the
vehicle driver’s concern.
The VDC system helps the driver
to keep control of the car in the
event of loss of tyre grip.
The forces induced by the VDC system to control the lack of stability
of the car always and anyway depend on the grip between the tyre
and the road surface.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
WARNING
If the x low brake fluid
warning light comes on (together with the message + symbol
shown by the display), stop the car
immediately and contact the nearest Alfa Romeo Authorized Services. Indeed, any leak of fluid
from the hydraulic system compromises the effectiveness of both
the conventional brake system and
the system with antilock system.
179
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
VDC SYSTEM OPERATION
The VDC system turns on automatically
when the car is started and cannot be
switched off. It is however possible to cut
off operation of the ASR system pressing the
corresponding button on the centre console.
The main components of the VDC system
are:
– an electronic control unit which
processes the signals received from the various sensors and brings about the most appropriate strategy;
– a sensor that detects the position of the
steering wheel;
– four sensors that detect the rotation
speed of each wheel;
– a sensor that detects rotation of the car
around the vertical axis;
– a sensor that detects lateral acceleration
(centrifugal force).
180
The heart of the VDC system is the VDC
control unit which with the data supplied by
the sensors installed on the car, calculates
the centrifugal forces generated when the
car is cornering. The yawing sensor detects
the rotations of the car around its own vertical axis. The centrifugal forces generated
when the car is cornering are detected by
a highly sensitive lateral acceleration sensor.
The stabilising action of the VDC system is
based on calculations made by the
system’s electronic control unit which
processes the signals received from the
steering wheel rotation, lateral acceleration
and individual wheel rotation sensors. These
signals allow the control unit to recognise
the manoeuvre the driver intends to do
when turning the steering wheel.
The control unit processes the information
received from the sensors and is therefore
capable of detecting the position of the car
and comparing it with the trajectory the driver would like to follow instant by instant.
In the event of a discrepancy, the control
unit chooses and commands the most suitable action to bring the car back to the required course within a fraction of a second:
braking one or more wheels at a different
braking force and, if necessary it reduces the
power transmitted by the engine.
The corrective actions are changed and controlled continuously until the car returns to
the required course.
The action of the VDC system considerably
increases the active safety of the vehicle under many critical situations and it is particularly useful also when the road surface grip
conditions change.
WARNING
For the VDC, ASR and ABS
systems to work correctly,
the tyres must be of the same
brand and type on all wheels, in
perfect conditions and above all of
the specified type, brand and size.
WARNING
During use of the compact
spare wheel, the VDC system continues working. It should be
borne in mind that the spare wheel
is smaller than a normal tyre,
therefore its grip is lower than that
of the other tyres of the car.
The action of the ASR system is particularly
helpful under the following conditions:
TURNING ON THE ASR
FUNCTION
The ASR system integrates the VDC system controlling the vehicle drive and coming into operation automatically each time
one or both driving wheels skid.
– Skidding of the inner wheel on a bend,
due to the effect of the dynamic changes of
the load or over-accelerating.
The ASR function turns on automatically
each time the engine is started.
Two different control systems are activated,
depending on the skidding conditions:
– If skidding concerns both driving wheels,
because it is caused by the excessive power
transmitted, the ASR system cuts in reducing the power transmitted by the engine.
– If skidding concerns only one driving
wheel, the ASR system cuts in automatically
braking the skidding wheel, with an effect
similar to that of a self-locking differential.
– Excessive power transmitted to the
wheels, also in relation to the conditions of
the road surface.
– Acceleration on slippery, snowy or icy
surfaces.
– In the case of loss of grip on a wet surface (aquaplaning).
CUTTING IN OF THE VDC
SYSTEM
The cutting in of the VDC system is indicated by the flashing of the warning light
á on the instrument cluster, to inform the
driver that the car is in critical conditions of
stability and grip.
When travelling it is possible to switch the
system off and on again pressing the switch
(A-fig. 171) on the centre console.
Function disconnection is shown by the led
on the ASR button being turned on. If the
function is turned off while travelling, it will
turn on again automatically the next time
the engine is started.
WARNING When driving on snow, with
snow chains fitted, if may be helpful to switch
off the ASR function: in these conditions in
fact, skidding of the driving wheels when
moving off helps to obtain better traction.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
ASR FUNCTION (ANTISLIP
REGULATION): GENERAL
A0B0557m
fig. 171
181
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
WARNING LIGHT ON
INSTRUMENT PANEL
When the ignition key is turned to MAR,
the dial warning light á comes on but must
go out after a few seconds.
If the warning light does not go out, or if it
stays on (together with the message + symbol on the display and the coming on of the
ASR button led) when the vehicle is running,
contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
The flashing of the warning lamp when the
vehicle is running indicates the actuation of
the VDC system.
VDC system failure warning
In the event of a failure the VDC system
disengages automatically and the á warning light on the instrument cluster turns on
glowing steadily (together with the message
+ symbol shown on the display and the coming on of the ASR button led).
In the event of a VDC system failure the
car behaves like a vehicle not fitted with this
system: in any case it is advisable to contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as soon
as possible.
182
EOBD SYSTEM
The EOBD (European On Board Diagnosis)
system fitted in the car conforms with the
98/69/EC (EURO 3) Directive and the
2001/1/EC Directive, level B (EURO4) for
2.0 JTS, 2.0 JTS Selespeed and JTD 20V
Multijet versions.
This system continuously monitors the
components of the vehicle related to emissions; it also indicates, when the warning
light U comes on on the instrument panel
(together with the message + symbol
shown by the display) that the components
in question are in poor conditions.
The objective is the following:
– to keep under control the efficiency of
the system;
– to indicate when a malfunction causes
an increase in the emissions beyond the
threshold established by European regulations;
– to indicate the need to replace the deteriorated components.
The system also has a diagnostic connector, which can be interfaced with adequate instruments, that enables the error codes stored
in the control unit to be read, together with
a series of specific parameters concerning the
operation and diagnosis of the engine.
This check can also be made by the traffic control agents.
If, when the ignition key
is turned to MAR, the U
warning light does not
come on or if, when driving, it
lights up and emits a fixed light or
a flashing one (together with the
message + symbol shown by the
display), contact an Alfa Romeo
Authorized Service Station as soon
as possible. The operation of the
U warning light can also be
checked by means of special equipment available to the traffic control officers. Comply with the regulations in force in country where
you drive your car.
WARNING After the problem has beel
resolved, to completely check the system,
the Alfa Romeo Authorized Services must
carry out tests on a test bench and, if necessary, road tests that could be long.
(where applicable)
The fixed sound system, with cassette
player (radio with cassette player) or CD
player with parametric sound equalizer (radio with CD player) has been designed to
suit the specific characteristics of the passenger compartment, with a personalised
design that matches the style of the dashboard. The sound system instructions for use
are described in the attached supplement.
SOUND SYSTEM
PRESETTING SYSTEM
(for versions/markets where
applicable)
The sound system shall be installed in the
proper housing occupied by the glove compartment that can be removed by pressing
the two retaining tabs in the glove compartment: here are the power cables.
The car, if not delivered with sound system, is fitted with a glove compartment
(fig. 172) on the instrument panel.
Sound system presetting system includes
the following:
– sound system power cables;
– front and rear speaker power cables;
– aerial power cable;
– sound system housing;
– aerial on car roof (where provided).
If after buying the car you
want to install the sound
system, contact first Alfa
Romeo Authorised Services whose
qualified personnel, in addition to
suggesting the most suitable devices, will evaluate the overall
electric absorption to safeguard the
battery. Excessive loadless absorption could damage the battery
and lose warranty.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
SOUND SYSTEM
A0B742m
fig. 172
183
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
The wiring diagram is the following (fig.
173):
Connector A
A1 N.C.
A2 N.C.
A3 N.C.
A4 + 30 (battery-powered)
A5 Aerial power supply
TECHNICAL INFORMATION
Aerial
Speakers (fig. 174-175)
For cars fitted with presetting system, the
sound system includes the following:
For versions/markets where applicable,
the aerial can be built into the rear heated
window or can be located on the car roof.
– 2 tweeters (A-fig. 174), with 30W
power;
– 4 speakers (B-fig. 174) and (A-fig.
175), 165 mm diameter (2 front and 2
rear), with 40W power.
A0B387m
A6 Light
A7 + 15 (key-powered)
A8 Ground
Connector B
B1 RH rear speaker
B2 RH rear speaker
B3 RH front speaker
fig. 174
B4 RH front speaker
A0B741m
A0B237m
B5 LH front speaker
B6 LH front speaker
B7 LH rear speaker
B8 LH rear speaker
184
fig. 173
fig. 175
In order to prevent the vehicle being filled
with leaded petrol, the diameter of the filler
neck is smaller than the nozzle used on
pumps delivering leaded petrol.
PETROL ENGINES
The anti-pollution devices
present on the vehicle impose the use of four-star
unleaded fuel with an octane number (R.O.N.) above 95.
If the catalyst is not
working properly, harmful
emissions reach the exhaust, resulting in environment pollution.
JTD ENGINES
Under no circumstances
should conventional leaded
petrol be used, as this
would irreparably damage the catalyst. If the tank is accidentally
filled with leaded fuel, even in
minute quantities, DO NOT START
THE ENGINE. Do not attempt to dilute the petrol with lead free fuel.
Drain the entire fuel circuit and
tank.
The car must be refuelled
only with fuel oil for motor
vehicles, in conformity with
European specification EN590. The
use of other products or mixtures
may damage the engine irreparably, resulting in invalidation of the
warranty for the damage caused.
If the tank is accidentally filled
with another type of fuel, do not
start the engine but drain the tank.
If the engine has been run even for
a brief period, the tank must be
drained together with the entire
fuel circuit.
At low temperatures, the degree of fluidity of fuel oil may become insufficient due
to the formation of paraffins leading to danger of clogging the fuel oil filter.
Therefore, to avoid inconveniences, summer and winter fuel oils are normally distributed depending on the season.
However, during the intermediate season,
characterised by a large difference between
outside temperatures (0°C to 15°C), the
quality of the fuel oil distributed to the
pumps may not be adequate.
In this case, and above all if the use of the
car involves stopping and then starting again
at low temperatures (e.g. mountains),
make sure the car is filled with winter fuel
oil; if not, you are advised to mix the fuel
oil with a DIESEL MIX additive in the proportions stated on the can, pouring first the
antifreeze and then the fuel oil into the tank.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
REFUELLING
The DIESEL MIX antifreeze should be
mixed with the fuel oil before reactions due
to cold take place. Adding it too late will
prove pointless.
185
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
FUEL CAP (fig. 176)
The fuel flap is released from inside the
car, raising the front part of the lever (A).
WARNING For your safety, make sure
that the fuelling pump nozzle is inserted correctly into the housing, before starting the
engine.
The fuel cap (A-fig. 177) has a catch
to prevent misplacing it (B) that fastens it
to the flap (C).
WARNING The fuel tank is sealed hermetically and pressure may build up inside.
Any noise of rushing air when the cap is removed is perfectly normal.
EMERGENCY FLAP OPENING
DEVICE
WARNING
Do not get near the fuel
filler with naked flames or
lit cigarettes: danger of fire. Also
avoid going too near the filler with
the face to avoid inhaling harmful
vapours.
A0B0044m
186
fig. 176
In case of need, replace
the fuel cap only with an
original one; otherwise,
the efficiency of the petrol vapour
recovery system could be badly affected.
If the lever (A-fig. 176) fails to work,
it is still possible to open the flap by pulling
the cord (A-fig. 178) on the right-hand
side of the luggage compartment.
A0B0045m
fig. 177
A0B0388m
fig. 178
(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
ACOUSTIC SIGNAL
When the reverse gear is engaged an intermittent acoustic signal is automatically
activated.
The acoustic signal:
The parking system detects and informs
the driver (through an intermittent acoustic
signal) about the presence of obstacles in
the rear part of the car (fig. 179).
– raises with the reduction of distance between the car and the obstacle;
ACTIVATION
– is constant if the distance is unvaried.
If this situation takes place for side sensors,
the signal is stopped after about 3 seconds
to prevent sound indications when performing manoeuvres near walls.
The sensors are automatically activated
when the reverse gear is engaged.
The sound produced by the acoustic alarm
becomes continuous when the distance between the car and the obstacle is less that
30 cm.
– becomes continuous when the distance
between the car and the obstacle is less that
30 cm and stops if the distance raises.
ENVIRONMENTAL
PROTECTION
The design and construction of the vehicle have not only been developed with the
traditional aspects of performance and
safety in mind, but also take into account
the increasingly pressing problems tied to
protecting the environment.
The choice of materials, techniques and
particular parts are the result of work which
has made it possible to drastically reduce
the harmful effects on the environment and
guarantee respect for the severest international norms.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
PARKING SENSORS
(WHERE PROVIDED)
USE OF NON-TOXIC
MATERIALS
A0B0609m
None of the components of the vehicle contains asbestos. The padding and the climate
control system do not contain CFCs which
are held to be responsible for the depletion
of the ozone layer.
The colouring agents and the corrosion inhibitors used on the nuts, screws and bolts
do not contain cadmium any more, which
could pollute the atmosphere or water tables.
fig. 179
187
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR CAR
EMISSION REDUCING DEVICES
(petrol engines)
Trivalent catalytic converter
(catalytic silencer)
The exhaust system is fitted with a catalyzer formed of alloys of noble metals. It
is housed in a stainless steel container which
is able to resist the high operating temperatures.
The catalyzer converts the unburnt hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and nitrogen oxides present in the exhaust gas (even if in
small quantities thanks to the electronic injection and ignition system) into harmless
compounds.
Lambda probe
A sensor (lambda probe) measures the
content of oxygen present in the exhaust
gas. The signal transmitted by the lambda
probe is use by the injection and ignition
electronic control unit to adjust the air-fuel
mixture.
Anti-evaporation system
As it is impossible, even when the engine
is switched off, to prevent the formation of
fuel vapours, a system has been devised
which imprisons the vapours in a special activated carbon container.
During operation of the engine, these
vapours are sucked up and sent to combustion.
WARNING
Due to the high temperatures reached during operation of the catalytic converter, the
vehicle should not be parked over
inflammable materials (paper, fuel
oils, grass, dry leaves, etc.).
188
EMISSION REDUCING DEVICES
(JTD engines )
Oxidising catalytic converter
Converts the polluting substances present
in the exhaust gases (carbon monoxide, unburned hydrocarbons and particulate) into
harmless substances, thus reducing the
fumes and smell that are typical of diesel
engines.
The catalytic converter consists of a stainless steel case that houses a ceramic honeycomb body coated with noble metal used
as a catalyst.
Exhaust gas recirculation system
(E.G.R.)
This system recycles, i.e. re-uses, a varying percentage of the exhaust gases, depending on engine operating conditions.
It is used, when necessary, to control nitric oxides.
STARTING
THE ENGINE
WARNING The car is fitted with an electronic engine lock device. If the engine fails
to start see “Alfa Romeo CODE system”.
In addition to the notes
and specifications given below we recommend that,
during the initial period, you do not
drive to full vehicle performance
(for example excessive acceleration, long journeys at top speed,
hard braking, etc.).
WARNING
Running the engine in confined areas is extremely
dangerous. The engine consumes
oxygen and produces carbon
monoxide which is a highly toxic
and lethal gas.
The ignition switch is fitted with a safety
device which obliges the driver to return the
ignition key to the STOP position before repeating the starting operation if the engine
does not start immediately.
Similarly, when the engine is running, the
device prevents the key being moved from
the MAR to the AVV position.
To avoid useless consumption of power and
possible draining the battery, never leave the ignition key
in the MAR position when the engine is not running.
PROCEDURE FOR PETROL
ENGINES
WARNING It is important not to press
the accelerator until the engine has started.
1) Make sure the handbrake is engaged.
2) Move the gear lever to neutral.
3) Fully depress the clutch pedal so that
the starter motor is not forced to crank the
toothed wheels of the gearbox.
CORRECT USE OF THE CAR
CORRECT USE OF THE CAR
4) Ensure that the systems and electrical
devices, especially if they absorb high quantities of energy (e.g. heated rear windscreen) are switched off.
5) Turn the ignition to the AVV position
and release it as soon as the engine starts.
6) If the engine does not start, return the
key to the STOP position and repeat the
operation.
WARNING If it is difficult to start the engine do not insist with extended attempts
which may damage the catalyzer but contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
189
CORRECT USE OF THE CAR
WARNING The electric devices that absorb much energy (air conditioner,
rearscreen heating, etc.) are disengaged automatically during engine starting.
If the engine does not start at the first attempt, move the ignition key back to the
STOP position before repeating starting.
– Do not drive at full performance for the
initial kilometers of the journey, Wait until
the engine coolant temperature is between
50 and 60°C.
PROCEDURE FOR JTD VERSIONS
If starting is difficult (with the Alfa Romeo
CODE system efficient), do not insist with
prolonged attempts.
SWITCHING OFF
1) Make sure the handbrake is engaged.
2) Move the gearshift lever to neutral.
3) Turn the ignition key to the MAR position. The warning light m on the instrument cluster will turn on.
4) Wait for the m warning light to go
off, which will depend on how warm the engine is. With the engine very hot the warning light may stay on for such a short time
that it is not noticed.
5) Fully depress the clutch pedal.
6) Turn the ignition key to AVV as soon
as the m warning light goes off. Waiting
too long would make the glow plug heating
work pointless.
190
WARMING THE ENGINE
WARNING On the 2.0 JTS version,
keep the brake pedal pressed when starting
the engine. As the brake pedal stiffens if it
is pressed repeatedly with the engine off. In
this situation, to allow the engine to be
started, it is necessary to increase the pressure exerted on the pedal itself.
Only use an auxiliary battery if it is noted
that the cause is due to low charge of the
car’s battery. Never use a battery charger to
start the engine (see “If the battery is flat”
in the chapter “In an emergency”).
– Drive off slowly, at medium revs without accelerating abruptly.
– Release the accelerator pedal and wait
until the engine reaches idle speed.
– Turn the ignition key to the STOP position and switch off the engine.
WARNING After a taxing drive it is better to allow the engine to “catch its breath”
before turning it off by letting it idle to allow the temperature in the engine compartment to fall.
WARNING If the engine turns off with
the car on the move, the next time it is
started, the Alfa Romeo CODE warning light
Y may turn on. In this case, check that
switching off and starting the engine again
with the car stationary, the warning light
stays off. If not, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
EMERGENCY STARTING
If the Alfa Romeo CODE system does not
recognise the code transmitted by the ignition key (Alfa Romeo CODE Y warning
light on the instrument cluster on glowing
steadily) emergency starting may be carried
out using the code of the CODE card.
For the correct procedure see the chapter
“In an emergency”.
Starting by pushing, towing or running downhill
must
absolutely
be
avoided. These manoeuvres may
cause fuel to flow into the catalyst
and damage it irreparably.
WARNING
Remember that the servobrake and power steering
are not activated until the engine
is started, therefore considerably
greater effort is required on the
brake pedal and steering wheel.
PARKING
When the vehicle is parked, proceed as follows:
– Switch off the engine.
– Engage the handbrake.
– Engage first gear if the car is facing uphill or reverse if the car is facing downhill.
– Turn the front wheels so that the car will
immediately come to a half if the handbrake
slips.
CORRECT USE OF THE CAR
For vehicles equipped
with turbocharger in particular and for other vehicles in general, revving the engine
before switching off should be
avoided.
Revving the engine serves no purpose and consumes fuel for no reason. It may also cause damage to
the bearings on the rotor of the
turbocharger.
To avoid useless consumption of power and
possible draining the battery, never leave the ignition key
in the MAR position when the engine is not running.
WARNING
Never leave children unattended in the car. Always
remove the key from the ignition
when leaving the car and take it
with you.
191
CORRECT USE OF THE CAR
SAFE DRIVING
In designing your Alfa 156, Alfa
Romeo has worked thoroughly to achieve a
vehicle able to offer top levels of safety to
its passengers. However, the behaviour of
the driver is still a decisive factor for road
safety.
Below you will find a few simple rules for
travelling safely under different conditions.
You are certainly familiar with many of them
but it is still helpful to read them all carefully.
BEFORE DRIVING OFF
– Make sure the lights and headlights are
working properly.
– Adjust the seat, steering wheel and
rearview mirrors, in order to obtain a correct
position for driving.
– Adjust the seat back upright and keep
your head as close as possible to the head
restraint.
192
– Carefully adjust the headrests so that
the head and not the neck rests on them.
Check that nothing (mats, etc.) can get under the foot pedals.
– Make sure that any child restraint system (seats, cradles, etc.) are correctly fastened on the rear seat.
– Place any objects in the boot with care
to prevent abrupt braking from throwing
them forwards.
– Avoid heavy meals before a journey. A
light meal will help to keep reflexes ready.
Above all avoid alcohol.
Routinely remember to check:
WHEN TRAVELLING
– The first rule for safe driving is care.
– Care also means being able to predict
the actions of other road users.
– Strictly respect the traffic regulations in
all countries, especially the speed limits.
– Ensure that both yourself and your passengers are wearing their seat belts, that
children are carried with the appropriate
seats and that any animals are in appropriate compartments.
– Long distances should be trackled in
good health.
– tyre pressure and conditions;
– engine oil level;
– engine coolant level and system conditions;
– brake fluid level;
– power steering oil level;
– windscreen washer fluid level.
WARNING
Driving under the influence
of drugs and/or some
medicines is highly dangerous for
oneself and for others.
WARNING
Make sure any mats are
appropriate in size: even a
slight inconvenience to the braking
system may require a higher pedal
stroke than normal.
NIGHT DRIVING
Here are some suggestions for night driving.
– Drive with particular care: night driving
involves a greater degree of concentration.
– Reduce speed, especially on unlit roads.
– At the first signs of drowsiness stop the
car: continuing the journey is dangerous for
yourself and others. Continue driving only
after sufficient rest.
WARNING
Take care when fitting additional spoilers, alloy
wheels and wheel caps: they might
reduce ventilation of the brakes,
thus their efficiency, during abrupt
and repeated braking, or long
downhill slopes.
WARNING
Never drive with objects
on the floor in front of the
driver’s seat: they might get stuck
under the pedals making it impossible to accelerate or brake.
WARNING
Water, ice and salt on the
roads may deposit on the
brake discs, reducing the effectiveness of the brakes the first
time they are used.
– Do not drive for long periods without a
break. During breaks get out of the vehicle
and move around a bit to shake off the
drowsiness.
– Make sure the air in the passenger compartment is changed constantly.
– Never coast the vehicle downhill with
the engine switched off as this eliminates
the engine braking and power steering effect thus requiring a greater effort on the
pedal and steering wheel.
CORRECT USE OF THE CAR
WARNING
Always fasten the front
and rear seat belts including those of any child’s seat. Travelling without seat belts increases
the risks of serious injury or even
death in the event of an accident.
– Maintain a greater distance from the vehicle in front than in the day: it is more difficult to judge the speed of the vehicle when
only the lights can be seen.
– Ensure that the headlights are correctly
aligned: if they are too low, visibility is reduced and eyesight is tired. If they are too
high they may cause disturbance to other
road users.
– Use the main beams only outside builtup areas and only when you are certain that
other drivers are not disturbed by their use.
– When meeting vehicles coming in the
opposite direction, switch off the main
beams and drive with the dipped-beam
headlights on.
– Keep headlights and lights clean.
– Outside built-up areas take care of animal crossings.
193
CORRECT USE OF THE CAR
DRIVING IN THE RAIN
Rain and wet roads can be dangerous.
If the road is wet, the traction between
wheel and asphalt is greatly reduced, thus
increasing the stopping distance and decreasing road holding.
Here are few suggestions in the case of
rain:
– Reduce speed and keep further back
from the vehicle in front.
– If it is raining particularly heavily, visibility is also reduced. In these cases, switch
on the dipped headlights even if it is still daylight so you can be seen more easily.
– Do not drive through puddles at speed
and hold on tightly to the wheel if you do: a
puddle taken at high speed might cause you
to lose control of the car (“aquaplaning”).
– Position the ventilation controls for
demisting (see chapter “Getting to know
your car”), to prevent visibility from worsening.
– Routinely check the conditions of the
windscreen wiper blades.
194
DRIVING IN THE FOG
MOUNTAIN DRIVING
– If fog is very thick, avoid travelling
where possible. If travelling with mist,
ground fog or the possibility of fog banks:
– When driving downhill, use the engine
braking by engaging a low gear, to prevent
the brakes from overheating.
– Drive at moderate speed.
– Also in the day turn on the dipped-beam
headlights, rear fog guards and front fog
lights. Do not use the main beam headlights.
WARNING On stretches of road with
good visibility, switch off your rear foglights;
the brightness of these lights could annoy
the people travelling in the cars behind.
– Remember that fog also involves wet
asphalt, thus greater difficulty in all types of
manoeuvres and longer stopping distances.
– Keep well away from the vehicle in
front.
– Where possible avoid sudden changes
in speed.
– Possibly avoid overtaking other vehicles.
– If the vehicle is forced to stop (faults,
impossibility to continue due to poor visibility, etc.), firstly try to pull off the road.
Then turn on the hazard warning lights and,
if possible the dipped beam headlights. Rythmically sound the horn if you note another
car coming.
– Never coast downhill with the engine off
or in neutral and especially not with the ignition key removed.
– Drive at moderate speed and avoid “cutting” corners.
– Remember that overtaking up hill is
slower and therefore requires a greater
length of clear road. If you are being overtaken on a hill, move over to enable the
other vehicle to pass in safety.
DRIVING WITH ABS
Here are few suggestions for driving in
these conditions:
The ABS is a part of the braking system
which essentially offers two advantages:
– Keep your speed down.
– On a snowy road, fit winter tyres or
snow chains; see the related paragraphs in
this section.
– Use exhaust brake where possible and
avoid abrupt braking.
– Avoid abrupt acceleration and changes
of direction.
– During cold weather even apparently dry
roads may be covered with occasional
patches of ice. Pay great attention therefore
when driving on roads which are in the
shade, or where rocks or trees line the road
and on which ice may persist.
– Keep further back from the vehicle in
front.
1) It prevents wheel lock-up and consequent skidding in emergency stops, particularly when the road does not offer much
grip;
2) It makes it possible to brake and steer
at the same time so you can avoid unexpected obstacles and direct the car where
you want while braking. The extent to which
this can be done will depend on the physical limits of the tyre’s sideways grip.
To make the most of the ABS:
– In emergency braking or when grip is
low, a slight pulsing can be felt on the brake
pedal: this means that the ABS has come
into action. Do not release the pedal, but
continue pressing it to give continuity to the
braking action.
– The ABS prevents the wheels from locking but it does not increase the physical limits of grip between the asphalt and the road.
Therefore, also with a car fitted with ABS,
keep within a safety distance from the vehicle in front and limit speed when approaching bends.
REDUCING RUNNING
COSTS AND
ENVIRONMENT
POLLUTION
Some suggestions which may help you to
keep the running costs of your vehicle down
and lower the amount of toxic emissions released into the atmosphere are given below.
CORRECT USE OF THE CAR
DRIVING ON SNOW AND ICE
GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS
Vehicle maintenance
The overalll state of the vehicle is an important factor which has a marked influence
over fuel consumption and driving comfort
and on the life span of your vehicle. For this
reason care should be taken to maintain
your vehicle by carrying out the necessary
checks and regulations in accordance with
specifications given in the “Scheduled Maintenance Programme” (see sections... spark
plugs, air cleaner, timing).
The ABS serves to increase car controllabilty not to go faster.
195
CORRECT USE OF THE CAR
Tyres
Electrical devices
Tyres should be checked at least every four
4 weeks: if the pressure is too low, fuel consumption increases as the resistance to the
rolling movement of the tyre is higher. In
this state, tyre wear is increased
and vehicle handling suffers which will affect safety.
Use the electric devices for the necessary
time only. The heated rear window, supplementary lights, windscreen wipers, heating
system blower require large amounts of energy and, increasing the request for power
also increases fuel consumption (up to
+25% when driving in built-up areas).
Unnecessary loads
Air conditioner
Do not travel with too much luggage stowed
in the boot. The weight of the vehicle (especially when driving in town) and its trim
greatly affects consumption and stability.
The air conditioner is an additional load
which greatly affects the engine leading to
higher consumption (on average up to
+20%). When the temperature outside the
vehicle permits it, use the air vents where
possible.
Luggage/ski rack
Remove luggage or ski racks from the roof
of the vehicle as soon as they are no longer
needed. These accessories reduce the aerodynamic penetration of the vehicle and will
increase consumption. When transporting
particularly large objects, use a trailer where
possible.
196
Spoilers
The use of aerodynamic optional extras
which are not certified for the specific use
on the vehicle, may reduce the aerodynamic
penetration of the vehicle and increase consumption.
STYLE OF DRIVING
Starting
Do not warm the engine when the vehicle
is stationary or at high or low revs: in this
way the engine will warm up gradually increasing consumption and emissions. You
should drive off slowly straight away avoiding high revs so that the engine will warm
up more quickly.
Unnecessary actions
Avoid revving the engine when stopped at
traffic lights or before switching off the engine and avoid doubling the clutch as these
actions have no purpose on modern vehicles
and serve only to increase consumption and
pollution.
Gear selection
As soon as the traffic and road conditions
allow it, shift to a higher gear. Using a lower
gear to liven up acceleration greatly increases consumption. In the same way, improper use of the higher gears will increase
consumption, emissions and wear and tear
on the engine.
Fuel consumption increases considerably
as speed increases. For example, when accelerating from 90 to 120 kph, fuel consumption increases by about +30%. Your
speed should be kept as even as possible
and superfluous braking and acceleration
avoided as this increases both consumption
and emissions. A “soft” way of driving
should be adopted by attempting to anticipate manoeuvres to avoid imminent danger
and to keep a safe distance from the vehicle in front in order to avoid braking sharply.
Acceleration
Accelerating violently increasing the revs
will greatly affect consumption and emissions: acceleration should be gradual and
should not exceed the maximum torque.
CONDITIONS OF USE
Cold starting
Short journeys and frequent cold starting
will not enable the engine to reach optimal
running temperature. It follows therefore
that consumption will be higher (from +15%
to +30% in built-up areas) as will the production of toxic emissions.
Traffic and road conditions
Heavy traffic and higher consumption are
synonymous; for example, when driving
slowly with frequent use of lower gears or
in large towns where there are numerous
traffic lights.
Winding roads, mountain roads and
bumpy roads also have a negative effect on
consumption.
Enforced halts
During prolonged hold-ups (traffic lights,
level crossings) the engine should be
switched off.
ECONOMY AND
ENVIRONMENTFRIENDLY DRIVING
Environment protection is one of the principles that guided the development of your
Alfa 156.
It is not merely by chance that its antipollution devices obtain results far beyond those
specified by current regulations.
CORRECT USE OF THE CAR
Top speeds
The environment, however, still needs the
utmost care from all of us.
By following few simple rules it is possible
to avoid damage to the environment and
very often at the same time to limit fuel consumption. On this subject we are giving
some helpful suggestions to be added to
those marked with the #, in various points
of this manual.
Kindly read them all carefully.
197
CORRECT USE OF THE CAR
PROTECTING EMISSION
REDUCING DEVICES
Correct operation of the antipollution devices not only guarantees respect for the environment but also influences car performance. Keeping these devices in good condition is therefore the first rule for both environment-friendly and economy driving.
The first precaution is to closely follow the
“Scheduled Maintenance Programme ”. For
petrol engines only use unleaded petrol (95
RON) (specification EN228), for diesel engines only use fuel oil for motor vehicles
(specification EN590).
If difficulty with starting is experienced do
not insist with extended attempts. Especially
avoid bump, tow or coast starts: these may
all damage the catalyst. Only use an auxiliary battery to start the car in an emergency.
If the engine is “not running smoothly”
when the vehicle is travelling, reduce the request for performance to a minimum and
contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services as
soon as possible.
When the fuel reserve warning light comes
on fill up as soon as possible. A low fuel level
may cause an irregular supply to the engine
with inevitable increase of the exhaust gas
temperature; this would result in serious
damage to the catalyst.
Never run the engine, even as a test, with
one or more spark plugs disconnected. Do
not warm the engine at idle speed before
moving off, unless the outside temperature
is very low and, in this case too, for no more
than 30 seconds.
WARNING
Do not install other heat
guards and do not remove
the existing ones on the catalyst
and exhaust pipe.
198
WARNING
Do not spray anything on
the catalyst, lambda sensor and exhaust pipe.
WARNING
During normal service the
catalyst reaches high temperatures. Do not therefore park
the car over inflammable materials
(grass, dry leaves, pine needles,
etc.): fire hazard.
WARNING
The failure to follow these
rules may cause a fire
hazard.
WARNINGS AND
SUGGESTIONS
For towing caravans or trailers the vehicle must be fitted with a certified tow hook
and an adequate electric system. Installation should be carried out by specialised personnel who release a special document for
circulation on the road.
Install any specific and/or additional rearview mirrors as specified by law. Remember
that when towing a trailer, steep hills are
harder to climb, the braking spaces increase
and overtaking takes longer depending on
the overall weight.
To make sure the maximum towable
weight is not exceeded (given in the log
book) account should be taken of the fully
laden trailer, including accessories and personal belongings.
Drive within the permitted speed limits for
vehicles with trailers. In any case the maximum speed should never exceed 100 km/h.
WARNING
The ABS system with
which the car may be fitted
does not control the trailer braking
system. Particular care is therefore
necessary on slippery surfaces.
INSTALLING THE TOW HOOK
The towing device should be fastened to
the body by specialised personnel according
to the following instructions and any additional and/or integrative information supplied by the Manufacturer of the device.
The towing device must meet current regulations with reference to 94/20/EC Directive and subsequent amendments.
For any version the towing device used
must match the towable weight of the vehicle on which it is to be installed.
CORRECT USE OF THE CAR
TOWING TRAILERS
For the electric connection a unified connector should be used which is generally
placed on a special bracket normally fastened to the towing device.
Engage a low gear when driving downhill,
rather than constantly using the brake.
The weight the trailer exerts on the vehicle tow hook reduces by the same amount
the actual vehicle loading capacity.
WARNING
Under no circumstances
should the vehicle brake
system be altered to control the
trailer brake. The trailer braking
system must be fully independent
of the vehicle’s hydraulic system.
199
CORRECT USE OF THE CAR
For the electrical connection, a 7 pin
12VDC connection is to be used
(CUNA/UNI - 9128 Standard). Follow the
instructions provided by the car manufacturer and/or the tow hitch manufacturer.
An electric brake should be supplied directly
by the battery through a cable with a cross
section of no less than 2.5 mm2. In addition
to the electrical branches, the car’s electric
system can only be connected to the supply
cable for an electric brake and to the cable
for an internal light, though not above 15W.
INSTALLATION LAYOUT (fig. 1)
The tow hook structure must be fastened
in the points shown by the symbol Ø using 4 M8 screws and 7 M10 screws.
Inner plate (2) should be at least 6 mm
thick.
MAX. LOAD ON BALL 60 kg
Inner plate (3) should be at least 4 mm
thick.
Outer plate (4) should be at least 5 mm
thick.
The fastening points (1) must be fitted
with spacers with 25 mm diameter and 6
mm thickness.
200
WARNING It is compulsory to fasten a
label (clearly visible) of suitable size and
material at the height of the hook ball with
the wording:
WARNING
After assembly, the fastening screw holes should
be sealed to prevent the infiltration of exhaust gas.
Existing holes
Existing holes
Section A-A
Fully laden vehicle
Existing holes
CORRECT USE OF THE CAR
A0B0143m
2 M10 screws
3 M10 screws
2 M10 screws
4 M8 screws
Regulation ball
fig. 1
201
CORRECT USE OF THE CAR
WINTER TYRES
It is therefore necessary to limit their use
to the purposes for which they are certified.
SNOW CHAINS
These tyres are specially designed for driving on snow and ice, to be fitted in place
of the existing tyres.
WARNING When snow tyres are used
with a max. speed index below the one that
can be reached by the car (increased by
5%), place a notice in the passenger compartment, plainly in the driver’s view which
states the max. permissible speed of the
snow tyres (as per EC Directive).
Use of snow chains should be in compliance with local regulations.
Use snow tyres of the same size as the
normal tyres provided with the car.
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services will be
glad to provide advice concerning the most
suitable type of tyre for the customer’s requirements.
For the type of tyre to be used, inflation
pressures and the specifications of snow
tyres, follow the instructions given in chapter “Technical Specifications”.
The winter features of these tyres are reduced considerably when the tread depth
is below 4 mm. In this case, they should be
replaced. Due to the snow tyre features, under normal conditions of use or on long motorway journeys, the performance of these
tyres is lower than that of normal tyres.
202
All four tyres should be the same (brand
and track) to ensure greater safety when
driving and braking and better driveability.
Remember that it is inappropriate to
change the direction of rotation of tyres.
Use snow chains with reduced size:
– for tyres 185/65 R15” e 205/60
R15” use snow chains with reduced size
with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 12 mm.
– for tyres 205/55 R16” use snow
chains with reduced size with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 9 mm.
Tyres 215/45 R17” cannot be fitted with snow
chains due to interference
with front suspension support.
WARNING
The max. speed for snow
tyres with “Q” marking is
160 km/h, 190 km/h for tyres
with “T” marking and 210 km/h
for tyres with “H” marking. The
Road Traffic Code speed limits must
however be always strictly observed.
Snow chains should only be applied to the
driving wheels (front wheels).
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services should first
be contacted before purchasing or using
snow chains.
Check the tension of the chains after the
first few metres have been driven.
Keep your speed
down when snow
chains are fitted.
Do not exceed 50 km/h. Avoid
potholes, steps and pavements and
avoid also to drive for long distances on roads not covered with
snow to prevent damaging the car
and the roadbed.
VEHICLE INACTIVITY
– Clean and protect the shiny metal parts
using special compounds readily available.
If the car is to be left inactive for long periods, the following precautions should be
noted:
– Sprinkle talcum powder on the rubber
windscreen and rear window wiper blades
and lift them off the glass.
– House the vehicle under cover in a dry
and possibly ventilated place.
– Engage a gear.
– Check that the handbrake is not engaged.
– Slightly open the windows.
– Cover the car with a cloth or perforated
plastic sheet. Do not use sheets of non-perforated plastic as they do not allow moisture on the car body to evaporate.
– Clean and protect the painted parts using protective wax.
– Inflate the tyres to 0.5 bar above the
normal specified pressure and check it at intervals.
– Disconnect the negative terminal (–)
and check the battery charge. This check is
to be repeated every three months.
Recharge if the optical indicator shows a
dark colour without the central green area.
– If you don’t disconnect the battery from
the electric system, check its charge every
month and recharge it if the optical indicator shows a dark colour without the central
green area.
WARNING Where applicable, switch off
the electronic car alarm with the remote control.
– Do not drain the engine cooling system.
CORRECT USE OF THE CAR
Snow chains cannot be
fitted to the spare wheel
so, if a front (drive) tyre is
punctured and chains must be fitted, the rear wheel should be fitted to the front of the vehicle (inflate the tyres to the specified
pressure as soon as possible) and
the spare tyre should be fitted to
the rear. A snow chain can then be
safely fitted to the front wheel.
203
CORRECT USE OF THE CAR
REMOVING FROM STORAGE
– Check the state of the drive belts.
Before using your vehicle after a long period of inactivity, the following operations
should first be carried out:
– Reconnect the battery negative terminal (–) after checking that the charge is adequate.
– Do not dust the outside of the vehicle.
– With the gear lever in neutral start the
engine and allow the engine to run for a few
seconds whilst repeatedly working the clutch
pedal.
– Visually check that there are no leaks
(oil, brake and clutch fluid, engine coolant,
etc.).
– Check the air cleaner and replace if necessary.
– Check tyre pressure and ensure that they
are not damaged, cracked or cut. If they are
they must be replaced.
In addition to the legal requirements, we
recommend keeping the following in the car
(fig. 1):
– first aid kit with non-alcoholic base disinfectant, steril gauzes, a roll of gauze, plasters, etc.;
– torch;
– Replace engine oil and filter.
– Check:
- brake-clutch fluid level
- level of engine coolant fluid.
USEFUL ACCESSORIES
WARNING
This operation must be performed in the open. The
exhaust gases contain carbon
monoxide which is extremely toxic
and may also be lethal.
– round-ended scissors;
– work gloves.
A0B0389m
204
fig. 1
EMERGENCY
STARTING
If the Alfa Romeo CODE system is not able
to deactivate the engine inhibitor, warning
lights Y and U remain lit and the engine
cannot be started. To start the engine it is
necessary to follow the emergency starting
procedure.
WARNING You are advised to carefully read the entire procedure before carrying it out.
3) Fully depress the accelerator pedal and
keep it pressed. The warning light U will
come on for eight seconds approximately
and will then go out; now release the accelerator pedal.
4) The warning light U begins to flash:
after it has flashed for the same number of
times as the first digit on the code of the
card, press completely and hold down the
accelerator pedal until the warning light U
comes on (for 4 seconds) and then goes out
again; now release the accelerator pedal.
If a mistake is made during the emergency
procedure, the ignition key should be turned
to STOP and the operations must be repeated from the start (point 1).
5) The warning light U will begin to
flash: after it has flashed for the same number of times as the second digit on the code
of the card, press completely and hold down
the accelerator pedal.
1) Read the 5-figure electronic code on
the CODE card.
6) Repeat this procedure in the same way
for the other digits on the CODE card code.
2) Turn the ignition key to the MAR position.
7) After entering the last figure, keep the
accelerator pedal pressed. The warning light
U turns on (for four seconds) and then goes
off; now release the accelerator pedal.
8) A quick flash of the warning light U
(for appr. 4 seconds) confirms that the operation has taken place correctly.
9) Start the car turning the ignition key
from the MAR position to the AVV position without returning the key to the STOP
position.
IN AN EMERGENCY
IN AN EMERGENCY
Conversely, if the warning light U stays
on, turn the ignition key to STOP and repeat the procedure starting from point 1.
WARNING After emergency starting it
is advisable to turn to an Alfa Romeo Authorized Service, because the procedure described must be repeated each time the engine is started.
205
IN AN EMERGENCY
STARTING WITH AN
AUXILIARY BATTERY
If the battery is flat (for battery with optical hydrometer: dark in colour with no
green area in the centre), the engine can be
started using another battery of the same
or a little higher capacity than the flat one.
This is what you should do fig. 1:
1) Remove the protecting cover on the
battery positive pole by pressing the related
side wings (front side), then connect the
positive terminals (plus sign + next to the
terminal) of the two batteries with a special
cable.
WARNING Do not directly connect the
negative terminals of the two batteries: any
sparks may set fire to the gas that may be
released from the battery. If the auxiliary battery in installed on another car, no metal part
shall accidentally come into contact with this
car and the one with the flat battery.
3) Start the engine.
4) When the engine is running remove the
cables in reverse order.
If after a few attempts the engine does not
start, do not insist but contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.
2) Connect a second cable to the negative
terminal (–) of the auxiliary battery with
an earth point E on the engine or the gearbox of the car to be started.
A0B0181m
206
fig. 1
Never use a quick battery
charger to start the engine
in an emergency as this
could damage the electronic systems of your vehicle, particularly
the control units which manage the
starting and supply functions.
WARNING
This starting procedure
must be carried out by
qualified personnel as incorrect operations may provoke electrical
discharge of great intensity. The
liquid contained in the battery is
toxic and corrosive. Avoid contact
with skin and eyes. Keep naked
flame and lighted cigarettes away
from the battery. Do not cause
sparks.
The battery terminal connecting and disconnecting
operations generate current that may cause problems to
the car’s electronic systems. Therefore, this operation should be carried out by skilled personnel.
Never push, tow or coast
start the vehicle. This could
cause fuel to flow into the
catalyst damaging it irreversibly.
IN THE EVENT OF A
PUNCTURE
WARNING If the car is equipped with
“Fix&Go kit for tyre quick repair”, see the
instructions contained in the following
chapter.
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
Wheel changing and correct use of the jack
and compact spare wheel call for some precautions as mentioned below.
WARNING
Remember that the engine
brake and power steering
are not operational until the engine
is started, therefore, much greater
effort than usual is needed on the
brake pedal and steering wheel.
WARNING
Signal the presence of the
stationary vehicle according to the current regulations: hazard warning lights, reflecting triangle, etc.
Any passengers should leave the
car and wait for the wheel to be
changed out of harm of the traffic.
If parked on a slope or uneven road
surfaces, place wedges or other
suitable devices under the wheels
to prevent the car from rolling.
Never start the engine when the
car is raised on the jack.
When towing a trailer, always
remove the trailer before lifting
the car.
IN AN EMERGENCY
STARTING BY INERTIA
207
IN AN EMERGENCY
208
WARNING
The spare wheel (for versions/markets where required) is specific to your model of
car; do not use it on other models,
or use the spare wheel of other
models on your car.
Should the type of wheels used be
changed (alloy rims instead of
steel), it is also necessary to replace the complete kit of fastening
bolts with others of suitable size.
The compact spare wheel should
only be used in an emergency and
even then its use should be kept to
a minimum. Do not drive at speeds
of over 80 km/h.
WARNING
On the compact spare
wheel there a sticker with
the main warnings regarding the
compact spare wheel use and limitations. The sticker shall never be
removed or covered. The sticker
bears the following instructions in
four languages:
ATTENTION! ONLY FOR TEMPORARY USE! 80 km/h MAX! REPLACE IT AS SOON AS POSSIBLE
WITH A STANDARD WHEEL. DO
NOT COVER THIS INDICATION.
No wheel cap shall be placed on
the compact spare wheel.
The car will handle differently
when the spare wheel is fitted.
Avoid sudden acceleration or braking, sharp corners and fast bends.
WARNING
The life of the spare wheel
is approx. 3,000 km. After
this distance it should be replaced
with another of the same type.
Never attempt to fit a traditional tyre to a rim designed for use as
compact spare wheel. Have the
punctured wheel repaired and replaced as soon as possible.
Two or more compact spare
wheels should never be used together.
Do not grease the threads of the
bolts before installing them; they
might slip out.
The jack only serves for changing wheels on the car with which it
is provided or on cars of the same
model. It must not be used for other purposes such as for instance
raising cars of other models. In no
case should it be used for repairs
under the vehicle.
The vehicle may fall if the jack is
not positioned correctly.
Do not use the jack for higher capacities than stated on its label.
CHANGING A WHEEL
(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
– Stop the engine and engage the handbrake.
– Engage first gear or reverse.
– Lift the boot carpet and hook it as shown
in (fig. 1a).
You are informed that:
– The jack mass is 2,100 kg.
– Loosen the clamping device (handle)
(A-fig. 2).
– The jack requires no adjustment.
– The jack cannot be repaired, in the event
of breakage it must be replaced by another original one.
IN AN EMERGENCY
WARNING
Snow chains cannot be fitted to the compact spare
wheel, so, if a front wheel is punctured and chains need to be used,
the front axle should be fitted with
normal wheels and the spare
wheel fitted to the rear. In this
way, as two normal tyres are fitted to the front of the vehicle,
snow chains can be mounted,
thereby overcoming an emergency.
Absolutely never tamper with the
inflation valve.
Do not insert tools of any kind between the rim and the tyre.
Routinely check that the pressure
of the tyres and of the compact
spare wheel is as specified in the
“Technical specifications” chapter.
A0B0234m
– No tools other than its operating crank
can be fitted to the jack.
To change the wheel proceed as follows:
– Stop the car in such a position that it is
not dangerous for the traffic, where it is possible to change the wheel safely. Where possible, park on a level, compact surface.
A0B0577m
fig. 1a
fig. 2
209
IN AN EMERGENCY
– Take out the tool container (B) and take
it near the wheel to be changed.
– Take the spare wheel (C).
– Remove the wheel cap (A-fig. 3) (for
versions wuth steel rims only).
– Loosen the fastening bolts by approx.
one turn (B-fig. 4).
– Place the jack under the car near the
wheel to be changed.
– Work the jack crank (A-fig. 5)to extend it until the groove (B-fig. 6) on the
upper part of the jack is correctly inserted
on the lower profile of the body (C-fig. 6)
at about 40 cm from the profile of the
wheelhouse.
– Install the spare wheel by matching one
of the holes (A-fig. 7) with the corresponding pin (B-fig. 7).
– Tighten the five fastening bolts.
– Lower the car and remove the jack.
– Work the jack and raise the car until the
wheel is a few centimetres from the ground.
A0B0229m
A0B0232m
– Completely unscrew the bolts (Bfig. 4), and remove the wheel.
– Make sure that the contact surfaces of
the compact spare wheel with the hub are
clean and free of impurities which may latter cause the fastening bolts to slacken.
fig. 3
fig. 6
A0B0230m
210
fig. 4
A0B0231m
fig. 5
A0B0226m
fig. 7
REFITTING A NORMAL WHEEL
– Following the procedure described previously, raise the car and remove the spare
wheel.
For versions with steel rims:
– Fit a normal wheel bearing in mind that
the pin (B-fig.7) must match one of the
holes (A-fig.7).
– Make sure that the contact surfaces of
the compact spare wheel with the hub are
clean and free of impurities which may latter cause the fastening bolts to slacken.
– Screw the fastening bolts.
– Tighten the bolts following the order previously described for the compact spare
wheel fig. 7.
– Place the cap near the wheel so that the
inflating valve can come out through the
countersunk hole. Press the wheel circumference starting from the area next to the
valve countersunk hole until it is completely inserted.
For cars with alloy rims:
After refitting the wheel:
– stow the spare wheel in the space provided in the luggage compartment;
– insert the jack in its container forcing it
lightly to prevent it from vibrating during
travelling;
– place the tools used in the housings provided on the support;
IN AN EMERGENCY
– Fully tighten the bolts in the sequence
shown in fig. 8, without refitting the cap.
– place the tool container on the spare
wheel and secure everything with the clamping device (A-fig. 2).
– Tighten the pin (A-fig. 9) in one of
the fastening bolt holes.
– Fit the wheel on the pin and fasten it
with four bolts.
– Remove the centering pin (A-fig. 9)
and tighten the last bolt.
A0B0227m
– Lower the car and remove the jack; then
tighten the bolts as described previously for
the spare wheel (fig. 7).
A0B0228m
WARNING Incorrect fitting might cause
the wheel cap to come off when the car is
on the move.
fig. 8
fig. 9
211
IN AN EMERGENCY
FIX&GO KIT
FOR QUICK TYRE
REPAIRING
The quick repairing kit is placed in the boot
inside the appropriate container A-fig. 10.
The quick repairing kit includes fig. 11:
• a tool A to remove the valve body;
(for versions/markets where
applicable)
The car can be equipped (for versions/
markets where applicable) with a tyre quick
repairing kit called FIX&GO, replacing the
tools and the compact spare wheel usually
provided with the car.
• a compressor B with pressure gauge and
fittings;
A0B0390m
212
fig. 10
A0B0332m
fig. 11
• a small cylinder C containing sealer and
fitted with a filling pipe, and a sticker bearing the notice “max 80 km/h”, to be
placed in a position visible to the driver (on
the instrument panel) after fixing the tyre;
• a “spout” D to be connected to the filling pipe.
In fig. 12 it is possible to identify:
A tyre area which can be fixed (holes or
cracks with diameter of max 4 mm);
B areas which CANNOT be fixed.
A0B0333m
WARNING
It is not possible to fix
cracks on the tyre sides
and permanent sealing of cracks on
the tread within 25 mm from the
tyre side is not guaranteed.
WARNING
Do not use the quick repairing kit if the tyre is
damaged due to driving with the
wheel flattened. That it is why it
is necessary to check accurately the
tyre sides.
fig. 12
WARNING
In case of damages to the
wheel rim (the deformation
is such that there is an air leakage)
or the tyre outside the limit areas
previously indicated, fixing is not
possible. Do not remove foreign
bodies (screws or nails) which have
penetrated the tyre.
IN AN EMERGENCY
WARNING In the event of a puncture
caused by foreign bodies, it is possible to fix
tyres having cracks with maximum diameter up to 4 mm.
WARNING
Warning! The small cylinder contains propylene glycol; this substance is toxic: do not
swallow it; avoid contact with the
eyes, the skin and the clothes. In
case of contact, rinse with abundant water. If any allergy reaction
should take place call a medical
doctor. Keep the small cylinder in
the appropriate compartment
away from heat and children.
213
IN AN EMERGENCY
IT IS NECESSARY TO KNOW
THAT:
WARNING
Do not operate the compressor for more than 20
minutes. Risk of overheating.
The sealer included in the quick repairing
kit, good for temperatures between –30°C
e +80°C, is not adequate for permanent
fixing.
The liquid inside the tyre can be easily removed with water.
The sealer has no expire date.
INFLATING PROCEDURE
1) Place the wheel in the position illustrated in the figure (A-fig. 13) for the operation with the valve, then engage the
handbrake.
2) Screw the filling pipe (B-fig. 14) to
the bottle (C).
3) Unscrew the tyre valve plug, remove
the element inside the valve by using the
appropriate tool (D-fig. 15); be careful
not to place it on the sand or on a dirty surface .
4) Introduce the filling pipe (B-fig. 16)
in the tyre valve, keep the bottle (C-fig.
16) with the pipe directed downwards, then
press it so that the whole sealer can get into the tyre.
5) Screw again the element inside the
valve with the tool (D-fig. 17).
6) Use the appropriate lever (E-fig. 18)
to insert and clamp the air compressor pipe
(F) to the tyre valve.
7) Start the engine, insert the plug (Gfig. 19) in the lighter (or socket 12V) and
inflate the tyre according to the right pressure value (see “Cold inflation pressures” in
the “Technical specification” chapter). You
are advised to check the tyre pressure value on the pressure gauge (H-fig. 18) with
the compressor off, in order to have a more
accurate reading.
A0B0334m
214
fig. 13
A0B335m
fig. 14
If, in spite of the last operation, the prescribed pressure is not achieved, do not
move the vehicle and contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.
Once the correct tyre pressure has been
reached, start driving immediately so that
the sealer is distributed evenly inside the
tyre.
WARNING
Place the sticker in a position where it can be clearly seen by the driver as a notice
that the tyre has been treated with
the quick repairing kit. Drive carefully especially in a bend. Do not
overcome 80 km/h. Avoid sudden
acceleration or braking.
After about 10 minutes, stop and check
the tyre pressure once again; remember to
engage the handbrake.
A0B0336m
fig. 15
WARNING
If the pressure is below
1,3 bars, do not drive any
further; FIX & GO cannot guarantee proper hold because the tyre is
too much damaged. Contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services.
Conversely, if at least 1,3 bars are
detected, restore the correct pressure (with the engine running and
the handbrake engaged) and start
driving the car with great care.
IN AN EMERGENCY
If it is not possible to reach the prescribed
pressure, move the car forwards or backwards for about 10 metres, so that the sealer is distributed inside the tyre, then repeat
inflation.
A0B0337m
fig. 16
215
IN AN EMERGENCY
WARNING
If, during the pressure
restoring operation, it is
not possible to reach at least 1,8
bars, do not drive any further because the tyre is too much damaged and the quick repairing kit
cannot guarantee proper hold. Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
WARNING
Tyres fixed with the quick
repairing kit must be used
only temporarily.
A0B0338m
216
fig. 17
Drive carefully to the nearest Alfa Romeo
Authorized Service to check the tyre conditions, then have it fixed or replaced.
It is absolutely necessary to communicate
that the tyre has been fixed with the quick
repairing kit.
A0B0339m
fig. 18
A0B0391m
fig. 19
WARNING
Alterations or repairs to
the electric system not carried out correctly and without taking into account the specifications
of the system may cause malfunctioning and the risk of fire.
WARNING
Where possible the bulbs
should be replaced by Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services. The
correct operation and positioning
of the external lights are vital to
the safety of the vehicle and its
passengers and the subject of specific laws.
WARNING
Halogen bulbs must be
handled touching only the
metallic part. If the transparent
bulb is touched with the fingers its
lighting intensity is reduced and the
life of the bulb may be compromised. If touched accidentally, rub
the bulb with a cloth moistened
with methylated spirits and allow
to dry.
WARNING
Possible replacement of a
light on vehicles equipped
with Xeno lamps must be carried
out by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
IN AN EMERGENCY
WHEN NEEDING TO CHANGE A BULB
WARNING
Halogen bulbs contain
pressurised gas, in the case
of breakage they may burst.
217
IN AN EMERGENCY
GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
TYPES OF BULBS (fig. 20)
– When a light is not working check the
corresponding fuse is intact before replacing
the bulb.
Various types of bulbs are fitted to your vehicle:
– For the location of fuses, refer to the
paragraph “In the event of a burnt fuse”
in this chapter.
All glass bulbs
They are pressure-fitted. Pull to remove.
B.
Bayonet type bulbs
Press the bulb, turn counter-clockwise
to remove this type of bulb from its
holder.
C.
Tubular bulbs
Free them from their contacts to remove.
– Before changing a bulb check the contacts for oxidation.
– Burnt bulbs must be replaced with others of the same type and power.
– Always check the height of the headlight
beam after changing a bulb to ensure they
are safe.
218
A.
D.
Halogen bulbs
To remove free it from the clip on its
seating.
A0B0233m
fig. 20
FIGURE 20
TYPE
POWER
High beam
D
H1
55W
Low beam
D
H7
55W
Front sidelight
B
H6W
6W
Foglight (where required)
D
H1
55W
Front direction indicator
B
PY21W
21W
Side direction indicator
A
W5W
5W
Rear direction indicator
B
P21W
21W
Stop/side light
B
P21/5W
21W/5W
Additional stop light
B
3.2W
3.2
Reversing light
A
P21W
21W
Rear fog guard
B
P21W
21W
Number plate light
B
W5W
5W
Front roof light
A
C10W
10W
Boot light
C
C10W
10W
Rear roof light
C
C5W
5W
Courtesy light (where required)
C
C5W
5W
Glovebox light
C
C5W
5W
IN AN EMERGENCY
BULBS
219
IN AN EMERGENCY
IF ONE OF THE
EXTERNAL LIGHTS
GOES OUT
WARNING
Alterations or repairs to
the electric system not carried out correctly and without taking into account the specifications
of the system may cause malfunctioning and the risk of fire.
FRONT LIGHT UNITS
The front light units contain the direction
indicators, side lights/dipped and main
beam light bulbs.
When the bulbs have
been replaced refit the cover in the correct position
turning clockwise and ensuring that
it clicks into place.
To replace these bulbs the cover must be
removed turning counter-clockwise.
The bulbs are arranged inside the light
units as follows (fig. 21):
A. Direction indicators
Fig. 22: Dipped beam headlights with
Xeno lamp
B. Dipped beam headlights
A. Sidelight/main beam headlights
C. Sidelight/main beam headlights.
B. Dipped beam headlights/sidelight.
WARNING For the type and power of
the light refer to what described in the previous chapter “If one of the lights needs to
be replaced”.
A0B0224m
220
fig. 21
A0B0392m
fig. 22
Xenon lights have a very long life, therefore breakdowns are unlikely.
WARNING
If necessary, have the system checked and repaired
only by Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.
WARNING
Any operation regarding
the front light units must
be carried out with the lights
turned off and the ignition key removed from the ignition switch:
risk of electric discharges.
– Rotate the connector (B-fig. 24) of
the Xenon lamp by a quarter of a turn
counter-clockwise, as indicated in fig. 25,
and remove it.
Dipped-beam headlamps
IN AN EMERGENCY
REPLACEMENT OF XENON
LIGHTS (optional for versions/
markets where applicable)
A0B0349m
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
– Unscrew the three locking screw (Bfig. 23) and remove the protective (A)
cover.
Hereafter you find the description of the
correct procedure to replace a Xenon light.
fig. 24
A0B0348m
fig. 23
A0B0351m
fig. 25
221
IN AN EMERGENCY
The Xenon lamp must be
handled touching only the
metallic part. If the transparent bulb is touched with the fingers, rub it with a clean cloth
moistened with methylated spirits and allow to dry before refitting the bulb.
– Turn ring (A-fig. 26) counter-clockwise and remove it.
– Remove the Xenon lamp (B-fig. 26).
– Fit the new bulb by placing it so that the
notch matches the groove on its housing.
– Refit the protective cover correctly
(A-fig. 23).
Main beam headlamps
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
– Turn the protective cover counter-clockwise (C-fig. 23) in order to reach the highbeam headlight bulb (A-fig. 24).
– Remove connector (A-fig. 27) and remove the bulb operating the clips (B) as
shown in the figure.
– Fit the new bulb.
– Refit the protective cover correctly (Cfig. 23).
WARNING Once the operation has been
completed, turn dipped beam headlamps on
and check that the headlight parabola
moves when positioning the light itself. If
not, re-engage the lamp.
A0B0352m
222
fig. 26
A0B0350m
fig. 27
A0B0354m
fig. 28
Sidelights
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
– Turn the cover counter-clockwise
(A-fig. 29).
– Turn the protective cover (C-fig. 23)
counter-clockwise in order to reach the sidelight bulb.
– Turn the bulb holder (B) counter-clockwise.
– Remove the bulb from the bulb holder,
pushing lightly and turning counter-clockwise.
– Replace the bulb and refit the bulb holder in its housing.
– Remove the bulb (A-fig. 28) from the
bulb holder (B), pushing lightly and turning
counter-clockwise.
– Replace the bulb and refit the bulb holder (B-fig. 28) in its housing.
FRONT DIRECTION
INDICATORS
To replace the bulb (orange colour), proceed as follows:
– Turn the bulb holder counter-clockwise
(A-fig. 30) and remove it.
– Remove the bulb (B-fig. 31) from the
bulb holder (A-fig. 31), pushing lightly
and turning counter-clockwise.
– Replace the bulb (B-fig. 31).
– Refit the protective cover correctly
(C-fig. 23).
A0B0353m
fig. 29
IN AN EMERGENCY
Direction indicators
A0B0225m
fig. 30
223
IN AN EMERGENCY
– Refit the bulb holder (A-fig. 31) by
making its notches coincide with the grooves
in the headlight unit body and turn it clockwise.
DIPPED-BEAM HEADLAMPS
(fig. 32)
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
– Remove the protective cover
– Reconnect the electrical connector (A).
– Disconnect the electrical connector (A).
– Refit the protective cover correctly.
– Release the bulb catch (B).
– Withdraw the bulb and replace it.
A0B0221m
224
fig. 31
– Fit the new bulb making the tabs of the
metallic part coincide with the grooves in the
headlamp parabola and hook the bulb catch
(B).
A0B0222m
fig. 32
To replace the bulb proceed under the car
as follows:
– Disconnect the connector (A-fig. 33)
from the light unit.
– Turn the cover counter-clockwise (Bfig. 33) and remove it.
– Fit a new bulb making the tabs of the
metallic part coincide with the grooves in
the lamp lens and hook the bulb stopper
(D-fig. 34).
– Re-connect the supply cable terminal
(C-fig. 34).
– refit the cover (B-fig. 33) and connect the connector (A-fig. 33) to the light
unit.
– Withdraw the supply cable terminal
(C-fig. 34).
WARNING
The efficiency of the lights
will be decreased and may
inconvenience other road users if the
light units are not correctly adjusted. If in doubt contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services to have them
checked and adjusted if necessary.
– Release the bulb stopper (D-fig. 34)
and remove the bulb.
A0B0215m
fig. 33
To adjust the front foglights contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services.
IN AN EMERGENCY
FRONT FOG LIGHTS
(where required)
A0B0216m
fig. 34
225
IN AN EMERGENCY
FRONT SIDELIGHTS
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
MAIN-BEAM HEADLAMPS
(fig. 37)
– Remove the protective cover (Afig. 35).
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
– Remove the bulb holder (B-fig. 35)
which is snap-fitted.
– Release the clip holding the bulb (A).
– Remove the bulb (C-fig. 36) from the
bulb holder, pushing lightly and turning
counter-clockwise.
– Replace the bulb and refit the bulb holder (B-fig. 36) in its housing.
– Remove the protective cover.
– Fit the new bulb making the tabs of the
metallic part coincide with the grooves in the
headlamp parabola.
– Lock the bulb in place with the clip (A).
– Refit the protective cover correctly.
– Withdraw the power supply (B) cable
connector.
– Remove and (C) replace the bulb.
– Reconnect the power cable (B) to the
bulb.
– Refit the protective cover correctly
(A-fig. 35).
A0B0217m
226
fig. 35
A0B0218m
fig. 36
A0B0223m
fig. 37
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
– Push the transparent cover towards the
rear of the car to compress the tab (Afig. 38). Release the front part and remove the unit.
– Turn the bulb holder counter-clockwise
(B-fig. 39) and remove it from the transparent cover (D-fig. 39).
– Withdraw the bulb (C-fig. 39) which
is of the pressure-fitted type and replace it.
– Insert the bulb holder (B-fig. 39) in
the transparent cover (D-fig. 39) and position the unit ensuring that the clip clicks into place (A-fig. 38).
Rear light units contain the reversing lights,
rear fog guards, direction indicators, number plate lights, stop/side lights and the additional stop light (3rd stop).
REVERSING LIGHTS AND REAR
FOG GUARDS
Take care not to damage
the bodywork or the transparent cover when removing the side direction indicator unit.
A0B0219m
fig. 38
REAR LIGHT UNITS
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
– Open the boot.
– Slacken the screws (A or B-fig. 40)
fastening the boot trim in correspondence
with the light concerned.
A0B0220m
fig. 39
IN AN EMERGENCY
SIDE DIRECTION INDICATORS
A0B0211m
fig. 40
227
IN AN EMERGENCY
– Lower the boot lid trim in the corresponding area and remove the bulb holder
unit (C-fig. 41) releasing the retainer tab
(B-fig. 41).
– Remove and replace the spherical type
bulb with bayonet attachment pushing
it gently and turning counter-clockwise
(fig. 42):
– Refit the bulb holder unit fastening it correctly in place with the retainer tabs (Bfig. 41).
– Refit the boot trim fastening it with the
screws removed previously.
– Open the boot.
– Withdraw the bulb holder unit (Afig. 44) releasing the retainer tabs (Bfig. 44).
(E) rear fog guard bulb.
A0B0212m
fig. 41
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
– Slacken the two fastening screws
(A-fig. 43) and remove the protective cover (B-fig. 43).
(D) reversing light bulb
228
DIRECTION INDICATORS/
SIDELIGHTS AND STOP LIGHTS
A0B0213m
fig. 42
A0B0214m
fig. 43
(C) side light/stop light bulb
(D) direction indicator bulb.
NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
– Remove the number plate light unit using a flat screwdriver protected by a soft
cloth on the stopper (A-fig. 46).
– Refit the bulb holder (C-fig. 47) turning gently.
– Refit the complete unit (B-fig. 46)
firstly inserting the catches and then pressing in correspondence with the stopper
(A-fig. 46).
– Remove the unit (B-fig. 46).
– Refit the bulb holder unit fastening it
correctly in place with the retainer tabs (Bfig. 44).
– remove the bulb holder (C-fig. 47)
turning lightly and replace the bulb (Dfig. 47) which is pressure-fitted.
– Refit the protective cover (B-fig. 43)
fastening with nuts (A-fig. 43).
IN AN EMERGENCY
– Remove and replace the bulb concerned
(spherical with bayonet coupling) pushing
it gently and turning counter-clockwise
(fig. 45).
A0B0209m
fig. 46
A0B0207m
fig. 44
A0B0208m
fig. 45
A0B0210m
fig. 47
229
IN AN EMERGENCY
– Refit the transparent cover and install the
unit locking it with the knob (B-fig. 49).
ADDITIONAL STOP LIGHT
(3rd STOP)
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
– Open the boot.
– Re-position the trim correctly and fasten
with its buttons (A-fig. 48).
– Turn the fastening buttons (A-fig. 48)
until they release and lower the trim.
IF ONE OF THE
INTERNAL LIGHTS
GOES OUT
FRONT ROOF LIGHT
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
– Slacken the knob (B-fig. 49)and withdraw the complete unit.
– Slacken the screws (C-fig. 50).
A0B0204m
– Remove the roof light (A-fig. 52) levering in the points shown by the arrows.
– Open the cover (B-fig. 53).
– Remove the transparent cover (Dfig. 51) and replace the bulb concerned.
– Replace the bulb concerned (Cfig. 53) by pulling it outwards and freeing
it from the lateral contacts ensuring that the
new bulb is correctly fitted between the contacts.
fig. 49
A0B0192m
230
fig. 48
A0B0205m
fig. 50
A0B0206m
fig. 51
When
refitting
the
rooflight ensure that the
electrical wiring is correctly arranged and does not interfere
with the edges of the light or retaining clips.
A0B0578m
REAR ROOFLIGHT BULBS
(except versions with sunroof)
CENTRE REAR ROOF LAMP
(only versions with sunroof)
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
To remove the bulb proceed as follows:
– Remove the rooflight (A-fig. 54) levering in the point shown by the arrow.
– Remove the roof light (A-fig. 56) levering in the point shown by the arrow.
– Remove the bulb (B-fig. 55) pulling
outwards and releasing it from the side contacts.
– Remove the bulb (B-fig. 57) pulling
it outwards and releasing it from the side
contacts.
– Fit the new bulb making sure that it is
positioned correctly and locked between the
contacts.
– Fit the new bulb making sure that it is
positioned correctly and locked between the
contacts.
– Refit the light firstly inserting the side
with the connector and then pressing on the
other side until the catch clocks into place.
– Refit the roof light firstly inserting the
side (C-fig. 57) and then pressing on the
other side until the catch clicks into place.
IN AN EMERGENCY
To refit the rooflight reverse the procedure
followed for removal.
fig. 52
A0B0201m
fig. 53
A0B0202m
fig. 54
A0B0203m
fig. 55
231
IN AN EMERGENCY
COURTESY LIGHTS
(where required)
To remove the bulb proceed as follows:
– Remove the roof light (A-fig. 58) levering in the point shown by the arrow.
– Remove the bulb (B-fig. 59) pulling
it outwards and releasing it from the side
contacts.
– Fit the new bulb making sure that it is
positioned correctly and locked between the
contacts.
GLOVEBOX LIGHT
To remove the bulb proceed as follows:
– Remove the light pushing with a screwdriver on the tab (A-fig. 60).
– Remove the cover (B-fig. 61).
– Refit the roof light, inserting it in the correct position firstly on one side and then
pressing on the other until the tab clicks.
A0B0196m
A0B0199m
fig. 56
fig. 59
A0B0197m
232
fig. 57
A0B0198m
fig. 58
A0B0195m
fig. 60
– Refit the cover (B-fig. 61).
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
LIGHT
To remove the bulb proceed as follows:
– Re-install the light inserting it in the correct position firstly on one side and then
pushing on the other until the tab clicks.
– Open the boot.
– Turn the fastening buttons (A-fig. 63)
until they click and lower the trim.
– Replace the bulb (B-fig. 65)of the
cylindrical type pulling it outwards ensuring
that the new bulb is correctly positioned between the contacts.
– Refit the transparent cover ensuring that
the retaining tabs click into place (Cfig. 65).
– Withdraw the clear plastic cover and
bulb (A-fig. 64) using a flat-bladed screwdriver.
A0B0194m
A0B0191m
fig. 61
fig. 64
A0B0193m
fig. 62
IN AN EMERGENCY
– Change the bulb (C-fig. 62) which
is pressure-fitted.
A0B0192m
fig. 63
A0B0190m
fig. 65
233
IN AN EMERGENCY
IN THE EVENT OF A BURNT FUSE
GENERALITIES
(A) - Intact fuse
The fuse is (fig. 66) a protective element
of the electrical system: basically it operates
(i.e. it gets disconnected) in case of breakdown or wrong operation on the system.
(B) - Fuse with broken filament.
When an electrical devices ceases to function, make sure it has not fused. The filament must not be broken: if so, replace the
burnt fuse with another of the same value
(same colour).
A0B0189m
234
fig. 66
WARNING
If a main protective fuse
(MAXI-FUSE o MEGA-FUSE)
intervenes, do not fix it but contact
an Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
Extract the fuse to be replaced using the
pincers (C)situated on the fuse box.
Never replace a broken
fuse with anything other
than a new fuse. Use always an intact fuse of the same
colour.
WARNING
Never replace a fuse with
another with a higher amp
rating, DANGER OF FIRE!
WARNING
Before replacing a fuse
check that the key has
been removed from the ignition
and that all the services are
switched off and/or disengaged.
WARNING
If a fuse blows again contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
FUSE AND RELAYS IN THE
MAIN FUSEBOX (fig. 69)
A. Dipped beam light relay.
The fuses for the main devices are housed
in a control unit under the dashboard, to the
left of the steering column.
To gain access to them, remove the panel (A) releasing the tabs (B) in the direction of the arrow below and remove the
screw (C).
A0B0188m
A0B0172m
B. Relay for sunroof , seat heater, rear
window power control, seat electric adjustment.
The symbols that identify the main electric
component protected by each fuse, are
shown on the label (fig. 70) on the inner side of the panel (A-fig. 69).
IN AN EMERGENCY
The general protection fuses of Alfa
156 are in the engine compartment, inside a container near the battery positive terminal; to gain access to the fuses lift the two
lids (fig. 67 and fig. 68).
Some spare fuses are housed at the right
of the control unit (D-fig. 69); you are advised to replenish the stock of spare fuses
when they are used.
fig. 67
A0B0579m
fig. 68
A0B0185m
fig. 69
fig. 70
235
IN AN EMERGENCY
FUSES ABOVE THE MAIN
FUSEBOX (fig. 71)
To gain access to the fuses remove (Afig. 72) the pressure-fitted lid.
FUSES AND RELAYS IN ENGINE
BAY
The protection fuses of certain devices are
grouped together on three containers located above the main fusebox to which access
is gained removing the panel (A-fig. 69).
Access to the relays is gained by removing
the glovebox: contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
In the engine compartment, housed on a
bracket in front of the battery and protected by a special cover, there is a variable
number of fuses and relays depending on
the versions.
FUSES AND RELAYS ACCESSIBLE
FROM THE GLOVEBOX
B. Headlamp washer timer (where required).
A. Fog light relay (where required).
Some fuses and relays for services supplied
on request or only for certain specific market versions are located on a bracket behind
the glovebox.
A0B0184m
WARNING The arrangement of the fuses and relays may vary depending on the
versions and markets. In the event of a suspected anomaly, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
A0B0141m
236
fig. 71
A0B0154m
fig. 72
fig. 73
For JTD 20v Multijet version refer to
fig. 75
A. Engine radiator cooling fan 2nd speed
relay (T.SPARK versions).
For Diesel versions, depending on the options installed, there is a second bracket fastened to the engine compartment rear bulkhead for the following fuses (fig. 76):
A. MAXI-FUSE 30A: additional passenger
compartment heater 2nd level relay.
B. Engine radiator cooling fan 1st speed relay.
B. MAXI-FUSE 30A: additional passenger
compartment heater 1st level relay.
C. Fuel pump relay
D. Electronic injection relay
A0B0618m
E. Climate control compressor relay
IN AN EMERGENCY
Remove the cover (A-fig. 73) to
gain access to the following relays/fuses
(fig. 74):
WARNING Strictly observe the specified
fuse ampere value: in case of doubt, contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
F. Timing variator relay (1.6 T.SPARK only) or engine radiator fan 2nd speed relay
(only 2.5 V6 24V, JTD and JTD 16V Multijet versions).
G. Fuel oil heater relay (only Diesel versions).
A0B0183m
fig. 74
A0B0619m
fig. 75
fig. 76
237
IN AN EMERGENCY
FUSE SUMMARY TABLE
LIGHTS
FIGURE
AMPERES
FUSE
Left front side light
7
10A
69
Right front side light
6
10A
69
Left rear side light
6
10A
69
Right rear side light
7
10A
69
Left dipped-beam headlamp/Xenon lamps (optional)
8
20A
69
Right dipped-beam headlamp/Xenon lamps (optional)
4
20A
69
Left main-beam headlamp
2
10A
69
Right main-beam headlamp
1
10A
69
Cruise Control (optional)
13
10A
69
Left number plate light
7
10A
69
Right number plate light
6
10A
69
Reversing lights/Sound system
13
10A
69
Left rear fog guard
7
10A
69
Right rear fog guard
6
10A
69
Direction indicators - Hazard warning lights
14
10A
69
Fog lamps
16
15A
71
12-13
10A
69
9
25A
71
Car interior and glovebox lights
HI-FI BOSE system
238
FUSE
AMPERES
FIGURE
Windscreen wiper, windscreen washer/Rearscreen wiper/Rain sensor (optional)
10
20A
69
Horns
11
20A
69
GSM Box for Connect/Navigator-electronic warning system
13
10A
69
Front power windows
5
30A
69
Left rear power window
4
20A
71
Right rear power window
5
20A
71
Door locking system - Boot light
3
20A
69
Boot electric opening
7
30A
71
Rearscreen heating
15
30A
69
Wing mirror adjustment
13
10A
69
Wing mirror defrosting
15
30A
69
Cigar lighter/Odour sensor
9
15A
69
Headlamp washer
1
20A
72
Headlamp aiming device
4
10A
69
Instrument cluster
12
10A
69
Main-beam headlamp warning light
2
10A
69
Rearscreen heating warning light
15
30A
69
Sound system/Diagnosis socket
12
10A
69
Electronic alarm system
12
10A
69
Supplementary electrical socket in the boot (Sportwagon versions)
10
20A
71
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICES
239
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICES
FUSE
AMPERES
FIGURE
Remote control
13
10A
69
Controls lighting/Stop lights
3
10A
71
Rear control lighting from sidelights
6
10A
71
Seat heating/Sunroof/Seat electrical adjustment
8
30A
71
Air bag system
2 (*)
10A (*)
71
ABS system
9
11 (*)
60A
10A (*)
68
71
Alfa Romeo CODE system
13
7.5A
71
Climate control system
9
15A
69
First speed
– T.SPARK and JTS versions
– diesel versions
– 2.5 V6 24V versions
6
6
6
50A
60A
40A
68
68
68
Second speed
– T.SPARK and JTS versions
– diesel versions
– 2.5 V6 24V versions
7
7
7
30A
40A
40A
68
68
68
Passenger compartment fan (petrol versions)
1
40A
68
Passenger compartment fan (diesel versions)
4
40A
68
Electronic ignition and injection system
13
14
15
5
7.5A
15A
15A
30A
71
71
71
68
Glow plugs and resistances on fuel oil filter (diesel versions)
8
70A
68
Engine cooling radiator fan:
240
FUSE
AMPERES
FIGURE
Fuel oil heater (JTD versions, JTD 16V Multijet)
H
25A
74
Services switched off with starting
1
7.5A
71
Battery power supply for Alfa Romeo CODE/Injection system
12
7.5A
71
(+15) key-controlled service supply (ignition switch)
2
30A
68
General service supply (petrol versions)
4
80A
68
General service supply (diesel versions)
1
80A
68
General service supply
3
70A
68
Additional heater (diesel version only)
10
70A
68
Oil pump supply (Selespeed versions only)
10
30A
68
Selespeed gearbox
(2.0 JTS version)
7
8
30A
20A
68
68
Automatic gearbox
(2.5 V6 24V version)
7
8
40A
20A
68
68
IN AN EMERGENCY
SERVICES
(*) Specific components and values depending on the version/market. If in doubt, especially for the replacement of fuses which protect safety circuits
and/or systems (Air bag, ABS, etc.), you are recommended to contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services, also to locate the cause of the fuse tripping.
241
IN AN EMERGENCY
IN THE EVENT OF A FLAT BATTERY
First of all, you are advised to refer to the
“Car maintenance” chapter for precautions
to be adopted in order to prevent the battery from getting flat and to ensure its long
durability.
CHARGING THE BATTERY
WARNING The description of the battery charging procedure is described only for
informative purposes. This operation should
be carried out by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
Charge the battery as follows:
– Disconnect the terminal from the battery negative (–) pole.
– Connect the charger cables to the battery, respecting polarity.
– Turn on the charger.
– After charging turn off the charger before disconnecting it from the battery.
– Reconnect the terminal to the battery
negative (–) pole.
STARTING WITH AN AUXILIARY
BATTERY
Charging should be slow at a low amp rating for about 24 hours. Charging for a longer
time may damage the battery.
See “Starting with an auxiliary battery” in
this chapter.
WARNING
The fluid contained in the
battery is poisonous and
corrosive. Avoid contact with the
skin or eyes. The battery should be
charged in a well ventilated place
and kept away from naked flames
or sources of sparks: danger of explosion and fire.
242
WARNING
Never attempt to charge a
frozen battery before
thawing it, the danger of explosion
exists. If it has frozen, always
check that the inside elements are
not broken (risk of short circuit)
and that the body is not cracked,
with the risk of acid coming out
which is poisonous and corrosive.
The tow ring supplied with the vehicle is
housed in the tool box under the boot mat.
– Firmly screw the ring in its housing.
To install the tow ring, proceed as follows:
– Take the tow ring from the tool box.
– Remove the cover (A) snap-fitted on the
front (fig. 77) or rear bumper (fig. 78).
If the supplied flat screwdriver is used to carry out this operation, protect the tip with a
soft cloth to prevent damaging the car.
WARNING
Carefully clean the threaded housing before tightening the ring. Before beginning to
tow the car make sure that the
tow ring is firmly tightened in its
threaded housing.
A0B0593m
fig. 77
A0B0594m
fig. 78
WARNING
Before beginning to tow
the car, turn the ignition
key to MAR and then to STOP, do
not remove it. Removing the key
automatically engages the steering
lock resulting in the impossibility
to steer the wheels. When towing
remember that without the help of
the servo-brake and power steering, it is necessary to exert more
effort on the brake pedal and for
steering. Do not use flexible cables
for towing and avoid jerks. During towing operations make sure
that fastening the joint to the car
does not damage the components
in contact with it. When towing the
car it is compulsory to comply with
the specific traffic regulations concerning both the towing device and
behaviour on the road.
IN AN EMERGENCY
IF THE VEHICLE IS TO BE TOWED
243
IN AN EMERGENCY
TOWING THE 2.0 JTS
SELESPEED VERSION
WARNING For version with Selespeed
gearbox, make sure that it is in neutral (N)
(checking that the car moves when pushed)
and proceed as for towing a normal car with
mechanical gearbox following the instructions given on the previous page.
Should it be impossible to set to neutral,
do not tow the vehicle; contact Alfa Romeo
Authorised Services.
TOWING THE VERSION WITH
AUTOMATIC GEARBOX
(2.5 V6 24V Q-SYSTEM)
WARNING
Do not start the engine
when the vehicle is being
WARNING For towing the vehicle comply with current local regulations. Also follow the instructions given on the previous
page.
towed.
If the car needs to be towed, observe the
following recommendations:
The failure to follow the
above instructions may
cause serious damage to
the automatic gearbox.
– if possible, put the car on a rescue vehicle;
– if this is not possible, tow the car raising the driving wheels (front) from the
ground;
WARNING
Do not start the engine
when towing the vehicle.
244
– if this, too, is not possible, the car may
only be towed for 50 Km at a speed of
50 km/h.
The gearshift lever should be at position N
for towing.
Cars with automatic gearbox may be towed only for
short distances and at a
low speed: if longer towing is necessary, the driving wheels must be
raised to prevent the gearbox from
being pulled into rotation during
towing.
USING THE JACK
See paragraph “In the event of a puncture” in this chapter.
You are informed that:
– the jack mass is 2,100 kg;
WARNING
The car may fall if the jack
is not positioned correctly.
Never use the jack for higher capacities than the one stated on its
label.
WARNING
The car is to be lifted positioning the jack or the
workshop lift arm plate only in the
points shown (fig. 79).
IN AN EMERGENCY
IF THE VEHICLE IS TO BE LIFTED
– the jack requires no adjustment;
– the jack cannot be repaired and in case
of breakage it must be replaced by another original one;
– no tool other than its cranking lever may
be installed on the jack.
WARNING
The purpose of the jack is
only for replacing wheels
on the car with which it is provided or on cars of the same model. It
must never be used for other purposes such as for example raising
cars of other models. In no case
must it be used for repairs under
the car.
USING AN ARM LIFT OR
WORKSHOP LIFT
The vehicle must only be lifted laterally positioning the ends of the arms or the workshop lift in the areas illustrated, approx. 40
cm from the profile of the wheelhouse
(fig. 79).
A0B0588m
fig. 79
245
IN AN EMERGENCY
IF AN ACCIDENT
OCCURS
– It is important to keep calm.
– If you are not directly involved in the accident, stop at least ten metres away from
the accident.
– If you are on a motorway do not obstruct the emergency lane with your car.
– Turn off the engine and turn on the hazard lights.
– At night, illuminate the scene of the accident with your headlights.
– Act carefully, you must not risk being run
over.
– Mark the accident by putting the red triangle at the regulatory distance from the car
where it can be clearly seen.
– Call the emergency services making the
information you give as accurate as you can.
On the motorway use the special columnmounted emergency phones.
– In pile-ups on the motorway, particularly when the visibility is bad, there is a high
risk of other vehicles running into those already immobile. Get out of the vehicle immediately and take refuge behind the guard
rail.
– If the doors are blocked, do not try to
get out of the vehicle by breaking the stratified windscreen. The rear and side windows
are easier to break.
– Remove the ignition keys of the vehicles involved.
246
– If you smell petrol or other chemicals,
do not smoke and make sure all cigarettes
are extinguished.
– Use a fire extinguisher, blanket, sand or
earth to put out fires, no matter how small
they are. Never use water.
– If it is not necessary to use the lighting
system, disconnect the terminal from the
battery negative (–) pole.
FIRST-AID KIT
– Never leave the injured person alone.
The obligation to provide assistance exists
even for those not directly involved in the
accident.
It is advisable to have also a fire extinguisher and a blanket besides the first-aid
kit.
– Do not congregate around the injured
person.
– Reassure the injured person that help
is on its way and will arrive soon. Stay close
by to calm him/her down in case of panic.
IN AN EMERGENCY
IF ANYONE IS INJURED
– Unfasten or cut seat belts holding injured
parties.
– Do not give an injured person anything
to drink.
– Never move an injured person except in
the following cases.
– Pull the injured person from the car only if it risks catching fire, it is sinking in water or is likely to fall over a cliff or similar.
Do not pull his/her arms or legs, do not
bend the head and, as far as possible, keep
the body horizontal.
247
CAR MAINTENANCE
CAR MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMMED
MAINTENANCE
Correct maintenance is essential for ensuring long car life under the best conditions.
This is why Alfa Romeo has programmed
a series of checks and maintenance operations every 20,000 km.
WARNING At 2000 km from the maintenance deadline, the Infocenter display will
show “SCHEDULED SERVICE WITHIN” which
is shown again turning the ignition key to
MAR, every 200 km. For further details,
see “Service” in the “Display Infocenter”
paragraph in “Getting to know your car”
chapter.
248
It is however wise to remember that Programmed Maintenance does not completely cover all the car’s requirements: also in
the initial period before 20,000 km service
coupon and later, between one coupon and
another, ordinary care is still necessary such
as for example routinely checking and topping up the level of fluids, checking the tyre
pressure, etc...
WARNING The Programmed Maintenance coupons are specified by the Manufacturer. The failure to have them carried out
may invalidate the warranty.
The Programmed Maintenance service is
carried out by all Alfa Romeo Authorized Services, at pre-established times.
If during each operation, in addition to the
ones programmed, the need arises for further replacements or repairs, these may be
carried out only with the explicit agreement
of the customer.
WARNING You are advised to contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services in the event
of any minor operating faults, without waiting for the next service coupon.
Thousands of km
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust pressure if necessary
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard lights,
boot lights, passenger compartment lights, glovebox light, warning lights, etc..)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check operation of windscreen wiper/washer system, adjust spray jets
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check position/wear of windscreen/rearscreen wiper blades
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check front disk brake pad wear indicator
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check conditions of rear disk brake pads
●
●
●
Sight check for the conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection,
pipes and hoses (exhaust - fuel - brakes),
rubber parts (boots - sleeves - bushes - etc.)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check for bonnet and boot lock cleanness, lever cleanness and lubrication
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check condition of timing drive belt
●
●
Sight check for conditions of Poly-V accessory drive belt
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check petrol engine exhaust emissions
●
●
●
●
Check engine smoke (diesel versions)
●
●
●
●
Check/adjust handbrake lever stroke
Check/adjust valve clearance (1.9 JTD 8V versions)
Check operation of antievaporation system (petrol engines)
●
●
CAR MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE PROGRAMME
●
249
CAR MAINTENANCE
Thousand of km
Change fuel filter (diesel versions only)
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Change air cleaner cartridge (petrol engines)
●
●
Change air cleaner cartridge (diesel versions only)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check and if necessary top up fluid levels (brakes, hydraulic clutch, power steering,
windscreen wiper, battery, engine coolant, etc..)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Check and if necessary top up Selespeed oil level (2.0 JTS version)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Replacement of timing drive belt (*) and Poly-V accessory drive belt
●
Replacement of counter-rotating shaft drive belt (only 2.0 JTS)
●
●
Replacement of spark plugs (T.SPARK 16V, 2.0 JTS and 2.5 V6 24V versions)
●
Check operation of engine control systems (through diagnosis)
●
●
●
●
Check gearbox and differential oil level
●
Check automatic gearbox oil level (2.5 V6 24V version)
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Change engine oil and oil filter
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
Change brake fluid (or every 2 year)
Replacement of dust/pollen filter
●
●
●
●
●
●
(*) Or every 3 years in harsh conditions (cold – hot climates, stop and go city traffic, dusty areas or roads covered with sand and/or salt)
Or every 5 years, regardless of the mileage.
250
●
●
●
●
●
●
An annual inspection programme
has been established for cars thet
cover less than 20,000 km (e.g.
10,000 km). It consists of the following:
– Check tyre conditions/wear and adjust
pressure if required (including the compact
spare wheel)
– Check lighting system operation (headlights, direction indicators, hazard lights,
boot lights, passenger compartment lights,
glovebox light, warning lights of instrument
panel, etc.)
– Check windscreen and rear-screen
wiper/washer operation, adjust nozzles
– Check windscreen/rear-screen blade position/wear
– Visually check the following: engine,
gearbox, transmission, piping (exhaust - fuel - brakes) rubber components (casings sleeves - bushings, etc..), brake and fuel
hoses
– Check battery charge condition
– Visually check the condition of the belts
and various controls
– Check and top up if necessary, the fluid levels (coolant, brake fluid, windscreen
washer fluid, battery, etc.)
– Change engine oil
– Replace engine oil filter
– Change pollen filter.
ADDITIONAL
OPERATIONS
Every 1000 km or before long journeys
check and if necessary top up:
– engine coolant level
– brake fluid/hydraulic clutch control fluid level
CAR MAINTENANCE
ANNUAL INSPECTION
PROGRAMME
– power steering fluid level
– windscreen washer and headlamp washer fluid level
– tyre pressure and conditions.
Every 3000 km check the level of the
engine oil and top up if necessary.
You are recommended to use products of
the FL Selenia, designed and developed
expressly for Alfa Romeo cars (see the table
“Specifications of fluids and lubricants” in
the “Technical specifications” chapter).
– Check condition and wear of the front
brake pad
– Check for bonnet and boot lock cleanness, lever cleanness and lubrication
251
CAR MAINTENANCE
WARNING
Engine oil
WARNING
Fuel oil filter
WARNING
Air cleaner
Should prevailing use of the car be under
one of the following specially heavy conditions:
The variety of the degree of purity of the
fuel oil in commerce may make it necessary
to change the fuel oil filter more frequently
than stated in the Scheduled Maintenance
Programme. If the engine is “sobbing” it
is a sign that the filter needs changing.
Using the car on dusty roads, change the
air cleaner more frequently than stated in
the Scheduled Maintenance Programme.
– trailer or caravan towing
– dusty roads
– short distances (less than 7-8 km) repeated and with external temperatures below zero.
– frequently idling engines or long distance
low speed driving (e.g. taxis or door-to-door
deliveries) or in case of a long term inactivity.
Replace engine oil more frequently than
required on SERVICE SCHEDULE.
252
For any doubts about the intervals between engine oil and air cleaner changes
in relation to how the car is used, contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
WARNING
Pollen filter
You are recommended to have the battery
charge conditions checked, preferably at the
onset of winter, to avoid the possibility of
freezing the electrolyte.
If the car is used frequently in dusty or
heavily polluted environments it is advisable
to replace the filtering element more frequently; in particular it should be replaced if
a reduction of the amount of air admitted to
the passenger compartment is noted.
This check should be carried out more frequently if the car is used prevailingly for
short journeys, or if it is fitted with services
that absorb high amounts of current permanently with the ignition key off, especially
if installed in the after market.
Car maintenance should be
entrusted to Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services. For
routine and minor maintenance operations you wish to carry out
yourself, always make sure you
have the proper equipment, genuine
Alfa Romeo spare parts and the
necessary fluids; do not however
carry out these operations if you
have no experience.
CAR MAINTENANCE
WARNING
Battery
In the case of use of the car in hot climates
or particularly harsh conditions, it is wise
to check the level of the battery fluid (electrolyte) at more frequent intervals than stated in the Scheduled Maintenance Programme.
253
CAR MAINTENANCE
A0B00174m
CHECKING FLUID
LEVELS
WARNING
Never smoke while working in the engine compartment; gas and inflammable
vapours may be present, with the
risk of fire.
When topping up take
care not to confuse the various types of fluids: they
are all incompatible with one another and could seriously damage
the car.
254
fig. 1 - 1.6 T.SPARK, 1.8 T.SPARK versions
A0B00436m
1 Engine oil - 2 Battery - 3 Brake fluid 4 Windscreen washer fluid - 5 Engine
coolant fluid - 6 Power steering fluid
fig. 2 - 2.0 JTS version
CAR MAINTENANCE
A0B00175m
1 Engine oil - 2 Battery - 3 Brake fluid 4 Windscreen washer fluid - 5 Engine
coolant fluid - 6 Power steering fluid
fig. 3 - 2.5 V6 24V version
A0B00176m
1 Engine oil - 2 Battery - 3 Brake fluid 4 Windscreen washer fluid - 5 Engine
coolant fluid - 6 Power steering fluid
fig. 4 - JTD version
255
CAR MAINTENANCE
A0B0558m
1 Engine oil - 2 Battery - 3 Brake fluid 4 Windscreen washer fluid - 5 Engine
coolant fluid - 6 Power steering fluid
fig. 5 - JTD 16V Multijet version
A0B0616m
256
1 Engine oil - 2 Battery - 3 Brake fluid 4 Windscreen washer fluid - 5 Engine
coolant fluid - 6 Power steering fluid
fig. 6 - JTD 20V Multijet version
To improve picture detail, the engine compartment is illustrated without the bonnet
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
Fig.
WARNING
When the engine is hot,
take care when working
inside the engine compartment to
avoid burns. Remember that when
the engine is hot, the fan may cut
in: danger of injury.
7: T.SPARK versions
8: 2.0 JTS version
9: 2.5 V6 24V version
10: JTD versions
11: JTD 16V Multijet version
12: JTD 20V Multijet version
The engine oil level should be checked
when the car is standing on a level surface
a few minutes (about 5) after the engine
has been switched off.
Remove the dipstick (A), clean it, put it
back completely, remove it once again and
check that the level is between the MIN
and MAX marks on the dipstick.
The interval between the MIN and MAX
marks corresponds to approximately 1 liter
of oil.
If the oil level is near or even below the
MIN, mark, add oil trough the filler neck
(B), until reaching the MAX mark.
WARNING
Scarves, ties and other
loose clothing might be
pulled by moving parts.
A0B0170m
fig. 7 - T.SPARK versions
Never add oil with characteristics (classification,
viscosity) which are different from those of the oil already in
the circuit.
CAR MAINTENANCE
ENGINE OIL
A0B0437m
fig. 8 - 2.0 JTS version
A0B0169m
fig. 9 - 2.5 V6 24V version
257
CAR MAINTENANCE
WARNING If a routine check reveals
that the oil level is above the MAX mark,
contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services to
have the correct level restored.
WARNING After adding or changing the
oil, run the engine for a few seconds and
wait a few minutes after stopping it.
Engine oil consumption
Max. engine oil consumption is usually
400 grams every 1000 km.
During the initial period of use the engine
settles, therefore the engine oil consumption can only be considered stabilised after
the first 5000 ÷ 6000 km.
WARNING Engine oil consumption depends on the way of driving and the conditions of use of the car.
A0B0165m
258
Used engine oil and filter
contain pollutants. Contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services to have the oil and filter
changed as these are equipped to
dispose of the waste oil and filters
respecting the environment and
laws.
fig. 10 - JTD version
A0B0559m
fig. 11 - JTD 16V Multijet version
A0B0617m
fig. 12 - JTD 20V Multijet version
The oil level of the Selespeed system
should be carried out with the car on a level surface and with the engine stopped and
cold.
Do not add oil with different characteristics than
those of the oil already in
the system.
To check the level, proceed as follows:
WARNING
When the engine is hot,
take care when working
inside the engine compartment to
avoid burns. Remember that when
the engine is hot, the fan may cut
in: danger of injury.
CAR MAINTENANCE
SELESPEED GEARBOX
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM OIL
(fig. 13)
– turn the ignition key to MAR;
– disconnect the breather tube and remove the cap (A) checking that the level
corresponds with the MAX mark on the dipstick of the actual cap;
– if the level is below the MAX mark, top
up with oil until reaching the correct level;
– after screwing the cap back on, insert
the breather tube completely on the cap
spout and turn the ignition key to STOP.
Used gearbox oil contain
pollutants. Contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services
to have the oil changed as these
are equipped to dispose of the
waste oil respecting the environment and laws.
A0B0162m
fig. 13
259
CAR MAINTENANCE
Q-SYSTEM AUTOMATIC
GEARBOX OIL LEVEL (fig. 14)
The oil should be checked with the engine
idling and at operating temperature, the
gearshift lever at position P and the car on
level ground.
To check the level, proceed as follows:
The level should be between the MIN and
MAX marks of the sector identified by the
word COLD (+40°C).
WARNING After long journeys with the
gearbox/differential unit very hot, the oil
level should be between the MIN and
MAX marks of the sector identified by the
word HOT (+80°C).
– remove the dipstick (A);
– clean it with a clean lint free cloth;
– insert the dipstick in its housing pushing
well down to the bottom;
– remove it to check.
A0B0163m
260
fig. 14
WARNING
When the engine is very
hot, take care when working inside the engine compartment
to avoid burns. Remember that
when the engine is hot, the fan may
cut in: danger of injury.
If the oil level is near or below the MIN
mark, add TUTELA GI/2 oil through the
dipstick housing.
The oil level should never exceed the
MAX mark on the dipstick on the COLD
side, if the level is checked cold and on the
HOT side if the level is checked with the
gearbox/differential unit hot.
Do not add oil with different characteristics than
those of the oil already in
the system.
WARNING
Used gearbox oil contain
pollutants. Contact Alfa
Romeo Authorized Services to
have the oil changed as these are
equipped to dispose of the waste
oil respecting the environment and
laws.
WARNING
Do not remove he cap
when the engine is hot:
danger of burns.
Fig. 15: T.SPARK, 2.0 JTS and diesel versions
Fig. 16: 2.5 V6 24V version
The level of the coolant in the header tank
(reservoir) should be checked with the engine cold and the car on a level surface and
it should be between the MIN and MAX
marks on the tank. If the level is low, loosen
the header tank cap (A) and slowly pour
a mixture of the fluid specified in the ”Fluids and lubricants ” table in section “Technical Specifications”, through the filler neck
until nearing the MAX mark; have this operation carried out at Alfa Romeo Authorised
Services.
Top up only with the same
fluid contained in the cooling circuit. PARAFLU UP
(red) cannot be mixed with
PARAFLU 11 (blue) or with other
fluids. Should this take place, do
not start the engine and contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Service.
The antifreeze mixture contained in the
cooling circuit guarantees protection down
to –35°C.
The cooling system is
pressurised. If necessary,
replace the cap only with
another genuine one, otherwise
system efficiency could be compromised.
A0B0161m
fig. 15 - T.SPARK, 2.0 JTS and JTD versions
CAR MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
A0B0160m
fig. 16 - 2.5 V6 24V version
261
CAR MAINTENANCE
POWER STEERING OIL LEVEL
Fig. 17: T.SPARK versions
Fig. 18: 2.0 JTS versions
Fig. 19: 2.5 V6 24V and JTD versions
Check that the oil level in the reservoir is
at the MAX level.
This operation must be carried out with the
car on level ground and when the engine
is stationary and cold.
Check that the level reaches the MAX reference notch on the reservoir or coincides
with the upper notch (maximum level) on
the dipstick integral with the reservoir cap.
If the level of the oil in the reservoir falls
below the specified level, top up only with
one of the products listed in the table
“Fluids and lubricants” in the “Technical
specifications” chapter as follows:
– Start the engine and allow the oil in the
reservoir to settle.
– When the engine is running turn the
steering wheel lock to lock a few minutes.
– Top up to the MAX level notch and
then replace the cover.
fig. 17
Oil consumption is very
low, if topping up again is
needed shortly afterwards,
have the system checked for possible leaks by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
WARNING
Power steering fluid is
highly inflammable. Do not
let it come into contact with hot engine parts.
A0B0159m
262
WARNING Contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services for maintenance and repair
operations.
A0B0158m
fig. 18
A0B0158m
fig. 19
From time to time check the instrument
panel warning light x by pressing cover
(B) of the reservoir (A) (with the ignition
key at MAR) instrument panel warning
light should come on.
When loosening the reservoir cap do not allow the
fluid to come into contact
with painted parts. If it does, wash
it off immediately with water.
WARNING
Brake and clutch fluid is
poisonous and highly corrosive. In the event of accidental
contact, wash the parts involved
immediately with neutral soap and
water, then rinse thoroughly. See
a doctor at once if the fluid is swallowed.
WARNING Brake and hydraulic clutch
fluid is hygroscopic (i.e. it absorbs moisture).
For this reason, if the car is mainly used in
areas with a high degree of atmospheric humidity, the fluid should be replaced at more
frequent intervals than specified in the
Scheduled Maintenance Programme.
CAR MAINTENANCE
BRAKE AND HYDRAULIC
CLUTCH FLUID (fig. 20)
WARNING
Symbol π on the container indicates synthetic type
brake fluid distinguishing it from
the mineral kind. Using mineral
type fluids damages the special
rubber braking system gaskets beyond repair.
A0B0157m
fig. 20
263
CAR MAINTENANCE
WINDSCREEN/HEADLIGHT
WASHER FLUID
Fig. 21: T.SPARK, 2.0 JTS and diesel versions
Fig. 22: 2.5 V6 24V version.
Check the level in the reservoir removing
the cap (A).
If necessary top up using a mixture of water and TUTELA PROFESSIONAL SC 35
as follows:
– 30% of TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 and 70% water in summer;
– 50% of TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 and 50% water in winter;
WARNING
Do not travel with the
windscreen washer reservoir empty: the action of the windscreen washer is fundamental for
improving vision.
– in the case of temperatures below
–20°C use TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 fluid neat.
WARNING
Some commercial additives
for windscreen washers
are inflammable. The engine compartment contains hot components
which could set it on fire.
A0A0156m
A0A0155m
To avoid damaging the
pump motors, do not use
the windscreen washers
when the reservoir is empty.
264
fig. 21
fig. 22
The air cleaner is connected to the temperature and air flow sensors which send the
electrical signals needed for correct operation of the injection and ignition system to
the control unit.
When the car is habitually driven in dusty areas,
the cleaner should be
changed at shorter intervals than
those given in the Programmed
Maintenance Schedule.
It must therefore always be in perfect conditions to ensure correct operation of the engine, low consumption and exhaust emission levels.
If they are not carried out
correctly and with the due
precautions, the operations
involving cleaner replacement described herein may compromise the
safety of the car.
This operation should be carried
out by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
Any attempt to clean the
air cleaner may cause serious engine damage.
DIESEL FILTER
DRAINING CONDENSATION
WATER
Water in the supply circuit
can seriously damage the
whole injection system and
cause malfunctions to engine operation. Should the warning lamp c
turn on, available for the provided versions/markets, contact as
soon as possible the Alfa Romeo
Authorised Service for drainage operations.
CAR MAINTENANCE
AIR FILTER
265
CAR MAINTENANCE
POLLEN FILTER
BATTERY
This has mechanical/electrostatic air filtering actions, provided that the windows
and doors are shut.
The battery is of the “Limited Maintenance” type and is fitted with an optical indicator (A-fig. 23) for checking the electrolyte level and charge.
Have the pollen filter checked once a year
by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services, preferably at the onset of summer.
If the car is mainly used in dusty or heavily polluted areas, the filter should be
changed at more frequent intervals than
specified in the Scheduled Maintenance Programme.
WARNING The failure to replace the filter can considerably reduce the effectiveness
of the climate control system.
Under normal conditions of use the electrolyte does not need topping up with distilled water. To make sure that it is in efficient conditions, at routine intervals check
the indicator on the battery cover which
should be dark in colour with a green central area.
If the indicator is a bright light colour, or
dark without the green central area, contact
Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
A0B0147m
266
fig. 23
Batteries contain substances that are very
harmful for the environment. You are advised to have the
battery changed at Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services, which are
properly equipped for disposing of
used batteries respecting nature
and the law.
WARNING
The liquid in the battery is
poisonous and corrosive.
Avoid contact with eyes and skin.
Do not bring naked flames or possible sources of sparks near to the
battery: risk of fire and explosion.
WARNING
When doing any work on
the battery or near it, always wear special protective goggles.
CHECKING THE CHARGE
The battery charge may be checked satisfactorily using the indicator, and acting according to the colour the indicator shows.
Refer to the table below or to the label
fig. 24 on the battery.
CAR MAINTENANCE
Incorrect fitting of electrical accessories can seriously damage the car. If after
buying the car, you wish to install
electric accessories (alarm, sound
system, radiotelephone, etc.) contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services who will be able to suggest
the most suitable devices and
above all advise about the need to
use a more powerful battery.
WARNING
Working with a low fluid
level may damage the battery irreversibly, even causing it to
burst.
If the car is to remain stationary for a long time in
very cold weather, remove
the battery and take it to a warm
place, otherwise it might freeze.
A0B0146m
fig. 24
267
CAR MAINTENANCE
CHARGING THE BATTERY
WARNING The description of the battery charging procedure is described only for
informative purposes. This operation should
be carried out by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
Charging should be slow at a low amp rating for about 24 hours. Charging for a longer
time may damage the battery.
Charge the battery as follows:
– Disconnect the terminal from the battery negative (–) pole.
WARNING When reconnecting the negative battery cable after having disconnected it, wait for 2 minutes before turning the
key to enable the climate control system
to reset actuator strokes properly.
268
– Connect the charger cables to the battery terminals ensuring that the bias is correct.
– Turn on the charger.
– After charging turn off the charger before disconnecting it from the battery.
– Reconnect the battery negative terminal (–).
WARNING If the car is fitted with an
alarm system, turn off the alarm with the
remote control and deactivate the system
turning the emergency key to “OFF” (see
“Electronic alarm” in “Getting to know your
car” chapter).
Bright
white colour
Top up electrolyte
Contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services
Dark colour
without green central area
Low battery charge
Charge the battery
(advisable to contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services)
Dark colour
with green central area
Electrolyte level
and charge sufficient
No action needed
WARNING
Never attempt to charge a
frozen battery before
thawing it, the danger of explosion
exists. If it has frozen, always
check that the inside elements are
not broken and that the body is not
cracked, with the risk of acid coming out which is poisonous and corrosive.
WARNING A battery kept at below
50% of its capacity is damaged by sulphation, the capacity is reduced and starting
is difficult, there is also more possibility of
freezing (this can occur at –10°C). In the
event of a prolonged stop, refer to “Vehicle inactivity”, in the chapter “Getting the
best out of your car”.
If required, replace the battery with a genuine spare part having the same specifications. If a battery with different specifications is fitted, the service intervals given in
the Programmed Maintenance Schedule in
this section will no longer be valid. Refer
to the instructions provided by the battery
manufacturer.
USEFUL HINTS TO EXTEND
THE LIFE OF YOUR BATTERY
To avoid quickly draining the battery and
to preserve its operating conditions over the
course of time, carefully follow the instructions below:
– The terminals must always be tightened.
– As far as possible, avoid keeping services on for a long time with the engine
stopped (radio, hazard lights, parking lights,
etc.).
– When leaving the car parked in a
garage, make sure that the doors, bonnet,
boot and interior lids are properly shut to
prevent lights from staying on.
– If after purchasing the car, you wish to
install electrical accessories which need a
permanent electrical supply (alarm, handsfree phone, radio-navigator with satellite anti-theft function, etc.) contact Alfa Romeo
Authorized Services whose qualified personnel, in addition to suggesting the most
suitable devices from Lineaccessori Alfa
Romeo will be able to evaluate the total
electrical absorption, checking whether the
car’s electric system is able to support the
load required or whether a battery with higher capacity is necessary. In fact, these devices continue to absorb current with the
ignition key off (car parked, engine off) and
may gradually drain the battery.
CAR MAINTENANCE
REPLACING THE BATTERY
– Before doing any work on the electric
system, disconnect the battery negative terminal.
269
CAR MAINTENANCE
The total absorption of these accessories
(standard and installed later) must be less
than 0.6 mA x Ah (of the battery), as
shown in the table below:
With normal use of the car, no particular
precautions need to be taken.
Battery
Maximum permissible
loadless absorption
50 Ah
30 mA
60 Ah
36 mA
70 Ah
42 mA
You are also reminded that services with
high current absorption activated by the user,
such as bottle warmers, vacuum cleaners,
cellular telephone, mini refrigerator, etc. accelerate the battery drainage process if they
are powered with the engine not running or running at idle speed.
WARNING It should also be noted that
improper branches on connectors of the electric wiring for installing additional equipment
is dangerous, particularly if safety devices
are involved.
270
ELECTRONIC CONTROL
UNITS
In the event of work on the electric system
or emergency starting, the instructions given below must absolutely be adhered to:
– Do not check for current in the cables by
short-circuiting the ends.
– If electrical welding is to be carried out
on the body of the car, the electronic control units must be disconnected or removed
if the work involves the production of high
temperatures.
– Always switch off the engine before disconnecting the battery from the electric system.
– If it is necessary to charge the battery,
always disconnect it from the electric system.
– When starting in an emergency, only
use an auxiliary battery and not a battery
charger.
– Check that the bias is correct and that
the connections between the battery and
the electric system are in efficient conditions.
– Do not connect or disconnect the terminals of the electronic units while the ignition key is at MAR.
WARNING
Alterations or repairs to
the electric system carried
out incorrectly and without taking
into account the specifications of
the system, may cause operating
faults with the risk of fire.
TYRES PRESSURE
Check the pressure of each tyre, including the compact spare wheel, every two
weeks and before a long journey.
The pressure should be checked with the
tyre rested and cold.
It is normal for the pressure to increase
when the car is in use. If you have to check
or restore the pressure when the tyres are
hot, bear in mind that the pressure should
be +0.3 bar compare with the specified rating.
For the correct tyre inflation pressure, see
“Wheels” in the “Technical specifications”
chapter.
Incorrect pressure causes abnormal tyre
wear fig. 25:
A - Normal pressure: tread evenly worn.
B - Low pressure: tread particularly worn
at the edges.
C - High pressure: tread particularly worn
in the centre.
WARNING
Excessively low pressure
causes overheating of the
tyre with the possibility of serious
damage to it.
Tyres should be changed when the tread
thickness is reduced to 1.6 mm. In any case
follow local regulations.
WARNING
Remember that car road
holding also depends on
correct tyre inflation pressure.
A0B0235m
fig. 25
WARNINGS
Where possible, avoid sudden braking, tyre
squealing starts, etc.
Particularly avoid violent bumps against
kerbs, potholes or obstacles of various kinds.
Prolonged driving on rough roads may damage the tyres.
Routinely check the tyres for cuts on the
sides, swellings or uneven tread wear. If necessary contact Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
CAR MAINTENANCE
WHEELS AND TYRES
Avoid overloading the vehicle when travelling: this may cause serious damage to the
wheels and tyres.
If a tyre is punctured, stop immediately
and change it to avoid damage to the tyre,
the rim, suspensions and steering system.
Tyres age even if they are not used much.
Cracks in the tread rubber are a sign of aging. In any case, if the tyres have been on
the car for over 6 years, they should be
checked by specialised personnel, to see if
they can still be used. Also remember to
check the spare wheel.
271
CAR MAINTENANCE
In the case of replacement, always fit new
tyres, avoiding those of dubious origin.
Alfa 156 uses Tubeless tyres. Never
use an inner tube with these tyres.
If a tyre is changed, also change the inflation valve
To allow even wear between the front and
rear tyres, it is advisable to change them
over every 10-15 thousand kilometres,
keeping them on the same side of the car
so as to not reverse the direction of rotation
(fig. 26).
WARNING
Do not cross switch the
tyres, moving them from
the right of the car to the left and
vice versa.
WARNING
Alloy rim painting involving temperatures exceeding 150°C should be avoided since
wheel mechanical characteristics
could be impaired.
A0B0589m
272
fig. 26
RUBBER HOSES
As far as the brake system and fuel supply rubber hoses are concerned, carefully follow the Scheduled Maintenance Programme
of this chapter. Indeed ozone, high temperatures and prolonged lack of fluid in the
system may cause hardening and cracking
of the hoses, with possible leaks. Careful
control is therefore necessary.
BLADES
Periodically clean the rubber part using special products TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35 is recommended.
Changing the windscreen wiper
blade (fig. 27)
WARNING The blade on driver’s side
is fitted with a spoiler that improves adhesion between the blade and the windscreen.
To prevent improper fitting, before changing
the blade, check the spoiler direction of the
blade to be replaced, then fit the new blade
following the same spoiler direction.
If the rubber blades are bent or worn they
should be replaced. In any case they should
be changed once a year.
Proceed as follows:
– Raise the windscreen wiper arm and position the blade so that it forms an angle
of 90° with the arm.
– Press tab (B) of the coupling spring and
remove the blade to be replaced from the
arm (A).
– When the spring is released from the
curved top of the arm, move the blade to allow the arm to be withdrawn through the slot.
CAR MAINTENANCE
WINDSCREEN/REAR
SCREEN WIPERS
– Insert a new blade passing it through the
curved top of the arm (A) through the slot.
A few simple notions can reduce the possibility of damage to the blades:
– Lift the blade to clamp tab (B) of the coupling spring with the curved top of the arm.
– If the temperature falls below zero,
make sure that ice has not frozen the rubber against the glass. If necessary, thaw using an antifreeze product.
– Lower the windscreen wiper arm.
– Remove any snow from the glass: in addition to protecting the blades, this prevents
effort on the motor and overheating.
A0B0580m
WARNING The blades may differ according to the versions. In any case, follow
the instructions provided in the packs available as spares from Alfa Romeo Authorized
Services.
– Do not operate the windscreen and rear
window wipers on dry glass.
WARNING
Driving with worn wiper
blades is a serious hazard,
because visibility is reduced in bad
weather.
fig. 27
273
CAR MAINTENANCE
SPRAY JETS
HEADLIGHT WASHERS
Make sure that the windscreen and headlight (where applicable) washer jets deliver a jet of fluid which is adequate and correctly directed.
(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
If the spray devices are not working check
that the supply circuit is not blocked. If necessary unblock the nozzles using a needle.
Regularly check that the spray jets are intact and clean fig. 28.
If it is necessary to direct the jet, contact
an Alfa Romeo Authorized Service.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM
ATMOSPHERIC AGENTS
The main causes of corrosion are:
– atmospheric pollution
– salty air and humidity (coastal areas, or
hot humid climates)
– seasonal environment conditions.
Not to be underestimated is also the abrasive action of wind-borne atmospheric dust
and sand and mud and gravel raised by other vehicles.
On your Alfa 156, Alfa Romeo has
implemented the best manufacturing technologies to effectively protect the bodywork
against corrosion.
These include:
A0B0581m
– Painting products and systems which
give the car particular resistance to corrosion
and abrasion.
– Use of galvanised (or pretreated) steel
sheets, with high resistance to corrosion.
– Spraying the underbody, engine compartment, wheel arches and other parts with
highly protective wax products.
274
fig. 28
RECOMMENDATIONS
TO PRESERVE THE BODYWORK
– Use of “open” boxed sections to prevent condensation and pockets of moisture
from triggering rust inside.
The paintwork does not only serve an aesthetic purpose but also protects the underlying sheet metal.
VEHICLE EXTERIOR AND
UNDERBODY WARRANTY
In the case of deep scrapes or scores, you
are advised to have the necessary touching up carried out immediately to avoid the
formation of rust.
The Alfa 156 is guaranteed against
perforation due to rust of any original element of the structure or body. For the general terms of this warranty, refer to the Warranty Booklet.
Paint
Only original products should be used for
touching up paint (see “Bodywork paint
identification label” in the “Technical specifications” chapter).
Normal paint maintenance consists in
washing at intervals depending on the conditions and environment of use. For example, in highly polluted areas, or if the roads
are sprayed with salt, it is wise to wash the
car more frequently.
To correctly wash the car:
1) Remove the aerial from the roof to prevent damage to it if the car is washed in
an automatic system.
2) Spray the body with a low pressure
jet of water.
3) Pass a sponge moistened with a light
detergent solution, rinsing the sponge frequently.
CAR MAINTENANCE
– Spraying of plastic parts, with a protective function, in the more exposed
points: underdoor, inner wheel arch linings,
edges, etc.
4) Rinse well with water and dry with a
jet of air or a chamois leather.
When drying, take particular care with the
less visible parts like door surrounds, bonnet
and around the headlights where water may
stagnate. The car should not be taken to a
closed area immediately, but left in the open
so that residual water can evaporate.
Detersives pollute water.
The car should therefore be
washed in areas equipped
for the collection and purification
of the liquid used in the washing
process.
275
CAR MAINTENANCE
Do not wash the car after it has been left
in the sun or with the bonnet hot: this may
alter the shine of the paintwork.
Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in
the same way as the rest of the vehicle.
Where possible, do not park under trees;
the resinous substance many species release
give the paint a dull appearance and increase the possibility of triggering rust
processes.
WARNING Bird droppings must be
washed off immediately and thoroughly as
the acid they contain is particularly aggressive.
Windows
Engine compartment
Use specific products to clean the windows.
Use clean cloths to avoid scratching or altering the transparency of the glass.
At the end of the winter the engine compartment should be carefully washed, without directing the jet against electronic control units. Contact a specialised workshop to
have this done.
WARNING The inside of the rearscreen
should be wiped gently with a cloth in the
direction of the filaments to avoid damaging the heating device.
Detergents cause water
pollution. Therefore the engine compartment should
be washed in areas equipped for
collecting and purifying the liquid
used in the washing process.
WARNING The vehicle should washed
with the engine cold and the ignition key at
STOP. After washing make sure that the
various protections (e.g. rubber caps and
various covers) have not been damaged or
removed.
276
CLEANING SEATS AND FABRIC
AND VELVET PARTS
Periodically check that water is not trapped
under the mats (due to water dripping off
shoes, umbrellas, etc.) which could cause
oxidisation of the sheet metal.
– Use a soft brush or vacuum cleaner to
remove dust. Velvet is cleaned better if the
brush is moistened.
WARNING
Never use inflammable
products like fuel oil ether
or rectified petrol for cleaning inside the car. The electrostatic discharges generated when rubbing to
clean may cause fire.
– Rub the seats with a sponge moistened
with a solution of water and neutral detergent.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS
INTERIOR PLASTIC PARTS
For routine cleaning of interior plastic parts
use a soft cloth moistened with water and
neutral soap. Remove grease or persisting
stains using appropriate solvent-free products designed to preserve appearance and
colour of plastic components.
IMPORTANT Never use spirit or petroleum to clean the instrument panel or other plastic parts.
CAR MAINTENANCE
INTERIOR FITTINGS
– Remove dried on dirt with a lightly
moistened chamois leather or cloth without pressing too hard.
– Remove liquid or grease stains with a
dry absorbent cloth without rubbing. Then
wipe with a soft cloth or chamois leather
with water and neutral soap. If the stain persists, use specific products, carefully following the instructions for use
WARNING Never use spirit or alcoholbased products.
WARNING
Do not keep aerosol cans in
the car. There is the risk
they might explode. Aerosol cans
must never be exposed to a temperature above 50°C. The temperature inside the car might go well
beyond that figure when exposed
to the sun’s rays.
277
ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON
A L FA 15 6 S P O R T WA G O N
In this chapter, you weill find all the specific information for Alfa 156 Sportwagon that integrate and complete the
previous chapters.
DOORS
Opening/closing from inside
REAR DOORS
Opening/closing from outside
– To open the door, only with the inside
knob lifted (A-fig. 1), pull the opening
handle (B-fig. 2).
– To close, press the knob (A-fig. 1)
also with the door open, then shut the door.
WARNING
Opening the rear doors is
only possible if the “child
safety” device is released.
– To open the door pull the handle(Afig. 3).
– To close it, press the knob (B-fig. 3)
also with the door open, then shut the door.
A0B0077m
278
fig. 1
A0B0078m
fig. 2
A0B0079m
fig. 3
SEATS
The rear doors are fitted with a locking device (A) which prevents them from being
opened from inside.
REAR SEAT
WARNING Each device only acts on the
door on which it is installed.
The device can only be engaged with the
doors open raising or lowering the control
with the ignition key.
Position 1 (control up) = Device engaged.
Position 2 (control down) = Device released.
The third headrest (centre) is not removable, whereas the side headrests may be removed as follows:
– Raise the headrests about 2 cm.
Headrest
The car is fitted with two headrests for the
side seats (fig. 5). On request for versions/markets where applicable, the car
may also be fitted with a third headrest for
the central seat (fig. 6).
– Press the buttons (A and B-fig. 5) at
the same time and remove the headrests.
– To refit the headrests keep the buttons
pressed (A and B-fig. 5) and insert them
completely.
ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON
CHILD SAFETY DEVICE (fig. 4)
To pull out the third headrest, push it upwards until hearing the stopping click.
WARNING Also follow the instructions
given in the chapter “getting to know your
car” under the paragraph “Child safety device”.
A0B0080m
fig. 4
A0B0094m
fig. 5
A0B0095m
fig. 6
279
ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON
WARNING
Remember that the third
headrest (central) should
be pulled out completely so that
the nape and not the neck rests on
it. Only in this position does it exert its protective action if the car
is hit from behind.
Ski compartment
This compartment can be used for carrying long loads.
To gain access to the compartment lower
the armrest, pull the handle (A-fig. 8) and
lower the lid on the armrest (fig. 9).
On versions fitted with the third headrest,
before lowering the lid on the armrest, lift
the headrest completely and set the fabric
protection.
Centre armrest (where required)
A0B0564m
fig. 7
WARNING Lay the bag in the passenger compartment before putting the skis in.
After carrying skis, let the bag dry (if wet),
then fold it correctly and insert it in the compartment.
WARNING
Always check that the load
are anchored properly to
prevent them being thrown against
the passengers in case of accident
or sharp braking.
To use the centre armrest, lower it as illustrated (fig. 7), using the handle (A).
280
On request for versions/markets where
applicable, the compartment can be fitted
with a bag for carrying skis.
A0B0097m
fig. 8
A0B0600m
fig. 9
OPERATION (fig. 10)
This is only possible with the ignition key
at MAR.
To operate the rearscreen wiper turn the
knob (A) to position (. The rearscreen
wiper works intermittently.
Pushing the lever (B) forwards the
rearscreen washer jet comes into operation
which is disengaged when the lever is released.
CHANGING THE BLADE
(fig. 11)
SPRAY JET (fig. 12)
The rearscreen wiper blade should be replaced together with the arm.
To replace:
– mark the position of the blade in relation to the rearscreen.
If the jet does not spray, check that there
is fluid in the windscreen washer reservoir:
see the corresponding paragraph in the chapter “Car maintenance”. Then check that the
holes on the jet (A) are not clogged and
free them using a pin, if necessary.
– Raise the lid (A), slacken the nut (B)
and remove the arm (C).
ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON
REARSCREEN WIPER –
REARSCREEN WASHER
– Correctly posiiton the new arm and firmly tighten the fastening nut.
– Lower the lid.
With the rearscreen washer, the wiper
comes into operation automatically for a few
seconds.
A0B0081m
fig. 10
A0B0082m
fig. 11
A0B0083m
fig. 12
281
ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON
LUGGAGE
COMPARTMENT
The boot lid can be opened from outside
the vehicle (pressing the button on the key)
and from inside the vehicle.
WARNING If the tailgate is not shut
properly, this will be shown by the corresponding warning light ´ and warning message on the Infocenter display.
OPENING FROM INSIDE
(fig. 13)
To open the tailgate from inside the passenger compartment pull the lever (A) at
the side of the driver’s seat.
WARNING
Only use the tailgate opening lever with the car stationary.
Lifting the tailgate is facilitated by the action of the gas springs.
The gas springs are calibrated to ensure correct
lifting of the tailgate with
the weights foreseen by the manufacturer. The addition of objects
(spoiler, etc.) may adversely affect
correct operation and safety in use
of the tailgate.
OPENING WITH REMOTE
CONTROL (fig. 14)
The boot can be opened by remote control
pressing the button (C) on the key, also
when the electronic alarm (where fitted) is
engaged.
In this case the alarm system switches off
volumetric protection and the tailgate control sensor. The system also sounds two
beeps and the direction indicators light up
for three seconds (with the exception of versions for certain markets).
Closing the boot again the control functions
are restored, the system sounds two beeps
and the direction indicators light up for three
seconds (with the exception of versions for
certain markets).
A0B0042m
282
fig. 13
A0B9000m
fig. 14
RESTRAINING THE LOAD
(fig. 16-17)
CAUTIONS FOR CARRYING
LUGGAGE
To lower the tailgate use the grip (A) on
the interior trim.
The loads carried can be held in place with
the belts hooked to the rings provided at the
corners of the boot.
On versions not fitted with the automatic
rear geometry control system, when travelling at night with a load in the boot, it is
necessary to adjust the height of the low
beams (see “Headlamps” paragraph in the
chapter “Getting to know your car”). For
correct use of the aiming device, also make
sure that the load does not exceed the values given in the same paragraph.
The rings also serve for fastening the luggage retainer net (available on request for
versions/markets where applicable c/o Alfa Romeo Authorized Services).
A0B0084m
fig. 15
A0B0085m
fig. 16
ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON
CLOSING THE TAILGATE
(fig. 15)
A0B0086m
fig. 17
283
ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON
WARNING
When using the boot, never exceed the maximum
permissible loads given in the
“Technical specifications” chapter.
Also make sure that the items contained in the boot are firmly secured, to prevent them being
thrown forward and harming the
passengers in the event of abrupt
braking.
WARNING
If you want to carry fuel in
a reserve can, you should
comply with legal regulations, only using a certified can suitably fastened to the load retainer rings at
the corner of the boot. However,
remember that this increases the
risk of fire in the event of an accident.
WARNING
Heavy luggage without
restraints could cause serious harm to the passengers in an
accident.
284
ODDMENTS COMPARTMENT
(fig. 18-19)
On the sides of the boot there are two recesses closed by a lid.
To open the cover, press button (A) and
turn it downwards. As optional for versions/markets where applicable, the oddment compartment on the left-hand side can
be provided with CD-Changer.
A0B0091m
fig. 18
A0B0092m
fig. 19
This is on the left-hand side of the boot.
To use the socket, open the lid (A). The
socket is supplied with the ignition switch at
MAR and can only be used with accessories
that absorb a maximum of 15A (power
180W).
Do not connect accessories with higher absorption to the socket. Prolonged current absorption might
drain the battery preventing the
engine from being started.
A0B0093m
fig. 20
OBJECTS RETAINER NET
(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
The net can be hooked in different positions (fig. 24-25-26-27) using housings (A and B-fig. 21) provided in the
front part of the boot and housings (C and
D-fig. 22) in the rear part.
A0B0101m
fig. 21
ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON
CURRENT SOCKET
(optional for versions/markets
where applicable) (fig. 20)
A0B0102m
fig. 22
285
ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON
To fasten the net, insert the hooks (Afig. 23) in the housings (B-fig. 23) and
push downwards.
To release the net, pull it upwards keeping
the connection point pressed (C-fig. 23).
A0B0104m
fig. 24
A0B0103m
286
fig. 23
A0B0106m
fig. 26
A0B0601m
fig. 25
A0B0602m
fig. 27
The luggage cover (A-fig. 28) can be
rolled up and removed.
To roll, remove the two rear pins (Bfig. 29) from their housings.
WARNING Accompany the cover when
rolling, holding it by the handle (C-fig. 28).
To remove the cover roll it and check that
the passenger compartment separation net
is also rolled (see following paragraph), then
pull the hooks back (A-fig. 30). Raise and
remove the cover from the boot.
To put the cover back on, insert the ends
of the reel in the respective housings, making sure that the catches are correctly locked
forwards making the green symbols at the
base of the actual button visible, then pull
it by the handle (C-fig. 28) and hook the
two rear pins (B-fig. 29).
A0B0603m
fig. 28
To avoid damage to the
cover do not rest any objects on it.
WARNING
In the event of an accident
or abrupt braking any objects on top of the cover might be
thrown into the passenger compartment, with the risk of harming
the occupants; use of the passenger compartment separation net is
recommended.
A0B0109m
fig. 29
ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON
LUGGAGE COVER
A0B0604m
fig. 30
287
ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON
UPPER PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT SEPARATION
NET (where required)
(fig. 31-32)
To rewind the net, release the ends from
the housings (B) and accompany it as it
winds.
The upper separation net between the passenger compartment and the boot is contained in the luggage cover reel (A).
The lower passenger compartment and
boot separation net (A) is contained in the
reel fastened under the housing of the luggage cover.
To lay the net, remove it from the reel and
hook the ends in the two housings (B).
To lay the net remove it from the reel and
fasten the hooks (B) to the rings (C).
A0B0111m
288
LOWER PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT SEPARATION
NET (fig. 33-34)
(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
fig. 31
A0B0112m
fig. 32
A0B0113m
fig. 33
EXTENDING THE BOOT
2/3 Partial extension (fig. 36)
The split rear seat makes partial (1/3 or
2/3) or total extension of the boot possible.
Extension of the right-hand side of the boot
makes it possible to carry one passenger on
the left-hand part of the rear seat.
To use the maximum loading volume, remove the luggage cover following the instructions given in the corresponding paragraph.
1/3 Partial extension (fig. 35)
Extension of the left-hand side of the boot
makes it possible to carry two passengers
on the right-hand part of the rear seat.
A0B0114m
fig. 34
A0B0605m
fig. 35
ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON
To rewind the net, release the hooks (B)
from the rings (C) and accompany it while
it winds.
A0B0606m
fig. 36
289
ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON
Total extension (fig. 37)
To extend the boot
Completely folding the rear seat makes the
maximum load volume available.
– Check that the lateral safety belt buckles (A-fig. 38) are located in their pockets on the seat back and that the tab (Bfig. 38) of the central abdominal safety
belts is hooked onto the support (Cfig. 38).
– Remove the roll with the luggage cover.
– Tilt the cushions forward pulling from
the handle (A-fig. 39) at the centre of
each cushion.
– remove the side headrests from the rear
seat and insert them in the special housings
on the cushions (fig. 40).
– If the car is fitted with the third headrest from the centre of the seat, lower it
completely.
A0B0119m
fig. 39
A0B0607m
290
fig. 37
A0B0118m
fig. 38
A0B0120m
fig. 40
– Fold the seat backs forward to obtain
a single loading surface with the boot floor.
To take the seats back to the
normal position
– Move the seat backs to the vertical position making sure that they are caught correctly.
WARNING The seat backs are correctly caught when the button (A-fig. 43)
next to each handle (B-fig. 43) is back in
the handle.
A0B0121m
fig. 41
– Remove the headrest and tilt the cushion backward, making sure that the safety
belts do not remain twisted in the hidden
section between the cushion and seat back.
– Refit the headrest on the seat back.
– Refit the roll with the luggage cover.
A0B0122m
fig. 42
ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON
– Release the seat back catch raising the
handle (A-fig. 41) for the right seat back
and handle (B-fig. 42) for the left seat
back.
A0B0123m
fig. 43
291
ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON
INTERNAL FITTINGS
REFUELLING
GRAB HANDLES (fig. 44)
EMERGENCY FUEL FLAP
OPENING (fig. 45)
There are two grab handles in correspondence with the front doors.
Two grab handles (A) are located above
the rear doors fitted with a coat hook (B).
ROOF BARS SKI RACK
(fig. 46) (optional for versions/
markets where applicable)
If the fuel flap opening lever fails to work,
pull the emergency cord (A) on the righthand side of the boot.
The car may be fitted with two longitudinal bars that can be used, with the addition of specific accessories, for carrying various items (skis, windsurf boards, etc.).
Never exceed the maximum permissible loads given in the “Technical specifications” chapter.
A0B0124m
292
fig. 44
A0B0125m
fig. 45
A0B0126m
fig. 46
(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
The fixed sound system, with cassette
player (radio with cassette player) or CD
player with parametric sound equalizer
(radio with CD player) has been designed
to suit the specific characteristics of the
passenger compartment, with a
personalised design that matches the
style of the dashboard. The sound system
instructions for use are described in the
attached supplement.
AUTOMATIC REAR
GEOMETRY CONTROL
(optional for versions/markets
where applicable)
The car is fitted with a semi-bearing hydropneumatic system with built-in self-levelling functions (due to an active element incorporated in the rear shock absorbers) and
damping, applied to the rear suspensions instead of conventional shock absorbers.
When the car is loaded with passengers
and luggage, the rear geometry lowers in
relation to the rigidity of the spring system
and the load. However, as soon as the car
moves off the system utilises the movements induced on the wheels by the roughness of the road surface to increase its bearing capacity and higher the body up to a
pre-established position that will be kept under any load condition.
The distance that must be covered to reach
the levelling condition is approx. 2,000 metres and it may vary depending on the road
bottom.
WARNING
When using the boot, never exceed the maximum
permissible loads given in the
“Technical specifications” chapter.
The load carried and its arrangement in the boot modify road holding of the car in any case even if
the geometry is kept constant by
the automatic device.
ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON
SOUND SYSTEM
293
ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON
IN THE EVENT
OF A PUNCTURE
TOOL AND SPARE WHEEL
HOUSING
(for versions/markets where
required) (fig. 47)
WARNING If the car is equipped with
“Fix&Go kit for tyre quick repair”, see the
instructions contained in the “In emergency”
chapter.
The tools and spare wheels are housed in
the boot floor, under the mat. To gain
access to them, raise or remove the boot
mat using the handle (A-fig. 47).
To take the container with the tools (B)
slacken the handle (C).
The spare wheel (D) can be taken after
removing the container with the tools.
IF AN EXTERIOR
LIGHT GOES OUT
WARNING Before changing a bulb, read
the warnings and precautions given in the
chapter “In an emergency”.
REVERSING LIGHTS AND REAR
FOG GUARDS
To change the bulbs (Type B, 21W):
– Open the tailgate.
– Remove the cover (A or B-fig. 48) in
correspondence with the light concerned,
withdrawing it at the side.
A0B0127m
294
fig. 47
A0B0128m
fig. 48
– Remove and replace the bulb concerned (spherical with bayonet coupling)
pressing lightly and turning counterclockwise (fig. 50):
– Reinsert the bulb holder unit fitting it correctly between the retainer tabs (E-fig. 49)
DIRECTION INDICATORS AND
SIDE/STOP LIGHTS
– Refit the lid (A or B-fig. 48) inserting
it from outside until it fits in.
To replace the bulbs (Type B, 21W direction indicators, 5/21W side/stop lights):
– Open the tailgate.
– Slacken the two fastening nuts (Afig. 51) and remove the protective cover
(B-fig. 51).
(F) reversing light bulb
(G) rear fog guard bulb
A0B0129m
fig. 49
A0B0130m
fig. 50
ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON
– Remove the bulb holder unit (Dfig. 49) pressing on the retainer tabs (Efig. 49).
A0B0131m
fig. 51
295
ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON
– Remove the bulb holder unit (Afig. 52) pressing on the retainer tab (Bfig. 52).
– Remove and replace the bulb concerned (spherical with bayonet coupling)
pressing lightly and turning counterclockwise (fig. 56):
(C) side light/stop light
NUMBER PLATE LIGHTS
– Refit the bulb holder (C-fig. 55) turning clockwise.
To replace the bulbs (Type A, 5W):
– Remove the number plate light unit using a flat-tipped screwdriver protected by a
soft cloth on the catch (A-fig. 54).
– Refit the complete unit (B-fig. 54)
firstly inserting the catches and then pressing in correspondence with the stopper (Afig. 54).
– Remove the unit (B-fig. 54).
– Remove the bulb holder (C-fig. 55)
turning clockwise and replace the bulb
(D-fig. 55) which snaps on.
(D) direction indicator.
A0B0134m
– Reinsert the bulb holder unit fitting the
retainer tabs correctly (B-fig. 52).
– Refit the protective cover (B-fig. 51)
fastening with nuts (A-fig. 51).
fig. 54
A0B0132m
296
fig. 52
A0B0133m
fig. 53
A0B0135m
fig. 55
The additional stop light is built into the
rear spoiler (fig. 56).
Refer to the Alfa Romeo Authorized Services for its replacement.
IF AN INTERIOR
LIGHTS GOES OUT
– Remove the bulb (B-fig. 58) pulling
outwards and releasing it from the side contacts.
WARNING Before changing a bulb, read
the warnings and precautions given in the
chapter “In an emergency”.
– Insert the new bulb fitting it correctly between the contacts.
– Refit the light inserting it and then pressing until the catch clicks into place.
TAILGATE LIGHT
To change the bulb (Type C, 10W):
ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON
ADDITIONAL STOP LIGHTS
(3rd STOP)
– Open the tailgate.
– Remove the light (A-fig. 57) levering
with a flat-tipped screwdriver in the point
shown.
A0B0136m
fig. 56
A0B0139m
fig. 57
A0B0140m
fig. 58
297
ALFA 156 SPORTWAGON
IF A FUSE BLOWS
System/Component
The specific fuse for Sportwagon versions
is located in the central fuseholder above the
main fusebox and access to it is gained removing the protective panel.
WARNING Before changing a fuse or relay, read the warnings and precautions given in the chapter “In an emergency”.
A0B0141m
298
fig. 59
Additional current
socket in the boot
Fuse no.
Amperage
Location
10
20A
fig. 59
IDENTIFICATION DATA
BODY LABEL
The identification data should be recorded.
The identification data is carried on labels located in the following positions (fig. 1-2):
The body label carrying the following information is located in the engine bay to one
side of the right-hand shock absorber upper connection:
– Type of vehicle: ZAR 932000
1 - Identification label
2 - Body label
3 - Bodywork paint identification label
- Saloon versions = fig. 1
- Sportwagon versions = fig. 2
4 - Engine label.
– Manufacturer’s serial number (chassis
number).
On the rear left-hand side, gearbox side.
For some versions/markets the marking
is partially covered by a protection. To see
the marking completely, remove the cap
turning counter-clockwise and raise the protection.
A0B0590m
fig. 1
ENGINE LABELS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
T E C H N I C A L S P E C I F I C AT I O N S
A0B0058m
fig. 2
299
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
BODYWORK PAINT
IDENTIFICATION LABEL
IDENTIFICATION LABEL
On the Saloon versions, the plate is applied in the internal part of the luggage compartment (3-fig. 1), while on the Sportwagon versions it is applied on the righthand internal edge of the tailgate (3fig. 2). The plate carries the following data (fig. 3):
A. Paint manufacturer
B.
Name of colour
C.
Colour code
This is located in the engine bay on the
front crossmember (fig. 4).
It carries the following identification data:
A. Space for details of national homologation
B. Space for punching the consecutive
chassis number
C. Space available for maximum
weights authorised by various national laws
D. Colour code for touching up and respraying.
A0B0059m
300
fig. 3
A0B0076m
fig. 4
D. Space for version and any supplementary indications to those specified
E. Space for smoke index (diesel versions only)
F. Space for punching manufacturer’s
name.
Engine code
Body code
(Saloon versions)
(Sportwagon versions)
1.6 T.SPARK
AR32104
AR32103 (*)
932A4100 31L
932A4100 31H (*)
932A4B00 32F (*)
932B4100 38H
932B4100 38G (*)
932B4B00 39E (*)
1.8 T.SPARK
AR32205
932A3100 30L
932A3100 30H (*)
932B3100 37H
932B3100 37G (*)
2.0 JTS
937A1000
932A2000 (*)
932AXA00 52E
932AXA00 52D (*)
932BXA00 53E
932BXA00 53D (*)
2.0 JTS Selespeed
937A1000
932A2000 (*)
932AXA01 54E
932AXA01 54D (*)
932BXA01 55E
932BXA01 55D (*)
2.5 V6 24V
AR32405
932A1100 26F
932B1100 33E
2.5 V6 24V Q-System
AR32405
932A1101 27F
932B1101 34E
JTD
937A2000
932A2C00 44G
932B2C00 45F
JTD 16V Multijet
192A5000
937A5000 (**)
937A4000 (*)
192B1000 (*)
932AXE00 60E
932AXN00 71 (**)
932AXG00 62C (*)
932AXL0066 (*)
932BXE00 61E
932BXN00 72 (**)
932BXG00 63C (*)
932BXL00 67 (*)
JTD 20V Multijet
841G000
841M000
932AXF00 64B
932AXM00 68 (*)
932BXF00 65C
932BXM00 69 (*)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE AND BODY VERSION CODES
(*) Version for specific markets
(**) 150 CV version (for versions/markets where applicable)
301
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
1.6 T.SPARK
1.8 T.SPARK
2.0 JTS
2.0 JTS
Selespeed
2.5 V6 24V
2.5 V6 24V
Q-System
AR32104
AR32205
937A1000
937A1000
AR32405
AR32405
Otto
Otto
Otto
Otto
Otto
Otto
4 in line
4 in line
4 in line
4 in line
6 in 60° V
6 in 60° V
82 x 75.65
82 x 82.7
83 x 91
83 x 91
88 x 68.3
88 x 68.3
1598 cm3
1747 cm3
1970 cm3
1970 cm3
2492 cm3
2492 cm3
kW
HP
rpm
88
120
6200
103
140
6500
121
165
6400
121
165
6400
141
192
6300
141
192
6300
Nm
kgm
rpm
146
14.9
4200
163
16.6
3900
206
21
3250
206
21
3250
218
22.2
5000
218
22.2
5000
NGK PFR6B +
NGK PMR7A
NGK BKR6EKPA +
NGK PMR7A
NGK PFR6B +
NGK PMR7A
NGK BKR6EKPA +
NGK PMR7A
NGK PFR6B
NGK PFR6B
NGK R PFR6B
NGK R PFR6B
NGK BKR6EKPA
NGK BKR6EKPA
Unleaded
petrol
95 RON
(specification
EN228)
Unleaded
petrol
95 RON
(specification
EN228)
Unleaded
petrol
95 RON
(specification
EN228)
Unleaded
petrol
95 RON
(specification
EN228)
Unleaded
petrol
95 RON
(specification
EN228)
Unleaded
petrol
95 RON
(specification
EN228)
Code type
Cycle
No./position cylinders
Piston
bore and stroke
mm
Total displacement
Maximum horsepower
(EEC):
at
Maximum torque (EEC):
at
Spark plugs (*)
Fuel
302
JTD 16V
Multijet
JTD 16V
Multijet (**)
JTD 16V
Multijet (*)
JTD 16V
Multijet (*)
JTD 20V
Multijet
JTD 20V
Multijet (*)
937A2000
192A5000
937A5000
937A4000
192B1000
841G000
841M000
Diesel
Diesel
Diesel
Diesel
Diesel
Diesel
Diesel
4 in line
4 in line
4 in line
4 in line
4 in line
5 in line
4 in line
82 x 90.4
82 x 90.4
82 x 90.4
82 x 90.4
82 x 90.4
82 x 90.4
82 x 90.4
1910 cm3
1910 cm3
1910 cm3
1910 cm3
1910 cm3
2387 cm3
2387 cm3
kW
HP
rpm
85
115
4000
103
140
4000
110
150
4000
93
126
4000
100
136
4000
129
175
4000
120
163
4000
Nm
kgm
rpm
275
28
2000
305
31
2000
305
31
2000
305
31
2000
305
31
2000
385
39.3
2000
385
39.3
2000
Diesel fuel for
motor vehicles
(Specification
EN590)
Diesel fuel for
motor vehicles
(Specification
EN590)
Diesel fuel for
motor vehicles
(Specification
EN590)
Diesel fuel for
motor vehicles
(Specification
EN590)
Diesel fuel for
motor vehicles
(Specification
EN590)
Diesel fuel for
motor vehicles
(Specification
EN590)
Diesel fuel for
motor vehicles
(Specification
EN590)
Code type
Cycle
No./position cylinders
Piston bore and stroke
mm
Total displacement
Maximum horsepower
(EEC):
at
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
JTD
Maximum torque (EEC):
at
Fuel
(*) Version for specific markets
(**) For versions/markets where applicable
303
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL SUPPLY
1.6 T.SPARK
1.8 T.SPARK
2.0 JTS
2.0 JTS
Selespeed
2.5 V6 24V
2.5 V6 24V
Q-System
JTD
JTD 16V
Multijet
JTD 20V
Multijet
Electronic
injection
Multi Point
Direct injection
BOSCH
Direct injection
BOSCH
Electronic
injection
Multi Point
Electronic
injection
Multi Point
Direct injection
BOSCH
COMMON RAIL
Direct injection
BOSCH
COMMON RAIL
1-3-4-2
1-3-4-2
1-3-4-2
1-4-2-5-3-6
1-4-2-5-3-6
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
1-3-4-2
1-2-4-5-3
Supply
Firing order
Injection order
WARNING
Alterations or repairs to the supply system not carried out correctly or without taking account of the
technical specifications of the system, may cause abnormal functioning with the risk of fire.
TRANSMISSION
1.6 T.SPARK - 1.8 T.SPARK
2.0 JTS
2.0 JTS
Selespeed
2.5 V6 24V
2.5 V6 24V
Q-System
JTD
JTD 16V
Multijet
JTD 20V
Multijet
Five forward gears
plus reverse with
synchronisers
for forward speeds
Five forward
gears and
reverse
with
electronic
control
Six forward
gears plus
reverse all
synchronised
Four forward
gears
plus reverse
with
electronic
control
Five forward
gears
plus reverse
all
synchronised
Six forward
gears
plus reverse
all
synchronised
Six forward
gears
plus reverse
all
synchronised
Clutch
Dry single disk
with hydraulic control
Dry
single disk
with
electrohydraulic
control
Dry
single disk
with
hydraulic
control
Lock-up
Dry
single disk
with hydraulic
control
Dry
single disk
with hydraulic
control
Dry
single disk
with hydraulic
control
Drive
Front
Front
Front
Front
Front
Front
Front
Gearbox
304
If examined by an expert eye, the appearance of a spark plug is a sound clue
for locating a fault, even if not involving the
ignition system. Therefore if you are experiencing any engine problems, it is important to have the spark plugs checked by Alfa Romeo Authorized Services.
Clean, intact spark plugs are determinant
with regard to engine efficiency and for reducing the emission of pollutants.
Spark plugs should be replaced at the intervals
specified in the Scheduled
Maintenance Programme. Only use
spark plugs of the specified type: if
the thermal capacity is inadequate
or if the envisaged life is not guaranteed inconveniences may ensue.
BRAKES
Service brakes:
– front
1.6 T.SPARK
1.8 T.SPARK
2.0 JTS
2.0 JTS
Selespeed
2.5 V6 24V
2.5 V6 24V
Q-System
JTD
JTD 16V
Multijet
JTD 20V
Multijet
Self-ventilated
disk
Disk
Self-ventilated
disk
Disk
Self-ventilated
disk
Disk
Self-ventilated
disk
Disk
Self-ventilated
disk
Disk
Self-ventilated
disk
Disk
Self-ventilated
disk
Disk
Self-ventilated
disk
Disk
– rear
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
SPARK PLUG
Wheel anti-look system (ABS) with electronic braking distribution.
Servo-brake. Electronic control with brake pad wear sensors. Gasket of ecological type.
Parking brake
Controlled by hand lever operating rear brakes.
STEERING
1.6 T.SPARK
1.8 T.SPARK
2.0 JTS
Selespeed
2.5 V6 24V
2.5 V6 24V
Q-System
JTD-JTD 16V
Multijet
JTD 20V
Multijet
Rack and pinion.
Hydraulic power steering with liquid reservoir in engine compartment
Type
Turning radius
(between pavements)
2.0 JTS
11.1 m
11.1 m
11.1 m
11.1 m
11.6 m
11.6 m
11.1 m
11.1
305
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
WHEELS AND TYRES
1.6 T.SPARK
IMPRESSION
Versions
1.6 T.SPARK
PROGRESSION
1.6 T.SPARK
DISTINCTIVE
1.8 T.SPARK
IMPRESSION
1.8 T.SPARK
PROGRESSION
1.8 T.SPARK
DISTINCTIVE
Standard fittings
Steel wheel
Tyres
6J x 15”
6J x 15”
185/65 R15” 88H (▼) 185/65 R15” 88H (▼)
Alloy wheel
Tyres
Spare
wheel:
6J x 15”
6J x 15”
185/65 R15” 88V (▼) 185/65 R15” 88V (▼)
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)
– rim
– tyre
4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M
4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M
4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)
4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M
4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M
4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M
Optional fittings
Alloy wheel
Tyre
Alloy wheel
Tyres
Alloy wheel
Tyres
6,5J x 15”
6,5J x 15” (❒)
205/60 R15” 91V (▼) 205/60 R15” 91V (▼)
6,5J x 15”
6,5J x 15”
205/60 R15” 91V (▼) 205/60 R15” 91V (▼)
6,5J x 16” (❒)
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●) 205/55 R16” 91V (●)
7J x 17 ”
215/45 ZR17 (*)
7J x 17”
215/45 ZR17“ (*)
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)
7J x 17”
215/45 ZR17“ (*)
7J x 17”
215/45 ZR17“ (*)
(*) = Snow chains may not be used on this tyres
(●) = Tyres on which chains can be fitted: use snow chains with reduced size with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 9 mm.
(▼) = Tyres on which chains can be fitted: use snow chains with reduced size with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 12 mm.
(❒) = Excluding Sportwagon versions
Winter tyres: winter tyres with “Q” min. speed index can be used.
306
2.0 JTS
PROGRESSION
2.0 JTS
DISTINCTIVE
2.0 JTS Selespeed
PROGRESSION
2.0 JTS Selespeed
DISTINCTIVE
2.5 V6 24V
PROGRESSION
Standard fittings
Steel wheel
Tyres
6J x 15”
6,5J x 15”
185/65 R15” 88V (▼) 205/60 R15” 91V (▼)
Alloy wheel
Tyres
Spare
wheel:
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)
– rim
– tyre
4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M
4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M
6,5J x 15”
205/60 R15” 91W (▼)
6,5J x 15”
205/60 R15” 91V (▼)
4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M
4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M
4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M
4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
2.0 JTS
IMPRESSION
Versions
Optional fittings
Alloy wheel
Tyre
Alloy wheel
Tyre
Alloy wheel
Tyres
6,5J x 15”
205/60 R15” 91V (▼)
6,5J x 15”
6,5J x 15”
205/60 R15” 91V (▼) 205/60 R15” 91V (▼)
6,5J x 15”
205/60 R15” 91W (▼)
6,5J x 16”
6,5J x 16”
6,5J x 16”
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●) 205/55 R16” 91V (●) 205/55 R16” 91V (●) 205/55 R16” 91V (●)
7J x 17”
215/45 ZR17“ (*)
7J x 17”
215/45 ZR17“ (*)
7J x 17”
215/45 ZR17” (*)
7J x 17”
215/45 ZR17” (*)
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91W (●)
7J x 17”
215/45 ZR17” (*)
(*) = Snow chains may not be used on this tyres
(●) = Tyres on which chains can be fitted: use snow chains with reduced size with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 9 mm.
(▼) = Tyres on which chains can be fitted: use snow chains with reduced size with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 12 mm.
Winter tyres: winter tyres with “Q” min. speed index can be used.
307
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Versions
2.5 V6 24V
Q-System
PROGRESSION
2.5 V6 24V
Q-System
DISTINCTIVE
2.5 V6 24V
DISTINCTIVE
JTD
IMPRESSION
JTD
PROGRESSION
Standard fittings
Steel wheel
Tyres
Alloy wheel
Tyres
Spare wheel:
– rim
– tyre
6J x 15”
6J x 15”
185/65 R15” 88V (▼) 185/65 R15” 88V (▼)
6,5J x 15”
205/60 R15” 91W (▼)
4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91W (●)
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91W (●)
4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M
4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)
4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M
4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M
4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M
Optional fittings
Alloy wheel
Tyre
6,5J x 15”
205/60 R15” 91W (▼)
Alloy wheel
Tyres
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91W (●)
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91W (●)
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91W (●)
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)
Alloy wheel
Tyres
7J x 17”
215/45 ZR17” (*)
7J x 17”
215/45 ZR17” (*)
7J x 17”
215/45 ZR17” (*)
7J x 17”
215/45 ZR17“ (*)
7J x 17”
215/45 ZR17“ (*)
6,5J x 15”
6,5J x 15”
205/60 R15” 91V (▼) 205/60 R15” 91V (▼)
(*) = Snow chains may not be used on this tyres
(●) = Tyres on which chains can be fitted: use snow chains with reduced size with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 9 mm.
(▼) = Tyres on which chains can be fitted: use snow chains with reduced size with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 12 mm.
Winter tyres: winter tyres with “Q” min. speed index can be used.
308
JTD
DISTINCTIVE
JTD 16V Multijet
IMPRESSION
JTD 16V Multijet
PROGRESSION
6J x 15”
185/65 R15” 88V (▼)
6J x 15”
185/65 R15” 88V (▼)
JTD 16V Multijet
DISTINCTIVE
JTD 20V Multijet
PROGRESSION
JTD 20V Multijet
DISTINCTIVE
Standard fittings
Steel wheel
Tyres
Alloy wheel
Tyres
Spare wheel:
– rim
– tyre
6,5J x 15”
205/60 R15” 91V (▼)
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)
4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M
4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M
6,5J x 15”
205/60 R15” 91V (▼)
6,5J x 15”
205/60 R15” 91V (▼)
4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)
4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M
4J x 15”
T125/80 R15” 95M
Optional fittings
Alloy wheel
Tyre
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Versions
6,5J x 15”
205/60 R15” 91V (▼)
Alloy wheel
Tyres
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)
6,5J x 16”
205/55 R16” 91V (●)
Alloy wheel
Tyres
7J x 17”
215/45 ZR17“ (*)
7J x 17”
215/45 ZR17“ (*)
7J x 17”
215/45 ZR17“ (*)
7J x 17”
215/45 ZR17“ (*)
(*) = Snow chains may not be used on this tyres
(●) = Tyres on which chains can be fitted: use snow chains with reduced size with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 9 mm.
(▼) = Tyres on which chains can be fitted: use snow chains with reduced size with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 12 mm.
Winter tyres: winter tyres with “Q” min. speed index can be used.
309
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TYRE INFLATION PRESSURES COLD
Tyres
185/65 R15” (▼)
Tyres
205/60 R15” (▼)
Tyres
215/45 ZR17” (*)
front
rear
front
rear
front
rear
front
rear
Reduced load (2 occupants) bar
2.2
2.2
2.4
2.4
2.2
2.2
2.4
2.4
Full load
2.5
2.5
2.6
2.6
2.5
2.5
2.6
2.6
bar
Compact spare
wheel
125/80 R15”
4.2
(*) = Snow chains may not be used on this tyres
(●) = Tyres on which chains can be fitted: use snow chains with reduced size with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 9 mm.
(▼) = Tyres on which chains can be fitted: use snow chains with reduced size with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 12 mm.
With the tyre hot the inflating pressure should be +0.3 bar compared with the specified rating. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.
With winter tyres the inflation pressure should be +0.2 bar compared with the specified rating.
RIMS AND TYRES
Pressed steel or alloy rims.
Radial Tubeless tyres.
The Log book shows all the homologated
tyres.
WARNING In the event of any discrepancies between this Handbook and the vehicle Log Book, only the latter should be considered.
310
Tyres
205/55 R16” (●)
While the specified dimensions remain the
same, for driving safety, the vehicle must
be fitted with tyres of the same brand and
type on all wheels.
WARNING Do not use inner tubes with
Tubeless tyres.
205 = Nominal width (S, distance
in mm between the sides).
Below are the instructions necessary to
know the meaning of the code stamped on
the tyre.
60
= Percentage height/width (H/S)
ratio.
R
= Radial tyre.
ZR
= Radial tyre with speed above
240 kph.
15
= Rim diameter in inches. (Ø).
91
= Load index (capacity), e.g. 91 =
615 kg. Not present in ZR tyres.
The code may be like one of the examples
given below.
Example:
205/60 R 15 91V
V,Z = Maximum speed index. In ZR tyres
the speed index Z is before the R.
or:
215/45 ZR 17
A0B0395m
fig. 5
Load index (capacity)
60 = 250 kg
61 = 257 kg
62 = 265 kg
63 = 272 kg
64 = 280 kg
65 = 290 kg
66 = 300 kg
67 = 307 kg
68 = 315 kg
69 = 325 kg
70 = 335 kg
71 = 345 kg
72 = 355 kg
73 = 365 kg
74 = 375 kg
75 = 387 kg
76 = 400 kg
77 = 412 kg
78 = 425 kg
79 = 437 kg
80 = 450 kg
81 = 462 kg
82 = 475 kg
83 = 487 kg
84 = 500 kg
85 = 515 kg
86 = 530 kg
87 = 545 kg
88 = 560 kg
89 = 580 kg
90 = 600 kg
91 = 615 kg
92 = 630 kg
93 = 650 kg
94 = 670 kg
95 = 690 kg
96 = 710 kg
97 = 730 kg
98 = 750 kg
99 = 775 kg
100 = 800 kg
101 = 825 kg
102 = 850 kg
103 = 875 kg
104 = 900 kg
105 = 925 kg
106 = 950 kg
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CORRECT TYRE READING
(fig. 5)
311
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Maximum speed index
Q = up to 160 km/h.
R
= up to 170 km/h.
S
= up to 180 km/h.
T
= up to 190 km/h.
U = up to 200 km/h.
Maximum speed index for snow
tyres
Q M + S = up to 160 kph.
T M + S = up to 190 kph.
COMPACT SPARE WHEEL
Pressed steel rim.
V = up to 210 km/h.
Tubeless tyre.
W = up to 270 km/h.
Y
= up to 300 km/h.
Below are the instructions necessary to
know the meaning of the code stamped on
the rim, as shown in fig. 5.
H M + S = up to 210 kph.
H = up to 210 km/h.
ZR = up to 240 km/h.
CORRECT RIM READING
Example:
6.5 J x 16 H2 ET 43
For specific markets normally-sized spare
wheel.
6.5
= rim width in inches (1)
J
= rim drop centre outline (side
projection where the tyre bead
rests (2)
16
= rim nominal diameter in inches
(corresponds to diameter of the
tyre to be mounted) (3 = Ø)
H2
= “hump” shape and number (relief on the circumference holding the Tubeless tyre bead on
the rim)
ET 43 = camber angle (distance between disk/rim line and wheel
rim centre line)
312
Front wheels:
All types
(excluding versions with Sports Kit)
Sports Kit
– camber
– 0° 39´ ± 20´
– 1° 6’ ± 20’
– caster
3° 55´ ± 30´
4° 3’ ± 30’
– toe-in
– 1 ± 0.6 mm (*) (– 9 ± 5´ mm)
– 0 ± 0.6mm (*) (– 0’ ± 5’)
– camber
– 35´ ± 20´
– 1°7’ ± 20’
– toe-in
3 ± 1 mm (*) (27´ ± 9´)
3 ± 1 mm (*) (27’± 9’)
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
WHEEL GEOMETRY
Rear wheels:
(*) The toe-in value, primes to mm conversion, is always calculated taking into account a 15" rim regardless of rims actually used. Should it be impossible to
set the 15" rim at the test bench, refer to primes value. The toe-in value, tolerance included, shall always be evenly distributed between the two wheels.
313
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
PERFORMANCE
SALOON
VERSIONS
1.6
T.SPARK
1.8
T.SPARK
2.0 JTS
2.0 JTS
Selespeed
Maximum speed
2.5 V6 24V 2.5 V6 24V
Q-System
JTD
JTD 16V
Multijet
JTD 16V
Multijet (*)
JTD 20V
Multijet
200 km/h
208 km/h
220 km/h
230 km/h
227 km/h
195 km/h
209 km/h
212 km/h
225 km/h
Acceleration
from 0-100 km/h
10.5 s
9.4 s
8.2 s
7.3 s
8.5 s
10.3 s
9.3 s
9.1 s
8.3 s
Kilometer with
standing start
31.8 s
30.7 s
29.8 s
27.8 s
29.0 s
32.6 s
31 s
30.0 s
29.1 s
JTD
JTD 16V
Multijet
JTD 16V
Multijet (*)
JTD 20V
Multijet
(*) 150 CV version (for versions/markets where applicable)
SPORTWAGON
VERSIONS
1.6
T.SPARK
1.8
T.SPARK
2.0 JTS
2.0 JTS
Selespeed
Maximum speed
200 km/h
208 km/h
220 km/h
230 km/h
227 km/h
195 km/h
209 km/h
212 km/h
225 km/h
Acceleration
from 0-100 km/h
11.0 s
9.7 s
8.2 s
7.4 s
8.5 s
10.7 s
9.7 s
9.5 s
8.6 s
Kilometer with
standing start
32.3 s
31.0 s
29.8 s
27.9 s
29.2 s
32.9 s
31.3 s
30.3 s
29.4 s
(*) 150 CV version (for versions/markets where applicable)
314
2.5 V6 24V 2.5 V6 24V
Q-System
fig. 6
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
DIMENSIONS
A0A0591m
The values given in brackets refer to the 1.6 T.SPARK, 1.8 T.SPARK, JTD, JTD 16V Multijet and JTD 20V Multijet
The dimensions are expressed in mm
The height indicated is for an unladen car
On request for versions/markets where applicable the car may be fitted with rear spoiler and miniskirts painted the same colour as the car.
315
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
A0A0592m
fig. 7
The values given in brackets refer to the 1.6 T.SPARK, 1.8 T.SPARK, JTD, JTD 16V Multijet and JTD 20V Multijet
The dimensions are expressed in mm
The height indicated is for an unladen car.
316
Capacity (dm3)
WEIGHTS
1.6 T.SPARK
1.8 T.SPARK
2.0 JTS
2.0 JTS
Selespeed
2.5 V6 24V
2.5 V6 24V
Q-System
JTD
JTD 16V
Multijet
JTD 20V
Multijet
378
378
378
378
378
378
378
378
- SALOON VERSIONS
1.6
T.SPARK
1.8
T.SPARK
2.0 JTS
2.0 JTS
Selespeed
Kerb
weight
1265 kg
1265 kg
1285 kg
1285 kg
1355 kg
Max. permitted
weight (*)
1785 kg
1785 kg
1805 kg
1805 kg
Payload including
driver (**)
520 kg
520 kg
520 kg
Towable weight
1300 kg
1300 kg
60 kg
60 kg
Max. load on ball
2.5 V6 24V 2.5 V6 24V
Q-System
JTD
JTD 16V
Multijet
JTD 20V
Multijet
1385 kg
1305 kg
1305 kg
1305 kg
1855 kg
1885 kg
1805 kg
1805 kg
1885 kg
520 kg
500 kg
500 kg
500 kg
500 kg
500 kg
1300 kg
1300 kg
1400 kg
1400 kg
1300 kg
1300 kg
1300 kg
60 kg
60 kg
60 kg
60 kg
60 kg
60 kg
60 kg
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT - SALOON VERSIONS
(*) Weight not to be exceeded. The Driver must arrange the goods in the luggage compartment and/or load surface so that they comply with these limits.
(**) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch etc.) the unladen weight increases, thus reducing the payload as specified in the maximum weight
allowed.
317
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT
- SPORTWAGON VERSIONS
1.6 T.SPARK
1.8 T.SPARK
2.0 JTS
2.0 JTS
Selespeed
2.5 V6 24V
2.5 V6 24V
Q-System
JTD
JTD 16V
Multijet
JTD 20V
Multijet
Capacity (dm3)
360
360
360
360
360
360
360
360
Capacity with
rear seat back
folded (dm3)
1180
1180
1180
1180
1180
1180
1180
1180
WEIGHTS
- SPORTWAGON VERSIONS
T.SPARK
1.8
T.SPARK
2.0 JTS
2.0 JTS
Selespeed
2.5 V6 24V 2.5 V6 24V
Q-System
JTD
JTD 16V
Multijet
JTD 20V
Multijet
Kerb weight
kg
1315
1315
1335
1405
1435
1355
1355
1435
Max. permitted
weight (*)
kg
1830
1830
1850
1900
1930
1850
1850
1930
Payload including
driver (**)
kg
515
515
515
495
495
495
495
495
Towable weight
kg
1300
1300
1300
1400
1400
1300
1300
1400
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
Max. load on ball
(*) Weight not to be exceeded. The Driver must arrange the goods in the luggage compartment and/or load surface so that they comply with these limits.
(**) If special equipment is fitted (sunroof, tow hitch etc.) the unladen weight increases, thus reducing the payload as specified in the maximum weight allowed.
318
1.6
1.8
T.SPARK T.SPARK
Fuel tank:
litres
– including a reserve of litres
2.0 JTS
2.0 JTS
Selespeed
2.5 V6
24V
2.5 V6
24V
Q-System
JTD
JTD 16V
Multijet
JTD 20V
Multijet
Specified fuels
Recommended products
63 ●
9●
63 ●
9●
63 ●
9●
63 ●
9●
63 ●
9●
63 ●
9●
63 ❍
9❍
63 ❍
9❍
63 ❍
9❍
● Unleaded petrol at not
less than 95 R.O.N
(specification EN228)
❍ Diesel fuel for motor
vehicles (Specification EN590)
6.9
6.9
6.9
6.9
9.2
9.2
6.1
6.1
7.25
Mixture of distilled water and
PARAFLU 11 (blue) at 50% or
PARAFLU UP (red) at 50%
■ SELENIA 20K for Alfa
Romeo
◆ SELENIA RACING
❑ SELENIA WR
Engine cooling
system
litres
Oil sump and filter
litres
4.4 ■
4.4 ■
4.4 ◆
4.4 ◆
5.9 ■
5.9 ■
4.5 ❑
4.5 ❑
5❑
Mechanical gearbox/
differential
litres
2
2
2
2
–
–
2
2
3.1
Mechanical gearbox/
differential
litres
–
–
–
–
2
–
–
–
–
Selespeed gearbox
actuation hydraulic system
litres
–
–
–
0.6
–
–
–
–
–
TUTELA CAR CS SPEED
Q-System
automatic gearbox
litres
–
–
–
–
–
3.8
–
–
–
TUTELA GI/2
2,5
5.3
2,5
5.3
2,5
5.3
2,5
5.3
2,5
5.3
2,5
5.3
2,5
5.3
2,5
5.3
2,5
5.3
Mixture of water and liquid
TUTELA PROFESSIONAL
SC 35
Windscreen washer and
rearscreen washer fluid
reservoir:
litres
– with headlamp washer litres
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
REFILLING
TUTELA CAR
ZC 75 Synth
TUTELA CAR MATRYX
■ For decidedly sportive use of the car, fully synthetic SELENIA RACING SAE 10W-60 engine oil is recommended.
For use in particularly harsh weather conditions SELENIA PERFORMER MULTIPOWER SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended.
319
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
USABLE PRODUCTS AND THEIR SPECIFICATIONS
Use
Lubricants for petrol
engines 2.0 JTS
and 2.0 JTS Selespeed
Lubricants for
petrol engines (*)
Quality features of fluids and lubricants
for correct vehicle operation
Synthetic oil, SAE 10W-60 grade
SELENIA RACING
Synthetic-based engine oil, SAE 10W-40 grade
that pass ACEA A3 and API SL specifications.
SELENIA 20K
for Alfa Romeo
Synthetic-based engine oil SAE 5W-30 grade,
that pass API SL, ACEA A1-A5, FIAT 9.55535-M1 specifications.
Synthetic-based engine oils SAE 5W-40 grade
that pass ACEA B4 and API CF, FIAT 9.55535-M2 specifications.
Applications
SELENIA PERFORMER
MULTIPOWER
SELENIA WR
A0B0682m
Lubricants for
diesel engines
Recommended fluids
and lubricants
(*) For decidedly sportive use of the car fully synthetic SELENIA RACING SAE 10W60 engine oil is recommended.
For use in particularly harsh weather conditions SELENIA PERFORMER MULTIPOWER SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended.
SELENIA PERFORMER MULTIPOWER is not required when using SELENIA RACING 10W-60 engine oil.
320
WARNING Do not top up with oil with different specifications that the oil already in the engine.
Quality features of fluids and lubricants
for correct vehicle operation
Recommended fluids
and lubricants
Applications
Synthetic-based engine oil, SAE 75W-80 EP grade that passes API GL5
and MIL-L-2105 D Lev specifications
TUTELA CAR
ZC 75 Synth
Mechanical gearbox and
differential
SAE 75W-85 completly synthetic engine oil.
Meets API GL 4 and ZF TE ML06 (B&C) LEVEL, ALLISON C4 specifications
TUTELA CAR
MATRYX
Mechanical gearbox and
differential for high
temperatures
“ATF DEXRON II D LEV”, type oil
TUTELA GI/2
Automatic gearbox
“ATF DEXRON III” type specific oil
TUTELA CAR
CS SPEED
Selespeed transmission
electrically-operated
electrohydraulic drive
“ATF DEXRON II D LEV”, SAE 10W type oil
TUTELA GI/A
Hydraulic power steering
Lithium-soap-based grease with molybdenum bisulphate.
Consistency NLGI 2
TUTELA MRM 2
C.V. joints
FMVSS n° 116 DOT 4, ISO 4925, SAE J1704,
CUNA NC 956-01 synthetic fluid
TUTELA CAR TOP 4
for Alfa Romeo
Hydraulic brake and
clutch control
Protective with antifreeze action, blue color, based on inhibited monoethylene
glycol, CUNA NC 956-16
PARAFLU 11 (*)
or
Protective with antifreeze action, red colour, based on inhibited monoethylen
glycol, with O.A.T.-based organic formula, that passes CUNA NC 956-16,
ASTM D 3306 specifications
PARAFLU UP (*)
Cooling ducts
Percentage:
50% down to –35°C
Additive for
fuel oil
Additive for fuel oil with protective action for Diesel engines
DIESEL MIX
To be mixed with the fuel
oil (25 cc per 10 litres)
Windscreen/
rearscreen/headlamp
washer fluid
Mixture of spirits and surface-active agents CUNA NC 956-11
TUTELA
PROFESSIONAL
SC 35
To be used neat
or diluted
Lubricants and greases
for transmissions
Brake fluid
Protective agent for radiators
(*) IMPORTANT Do not add or mix with fluids with specifications other than the specified ones.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Use
321
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
322
FUEL CONSUMPTION
The fuel consumption values shown in the
following tables were established during homologation tests prescribed in specific European Directives.
– an extraurban cycle: this includes
frequent accelerating in all gears, simulating normal extraurban use of the vehicle;
the speed varies between 0 and 120 kph;
The test conditions adopted include the following:
– combined consumption: this is calculated by considering a route consisting of
about 37% urban cycle and 63% extraurban cycle.
– an urban cycle: this includes cold
starting followed by simulation of a mixed
urban route;
WARNING The type of route,
traffic conditions, weather conditions, driving style, conditions of
the vehicle, trim level/equipment/
accessories, vehicle load, presence
of roof rack, use of the climate control system, other items that negatively affect the aerodynamics of
the vehicle or wind resistance lead
to different fuel consumption levels than those measured by the
above-mentioned procedures (see
“Reducing running costs and environment pollution” in the chapter
“Correct use of the car”).
SALOON
VERSIONS
1.6
T.SPARK
1.8
T.SPARK
2.0 JTS
2.0 JTS
Selespeed
2.5 V6
24V
2.5 V6 24V
Q-System
JTD
JTD 16V
Multijet
JTD 16V
Multijet (*)
JTD 20V
Multijet
Urban
11.4
12.1
12.2
12.2
17.5
17.5
7.8
8.0
8.0
8.8
Extraurban
6.4
6.4
6.6
6.6
8.5
8.6
4.7
4.7
4.7
5.3
Combined
8.2
8.5
8.6
8.6
11.8
11.9
5.8
5.9
5.9
6.6
(*) 150 CV version (for versions/markets where applicable)
1.6
T.SPARK
1.8
T.SPARK
2.0 JTS
2.0 JTS
Selespeed
2.5 V6
24V
2.5 V6 24V
Q-System
JTD
JTD 16V
Multijet
JTD 16V
Multijet (*)
JTD 20V
Multijet
Urban
11.5
12.2
12.5
12.5
17.8
18.1
7.9
8.2
8.2
8.9
Extraurban
6.5
6.5
6.8
6.8
8.6
8.8
4.9
4.8
4.8
5.5
Combined
8.3
8.6
8.9
8.9
12.0
12.2
6.0
6.1
6.1
6.7
SPORTWAGON
VERSIONS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FUEL CONSUMPTION ACCORDING TO DIRECTIVE 1999/100/EC (litres x 100 km)
(*) 150 CV version (for versions/markets where applicable)
323
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CO2 EMISSIONS
The CO2 emission levels shown in the following tables are measured on a mixed cycle.
CO2 EMISSIONS ACCORDING TO DIRECTIVE STANDARD 1999/100/EC (g/km)
SALOON
VERSIONS
1.6
T.SPARK
1.8
T.SPARK
2.0 JTS
2.0 JTS
Selespeed
2.5 V6
24V
2.5 V6
24V
JTD
JTD 16V
Multijet
JTD V6
Multijet (*)
JTD 20V
Multijet
Value (g/km)
195
202
206
206
282
282
155
157
157
175
(*) 150 CV version (for versions/markets where applicable)
SPORTWAGON
VERSIONS
Value (g/km)
1.6
T.SPARK
1.8
T.SPARK
2.0 JTS
2.0 JTS
Selespeed
2.5 V6
24V
2.5 V6
24V
JTD
JTD 16V
Multijet
JTD V6
Multijet (*)
JTD 20V
Multijet
198
205
212
212
286
291
160
161
161
178
(*) 150 CV version (for versions/markets where applicable)
324
International automobile code
A
B
CH
CRO
CY
D
DK
E
F
FIN
GB
GBZ
GR
H
I
Country
Austria
Belgium
Switzerland
Croatia
Cyprus
Germany
Denmark
Spain
France
Finland
Great Britain
Gibraltar
Greece
Hungary
Italy
IRL
IS
L
N
NL
P
S
SLO
Ireland
Iceland
Luxemburg
Norway
Holland
Portugal
Sweden
Slovenia
Homologation number
G131649J CEPT LPD-A
RTT/D/X1491
BAKOM 97.0516.K.P
LPD-041/97
MCW 129/95 5/1997
G131649J CEPT LPD-D
ARL 9741/Telestyrelsen
E D.G./Tel. 07 97 0647
970235PPLO
FI 97080075
12793
12000/120AG
EK550
HB-23879/97
CEPT-LPD I DGPGF/4/2/03/338862/
FO/0002926/29/10/97
TRA 24/5/60/31
IS-2623-00
L2822/10263-01H
N097000419-R
G131649J CEPT LPD-NL
ICP-044TC-97
UE 970090
N832/00
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
RADIO FREQUENCY REMOTE CONTROL: MINISTERIAL HOMOLOGATIONS
325
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
326
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
ABS (wheel anti-lock system)
– operation and warnings........... 177
Accessories purchased by
the owner ................................ 166
Additional heater ......................... 135
Additional operations
(car maintenance)..................... 251
Additional stop light (3rd stop) 230-297
Air bags, front and side ................ 42
– deactivating passenger’s
air bag ................................ 44
– front air bags ........................ 42
– general cautions ................... 46
– passenger side front air bag .... 43
– side air bags
(side bag - window bag) ........ 44
Air cleaner................................... 265
Air recirculation ........................... 129
Air vents .............................. 108-109
Alfa 156 Sportwagon ........... 278
Alfa Romeo CODE system ..............
6
– operation ..............................
9
Annual inspection programme
(car maintenance)..................... 251
Armrests
– centre ............................ 23-280
– front ..............................
22
– rear ............................... 23-280
Ashtray
– front .................................... 164
– rear .................................... 164
ASR system................................. 181
Battery
– advice for prolonging life ........ 269
– charging ........................ 242-268
– checking the charge ............... 267
– maintenance ......................... 266
– replacement ......................... 269
– starting with an auxiliary
battery ................................ 242
Body
– cleaning ............................... 274
– marking................................ 299
– versions................................ 301
Bodywork paint identification label . 300
Bonnet ....................................... 172
Boot
– capacity ......................... 317-309
– current socket ....................... 285
– extension ............................. 289
– lighting ......................... 171-284
– luggage cover ....................... 287
– object retainer net .................. 285
– oddment compartments .......... 285
– opening from inside .. 131-170-282
– opening lever ....................... 135
– opening with remote
control ........................ 8-170-282
– passenger compartment
separation net (lower)............ 288
– passenger compartment
separation net (upper)............ 288
– securing the load ............ 171-283
– tailgate closing ............... 171-283
– warnings for carrying
luggage.......................... 172-284
Brake and clutch fluid
– checking level and topping up .. 263
Brakes
– checking fluid level
and topping up ..................... 263
– handbrake ........................... 138
– specifications......................... 305
Car lifting
– with arm hoist ....................... 245
– with jack .............................. 245
– with workshop hoist .............. 245
Car maintenance..................... 248
Carrying children safely ................ 35
Catalytic converter ....................... 188
Ceiling lights................................ 162
– centre rear roof lamp .............. 163
– courtesy light......................... 163
– front roof light ....................... 162
– rear roof light ........................ 163
Centre rear roof lamp.................... 163
– bulb replacement ................... 231
Changing battery of key
with remote control ................... 10
Changing bulbs
– general instructions ............... 218
– replacement .......................... 217
– types of bulbs ................. 218-219
Changing wheels.......................... 209
– general instructions ................ 207
Charging the battery .............. 242-268
Checking levels ............................ 254
– brake and clutch fluid ............. 263
– engine coolant....................... 261
– engine oil ............................. 257
– power steering oil .................. 261
– Q-system automatic
gearbox oil............................ 260
– Selespeed gearbox oil ............ 259
– windscreen/rearscreen/
headlamp washing fluid .......... 264
Child safety device .............. 19-35-279
Children (carrying safely) ............. 35
– child’s seats ....................
35-38
– presetting for installing the
Isofix type child restraint system 39
Cigar lighter ............................... 164
Cleaning and maintenance
– car exterior ........................... 274
– car interior ............................ 277
– engine compartment ............. 276
– fabric seats .......................... 277
– leather seats ........................ 277
– plastic parts........................... 277
– windows............................... 276
Climate control system.................. 108
– air vents................... 108-109-110
– controls ................................ 118
Climate control system, automatic
two-zone ................................. 114
Clock.......................... 57-58-59-60-61
Clutch
– checking fluid level
and topping up ...................... 263
CO2 emissions ............................. 324
CODE card...................................
7
Compact spare wheel ................... 294
– technical data........................ 312
Controls...................................... 135
Correct use of the car............ 189
Courtesy light .............................. 163
– bulb replacement ................... 232
Cruise control
(constant speed adjustment) ...... 53
Current socket (boot) ................... 285
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Bulbs
– general instructions ............... 218
– replacement .......................... 217
– types of bulbs ................. 218-219
Dashboard ................ 57-58-59-60-61
– brighting adjustment............... 63
Dashboard lighting dimming .......... 136
Demisting-defrosting
– door mirrors .................... 25-133
– rearscreen....................... 26-133
– windscreen and front
side windows ........................ 132
327
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Diesel filter ................................. 265
Dimensions ........................... 315-316
Dipped beam headlights
– aiming for left-hand/
right-hand driving ................... 178
– changing bulbs ..................... 224
– switching on .........................
48
Direction indicators
– changing front bulbs ............... 223
– changing rear bulbs ................ 228
– changing side bulbs ................ 227
– switching on .........................
Door mirrors..........................
49
25-26
Doors
– centralized locking .................
328
19
– child safety lock...............
20-279
– opening/closing
from inside .....................
19-278
– opening/closing
from outside ...................
18-278
– remote control .......................
7
– remote locking/unlocking ......
16
Economy and environment-friendly
driving ..................................... 197
Electronic alarm system................. 11
– automatic engagement ........... 14
– cutting out the siren .............. 15
– description ............................ 11
– interrupting the alarm ............. 14
– ministerial homologation ........ 16
– request for additional
emote controls....................... 12
– switching off ........................ 13
– switching on ......................... 12
– volumetric protection ............. 15
– when the alarm is triggered ..... 14
Electronic control units ................. 270
Emergency starting ................ 191-205
– starting by inertia .................. 207
– starting with an auxiliary
battery ................................. 242
Engine
– identification codes................. 301
– marking ............................... 299
– specifications......................... 302
Engine compartment
– bonnet ................................. 172
– cleaning................................ 276
Engine coolant
– checking level and topping up .. 261
– temperature gauge
and warning light................... 62
Engine lock system
(Alfa Romeo CODE) ...................
6
Engine oil
– checking level and topping up .. 257
– consumption ......................... 258
Environment
– economy and environmentfriendly driving....................... 197
– emission reducing devices . 187-188
– protecting emission
reducing devices .................... 198
– reducing running costs
and environment pollution ....... 195
– use of non-toxic materials........ 187
EOBD system............................... 182
First-aid kit ................................
Fix&Go (quick tyre repair kit) ........
Flashing main beam headlights .....
Fluids and lubricants ....................
Front foglights
– adjustment............................
– changing bulbs .....................
– switching on..........................
247
212
49
320
177
225
136
– fuses above the main fusebox..
– fuses and relays accessible from
the glovebox .........................
– fuses and relays in engine bay .
– fuses and relays in the main
fusebox ................................
– generalities and cautions ........
– list of protected devices ..........
– specific fuses for Sportwagon
versions................................
236
236
236
235
234
238
299
Gearshift lever ...........................
139
Getting to know your car ....
6
Glovebox light
– changing bulbs ..................... 232
Grab handles.......................... 161-292
Handbrake lever.........................
138
Hazard lights
– switching on ......................... 135
Headlight aiming device
(corrector)................................ 138
Headlight washer................... 52-274
Headlights
– beam adjustment .................. 138
– beam adjustment abroad ........ 177
– bulb replacement ............. 217-220
– compensation for tilt............... 175
– gas discharge headlights ......... 176
Headrests
– front .................................... 23
– rear ............................... 24-279
Horn .......................................... 56
Identification data .......................
299
Identification labels ...................... 300
Ignition device and steering lock 17-18
In an emergency .................... 205
In the event of a puncture ....... 207-294
– changing a wheel................... 209
– FIX&GO (quick tyre repair kit) . 212
– general instructions ................ 207
In the event of an accident ............ 246
– first aid kit ............................ 247
– if anybody is injured .............. 246
Inertial fuel cut-off switch .............. 137
Infocenter ................................... 64
– access to main menu screen .... 72
– control buttons ...................... 66
– date setting/time setting ........ 76
– default value reset ................. 85
– display ................................. 64
– display contrast adjustment ..... 84
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Front light units
– bulb arrangement................... 220
Front roof light ............................ 162
– changing bulbs ...................... 230
Front seats.................................. 21
– adjustments .......................... 21
– centre armrest ....................... 22
– electric heating ..................... 22
– headrests.............................. 23
– rear pockets .......................... 23
Fuel
– consumption ......................... 322
– emergency flap opening
device ............................ 186-292
– fuel cap ............................... 186
– fuel flap................................ 137
– inertial fuel cut-off switch ........ 137
– level gauge and reserve
warning light ......................... 62
– refilling ................................ 319
– refuelling ........................ 185-292
– specifications......................... 319
Fuel reserve ......................... 62-319
Fuel supply (technical data)........... 303
Fuel tank (capacity) .................... 319
Fuses and relays
– fuse summary table................ 238
329
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
330
– display rheostat light
adjustment............................ 63
– exit menu ............................. 86
– General Trip - Trip B ................ 87
– initial check........................... 68
– language selection ................. 78
– menu ................................... 67
– programmed maintenance
(Service) .............................. 82
– speed limit............................ 73
– Trip B on/off ......................... 75
– units selection ....................... 79
– warning/failure buzzer
volume setting....................... 80
– “winter” tyres speed limit ....... 81
Instrument cluster ........................ 56
Intelligent washing function
(windscreen) ............................ 51
Interiors (cleaning) ...................... 277
Interior lighting
– boot lighting ......................... 171
– dashboard............................. 136
– front .................................... 162
– rear ..................................... 163
Internal fittings...................... 161-292
Internal rear-view mirror ............... 25
Isofix (child’s seat)....................... 39
Jack
– use ...............................
209
– warnings ....................... 207-208
Keys.........................................
– remote control .......................
– remote door locking/unlocking
– replacing remote control
battery .................................
– request for additional keys
with remote control ................
Lifting points ..............................
6
7
16
10
12
245
Lights (controls) .......................... 48
Luggage compartment
– capacity ......................... 317-318
– current socket........................ 285
– extension.............................. 289
– lighting .......................... 171-284
– luggage cover........................ 287
– luggage retainer net ............... 285
– oddment compartments .......... 285
– opening from inside .. 135-170-282
– opening lever ........................ 135
– opening with remote
control ..................... 8-170-282
– passenger compartment
separation net (lower)............ 288
– passenger compartment
separation net (upper)............ 288
– reversible net ........................ 283
– securing the load ............ 171-283
– tailgate closing ............... 171-283
– warnings for carrying
luggage.......................... 172-284
Luggage compartment light
– bulb replacement ............. 233-297
Main beam headlights
– changing bulbs .....................
– switching on .........................
Maintenance
– additional operations ..............
– annual inspection programme .
– checking fluid levels ...............
– general information ................
– scheduled maintenance...........
– scheduled maintenance
programme ...........................
– warnings ..............................
Manual climate control system .......
Mechanical gearbox
– lever ....................................
226
48
251
251
254
248
248
249
248
11
139
Q-system automatic gearbox........
– changing bulbs ................ 229-296
Oddment recesses
– in the boot ........................... 285
– on centre console................... 165
– on dashboard ........................ 165
Odometer ...................................
59
Paintwork (maintenance) ............
275
– colour label ........................... 301
Parking....................................... 191
Parking sensors............................ 187
Partial odometer ..........................
63
Performance................................ 314
Pockets and compartments
on front doors ........................... 165
Pollen filter ................................ 266
Power steering
– checking fluid level
and topping up ..................... 262
Power windows ...........................
27
Pre-tensioning devices...................
32
Protecting emission reducing
devices ....................................... 198
– acoustic warning ....................
– automatic operation ...............
– checking the oil level ..............
– fault signalling.......................
– manual operating mode/
Q-System activation................
– moving off ............................
– push starting .........................
– selecting automatic/
manual gearshifting................
– selecting the driving modes .....
– starting the engine .................
– stopping the car.....................
– towing the car .......................
Radio transmitters and cellular
152
159
154
260
158
157
152
159
153
156
152
157
160
telephones ............................... 167
Rain sensor ................................. 51
Rear fog guards
– changing bulbs ............... 227-294
– switching on.......................... 136
Rear light units
– bulb replacement ................... 227
Rear roof lights ............................ 163
– changing bulbs ...................... 231
Rear seats................................... 23
– centre armrest................. 23-280
– headrests ....................... 24-279
– ski compartment.............. 24-280
Rear suspensions
(automatic geometry control) ..... 293
Rearscreen heating................. 26-133
Rearscreen washer ....................... 281
– spray jet ............................... 281
Rearscreen wiper
– blade replacement ................. 281
– operation .............................. 281
Reducing running costs
and environment pollution .......... 197
Refilling ..................................... 319
Remote control ............................ 7-12
– additional remote controls ...... 12
– alarm system ........................ 11
– boot opening.........................
8
– changing the battery .............. 10
– door opening-closing...............
7
– ministerial homologation ......... 325
– remote door locking/
unlocking.............................. 16
Rev counter................................. 62
Reversing lights
– changing bulbs ................ 227-294
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Number plate lights
331
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
332
Roof bars/ski racks...................... 292
Roof rack provision....................... 174
Rubber hoses .............................. 272
Safe driving ...............................
192
192
194
194
195
195
194
193
192
187
– before driving off ...................
– driving in the fog ...................
– driving in the rain...................
– driving on snow and ice ..........
– driving with ABS ....................
– mountain driving....................
– night driving..........................
– when travelling......................
Safeguarding the environment ......
Scheduled maintenance
programme .............................. 249
Seat belts ................................... 28
– carrying children safely ........... 35
– front and rear side belt
height adjustment .................. 31
– general instructions ................ 33
– maintenance ......................... 34
– pretensioners......................... 32
– rear central abdominal belt ..... 30
– use ...................................... 28
Seats (front and rear) ............
21-23
Selespeed gearbox ....................... 141
– automatic operation (CITY) ..... 150
– checking the oil level .............. 259
– failure signalling .................... 150
– moving off ............................ 146
– operation with the engine off... 143
– parking the vehicle ................. 151
– semiautomatic operation
(MANUAL) ............................ 148
– signalling with the buzzer........ 151
– starting the engine ................. 145
– stopping the car..................... 148
– system activation ................... 142
– towing the vehicle.................. 151
– turning the engine off ............. 145
– warnings .............................. 146
Side lights
– changing front bulbs ............... 226
– changing rear bulbs ............... 228
– switching on.......................... 48
Ski compartment ......................... 24
Snow chains................................ 202
Sound system ...................... 183-293
Sound system presetting
system .............................
183
Spark plugs (technical data) .......... 305
Speedometer............................... 63
Spray jets
– windscreen/rearscreen/
headlight .............................. 274
Starting the engine....................... 189
– emergency starting .......... 191-205
– ignition switch ....................... 17
– procedure for JTD versions ....... 190
– procedure for petrol versions .... 189
– switching off the engine.......... 190
– warming the engine ............... 190
Starting with an auxiliary battery ... 242
Steering system
– specifications......................... 305
– steering wheel adjustments .... 25
Steering lock .............................. 18
Steering wheel
– adjustment............................ 25
Steering wheel levers ................... 48
Stop lights
– changing bulbs ...................... 228
Sunroof ...................................... 167
– emergency operation ............. 169
– sliding forwards/backwards..... 168
– raising to the quarterlight
position ............................... 168
Sun visors .................................. 166
Symbols .................................... 5-6
– closing .....................
171-283
– opening from inside .. 135-170-282
– opening with remote
control ..................... 8-170-282
Technical specifications .......... 299
Telephone (provision) .................. 166
– cellular telephone................... 166
– radio transmitters................... 166
Third stop light ...................... 230-297
Tools .......................................... 294
Tow hook ............................ 199-201
Tow rings .................................... 243
Towing the car....................... 160-244
Towing trailers ............................. 199
Transmission
– technical data........................ 304
Tyres
– changing............................... 209
– correct reading....................... 311
– FIX&GO
(kit for quick tyre repairing)..... 212
– in the event of a puncture . 207-294
– inflation pressure .................. 307
– snow chains ......................... 202
– tools and compact spare
wheel housing ....................... 294
– types of tyres
and rims ............................... 306
– winter tyres........................... 202
Underbody protection..................
274
Useful accessories ........................ 204
VDC system ..............................
179
– ASR function ......................... 181
Vehicle inactivity ......................... 203
– removing from storage ........... 204
Volumetric protection .................... 15
Warning lights and indications ....
92
Washing the car
– body .................................... 275
– engine compartment .............. 276
– interiors (cleaning)................. 277
Weights................................ 317-318
Wheel rims ........................... 306-312
– correct rim reading ................. 312
Wheels and tyres
– FIX&GO (quick tyre repair kit) .. 212
– geometry.............................. 313
– replacement ......................... 209
– snow chains ......................... 202
– tyres and rims ...................... 306
– tyre inflation pressure ....... 271-310
Window winders ..........................
Windows
– cleaning................................
Windscreen washer
– checking fluid level
and topping up ......................
– “intelligent washing” function .
– operation .............................
– spray jets..............................
Windscreen wiper
– blade replacement .................
– rain sensor ...........................
– operation ..............................
– spray jets..............................
Winter
– snow chains ..........................
– winter tyres ..........................
28
276
264
51
50
274
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Tailgate
273
51
50
274
202
202
Xenon lights
– replacing dipped-beam
headlamps ............................
– replacing direction indicators ....
– replacing main beam
headlamps ............................
– replacing sidelights .................
221
223
222
223
333
NOTES
®
®
Always ask your mechanic for
Your car is factory filled with Selenia
The engine of your car is factory filled with Selenia,
This is an engine oil range which satisfies the most advanced
international specifications. Its superior technical characteristics
allow Selenia to guarantee the highest performance and
protection of your engine.
The Selenia range includes a number of technologically advanced products:
SELENIA 20K ALFA ROMEO
API SL Lubricant which guarantees maximum
wear protection and performance of
aspirated, turbocharged and multivalve engines.
Specific Selenia formulation for Alfa Romeo.
SELENIA TD
Oil for aspirated and turbocharged and multivalve
diesel engines, guarantees excellent engine cleanliness
and stability even at very high temperatures.
SELENIA RACING
This lubricant has been developed as a result of
Selenia's extensive experience in track and rally
competitions,it maximises engine performance
in all kinds of competition use.
SELENIA WR
Oil spccifically designed for common rail Multijet engines.
Particularly effective during cold starts, it guaranteed maximum wear protection and hydraulc tappets control,
reduction in consumption and stabitlity at high temperatures.
The range also includes Selenia 20K, Selenia Performer 5W-30 e 5W-40, Selenia Digitech.
For further information on Selenia products visit the web site www.flselenia.com.
This supplement describes the main characteristics of the right hand drive version.
For any topic not specifically dealt with in this supplement, refer to the main Owner’s manual which should be thoroughly read to ensure
that the vehicle is used correctly and that the maximum performance is obtained under conditions of safety.
RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION
RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION
341
RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION
DASHBOARD
A0B0611m
fig. 1
1. Side air outlets - 2. Defrosting/demisting vents for side windows - 3. Upper side vents - 4. Passanger’s Air bag - 5. Sound system 6. Engine coolant temperature gauge - 7. Clock - 8. Centre air vents - 9. Infocenter display - 10. Fuel level gauge - 11. Cruise control
lever (where fitted) - 12. Outside lights control lever - 13. Speedometer. - mileage recorder - 14. Check panel - 15. Rev counter 16. Windscreen wiper control lever - 17. Bonnet opening lever - 18. Radio controls on the steering wheel (where applicable) - 19. Ignition switch - 20. Steering wheel lock/release lever - 21. Driver’s Air bag and horns - 22. Controls unit: instrument panel lighting adjustment and healamp diming - 23. Controls for heating, ventilation and climate control - 24. Ashtray and cigar lighter - 25. Hazard warning
lights switch - 26. Glove box.
342
RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION
INSTRUMENT PANEL
A0B0612m
fig. 2 - petrol engine versions
A. Speedometer - B. Mileage recorder and trip meter display - C. Check panel - D. Rev counter - E. Engine coolant temperature gauge F. Clock - G. Fuel level gauge - H. Services warning lights.
WARNING Depending on the version of the vehicle the instrument dials may be black or light grey and the rev counter and speedometer
may vary with regard to the red sector and the clock values.
343
RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION
A0B0613m
fig. 3 - diesel engine versions
A. Speedometer - B. Mileage recorder and display - C. Check panel - D. Rev counter - E. Engine coolant temperature gauge - F. Clock G. Fuel level gauge - H. Services warning lights.
WARNING Depending on the version of the vehicle the instrument dials may be black or light grey and the rev counter and speedometer
may vary with regard to the red sector and the clock values.
344
The display shows:
– the mileage on the first line (6 figures)
– the trip meter (4 figures).
To reset the trip meter, keep the button
(A) pressed for a few seconds.
DASHBOARD LIGHTING
ADJUSTMENT (fig. 4)
HEADLIGHT CORRECTOR
(fig. 4)
When the outside lights are on, the dashboard lighting is adjusted pressing button
(B).
The control (C) on the plate at the side
of the steering column can be moved to four
positions corresponding to various vehicle
loads given below.
Each press of the button (B) cyclically selects one of the three lighting levels provided: low-medium-high.
Both headlights should be adjusted to compensate for vehicle loading.
Position 0: 1 or 2 people occupying front
seats, full fuel tank, on-board equipment
present.
WARNING The trip meter reading is not
stored if the battery is disconnected.
Position 1: 5 people on-board.
RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION
MILEAGE RECORDER WITH
DOUBLE METER DISPLAY
(TOTAL AND TRIP)
Position 2: 5 people on-board, luggage
compartment full (50 kg approximately).
Position 3: Driver and 300 kg in luggage
compartment.
A0B0418m
fig. 4
345
RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION
SEATS
Adjusting the height
of the driver’s seat
Adjusting the angle
of the backrest
FRONT SEATS (fig. 5)
To raise the seat, pull the lever (B) taking it upwards, then continue operating the
lever (up and down) until reaching the required height.
This can be done by turning the knob (C)
until the desired position is reached.
WARNING
Adjustments may be made
solely with the car stationary.
Moving the seat backwards
or forwards
To lower the seat, push the lever (B)
downwards, then operate the lever (up and
down) until reaching the height required.
WARNING Adjustment must only be carried out when seated in the driver’s seat.
Lift lever (A) and push the seat backwards
or forwards. Once you have let go of the
lever, check that the seat is firmly locked
in the runners by trying to move it back and
forth.
If the seat is not locked properly, in the
case of collision it might move unexpectedly with clearly dangerous consequences.
A0B0419m
346
fig. 5
Lumbar adjustment
of the driver’s seat
(for versions/markets where applicable)
Adjustment is done by turning the knob
(D) until reaching the most comfortable position.
To open the boot pull the lever (A) at the
side of the driver’s seat.
AUTOMATIC FUEL CUT-OFF
SWITCH (fig. 6)
This is an automatic safety switch under
the passanger’s seat which is triggered in
the event of crash to interrupt the flow of
fuel.
WARNING
If a smell of fuel is noted
following an accident, or
the fuel system is leaking, to avoid
the risk of fire do not reset the
switch.
WARNING
Do not operate the boot release lever with the car on
the move.
OPENING THE FUEL FLAP
(fig. 7)
The fuel flap is released from inside the car
raising the front part of the lever (B).
RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION
OPENING THE BOOT (fig. 7)
CONTROLS
If no leaks are found the vehicle can be
restarted. Press button (A) to activate the
fuel supply system.
A0B0574m
fig. 6
A0B0421m
fig. 7
347
RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION
HEATING AND CLIMATE CONTROL
A0A0615m
fig. 8
1. Central vents for demisting/defrosting the windscreen - 2. Upper adjustable side vents - 3. Vents for demisting/defrosting the side windows - 4. Movable side outlets - 5. Upper adjustable vent - 6. Central movable and adjustable vents - 7. Front seat floor vents - 8. Rear seat
floor vents - 9. Rear seat adjustable and movable outlets.
348
ADJUSTING THE SIDE VENTS
(fig. 11)
ADJUSTABLE AND MOVABLE
OUTLETS
The vent is fitted with an opening/closing
control.
At the ends of the dashboard there are adjustable vents (A) for ventilating the passenger compartment and fixed vents (B) for
demisting the side windows.
Fig. 12: Front seats (at the ends of the
dashboard).
closed.
•) == Completely
Completely open.
Fig. 13: Rear seats (on the console between the seats).
To adjust the air flow of the vents turn the
ring (C).
ADJUSTING THE CENTRE
VENTS (fig. 10)
Each vent has a lever through which it is
possible to direct the flow of air towards the
persons horizontally.
closed.
•) == Completely
Completely open.
RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION
ADJUSTING THE UPPER VENT
(fig. 9)
Using the opening/closing control it is possible to adjust the air flow rate of the vents.
closed.
•( == Completely
Completely open.
A0B0572m
fig. 9
A0B0573m
fig. 10
A0B0297m
fig. 11
349
RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION
To adjust the air flow rate use the fins (A)
pressing to open/close.
The air flow is directed by turning the outlets using the fins.
AIR BAG
The key-operated switch (fig. 14) has
two positions:
DEACTIVATING THE
PASSENGER’S AIR BAG
1) Passenger’s Air bag activated: (ON position P) warning light on instrument cluster off; it is absolutely prohibited to carry a
child on the front seat.
Should it be absolutely necessary to carry a child on the front seat, the passenger’s
Air bag on the vehicle can be deactivated.
A0B0299m
Deactivation takes place using the car
ignition key to operate the special switch
on the left hand side of the dashboard
(fig. 14). Access to the switch is gained
only with the door open.
2) Passenger’s Air bag deactivated:
(OFF position F) warning light on instrument cluster on; it is possible to carry a
child protected by special restraint systems
on the front seat.
The warning light L on the cluster stays
on permanently until the passenger’s Air bag
is reactivated.
When the door is open, the key can be
inserted and removed in both positions.
fig. 12
A0B0289m
350
fig. 13
A0B0614m
fig. 14
SELESPEED GEARBOX
Below you will find the more significant
particulars of right-hand drive versions.
WARNING As the differences are only
formal, due to the specular position of the
controls, as far as functioning is concerned,
please refer to the descriptions given for lefthand drive versions.
Fig. 16 shows the steering wheel fitted
with two buttons on the spokes for shifting
the gear engaged up/down.
Fig. 17 shows the position of button A
for selecting the automatic CITY mode.
Fig. 15 shows the gearshift lever with
the lay-out of the movements needed to select the different gears.
A0B0411m
RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION
WARNING
SERIOUS DANGER:
with a car fitted
with an Air bag on the passenger’s
side, do not place a child’s seat on
the front seat facing backwards.
In the case of need, always deactivate the passenger’s Air bag (if
fitted) when a child’s seat is placed
on the front seat. Even if it is not
compulsory by law, for better protection of adults, you are recommended to activate the Air bag immediately as soon as child
transport is no longer necessary.
fig. 16
A0B0410m
fig. 15
A0B0412m
fig. 17
351
RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION
Q-SYSTEM
AUTOMATIC
GEARBOX
Fig. 20 shows the position of buttons
A C/S and B ICE for selecting the gearbox operating mode.
IN THE EVENT OF A
BURNT FUSE OR RELAY
FUSES IN THE MAIN FUSEBOX
(fig. 21 or fig. 22 for
versions/markets where
applicable)
Below you will find the more significant
particulars of right-hand drive versions.
The fuses for the main devices are housed
in a control unit under the dashboard, to the
right of the steering column.
WARNING As the differences are only
formal, due to the specular position of the
controls, as far as functioning is concerned,
please refer to the descriptions given for lefthand drive versions.
A0B0414m
A0B0416m
The illustrations show the gearshift control
lever with the lay-out of the movements
needed to select gears in the automatic
mode fig. 18 and manual mode fig. 19.
fig. 19
A0B0413m
352
fig. 18
A0B0415m
fig. 20
fig. 21
WARNING In case of doubt, contact an
Alfa Romeo Authorized Service.
The graphic symbols which distinguish the
main electric component corresponding to
each fuse are given on a label (fig. 23)
on the inner wall of the panel (A-fig. 21).
Some spare fuses are housed at the right
of the control unit; you are advised to replenish the stock of spare fuses when they
are used.
FUSES ABOVE THE MAIN
FUSEBOX
The protection fuses for some services are
grouped in three containers (fig. 24)
above the main fusebox to which access is
gained removing the panel (A-fig. 21 or
A-fig. 22).
A0B0397m
A0B0185m
fig. 22
fig. 23
RIGHT HAND DRIVE VERSION
To gain access to them, remove the panel (A-fig. 21 or fig. 22) releasing the
tabs (B-fig. 21 or fig. 22) in the direction of the arrow below and unlock the
screw (C-fig. 21 or fig. 22).
A0B0417m
fig. 24
353
TYRE INFLATION PRESSURES COLD (bar)
Tyres
185/65 R15” (▼)
front
rear
Tyres
205/55 R16”(●)
front
rear
Reduced load
(2 occupants)
2.2
2.2
2.4
Full load
2.5
2.5
2.6
Tyres
Tyres
205/60 R15” (▼)
215/45 ZR17” (*)
front
rear
front
rear
2.4
2.2
2.2
2.4
2.4
2.6
2.5
2.5
2.6
2.6
Compact spare wheel
125/80 R15”
4.2
(*) = Snow chains may not be used on this tyres
(●) = Tyres on which chains can be fitted: use snow chains with reduced size with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 9 mm.
(▼) = Tyres on which chains can be fitted: use snow chains with reduced size with max. protrusion beyond the tyre profile of 12 mm.
With the tyre hot the inflating pressure should be +0.3 bar compared with the specified rating. Recheck pressure value with cold tyres.
With winter tyres the inflation pressure should be +0.2 bar compared with the specified rating.
ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT (litres)
1.6 T.SPARK
1.8 T.SPARK
2.0 JTS
2.5 V6 24V
JTD
JTD 16V
Multijet
JTD 20V
Multijet
4.40
4.40
5.90
4.50
4.50
5
1.6 T.SPARK
1.8 T.SPARK
2.0 JTS
2.5 V6 24V
JTD
JTD 16V
Multijet
JTD 20V
Multijet
Fuel tank capacity
63
63
63
63
63
63
63
Reserve
9
9
9
9
9
9
9
Quantity for periodical
replacement (also changing filter)
4.40
Do not discard used oil in the environment.
REFUELLING (litres)
Only use unleaded petrol with over 95 R.O.N.
AFTER SALES
ASSISTENZA TECNICA - INGEGNERIA ASSISTENZIALE
Viale Alfa Romeo 20020 Arese (MI) - Italia
Fiat Auto S.p.A.
Pubblication n° 60431326 - 5th Edition - 09/2004
Printed by Satiz - Turin (Italy)
SERVICE
All rights reserved. Reproduction, even partial, is strictly prohibited without
written permission from Fiat Auto S.p.A
Coordinamento Editoriale Satiz - Torino
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising